1. business and industrial
2. business operations
3. management
4. project management

PROJECT
MANUAL
Oklahoma Memorial Union
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
University of Oklahoma
Facilities Management
160 Felgar St
Norman, OK 43019
OU Project No. 56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
August 8, 2014
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY FOR PRINTING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Division
Section Title
PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING DOCUMENTS GROUP
DIVISION 00 - PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS
00 0101
PROJECT TITLE PAGE
00 0107
SEALS PAGE
00 0115
LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS
00 3100
AVAILABLE PROJECT INFORMATION
SPECIFICATIONS GROUP
General Requirements Subgroup
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01 1000
SUMMARY
01 2500
SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
01 3000
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
01 4000
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
01 4200
REFERENCES
01 5000
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
01 6000
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
01 7000
EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS
01 7419
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
Facility Construction Subgroup
DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS
02 4119
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
DIVISION 05 - METALS
05 4000
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
05 5000
METAL FABRICATIONS
DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES
06 1053
MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY
06 2000
FINISH CARPENTRY
06 4116
PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS
06 6400
PLASTIC PANELING
DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07 8413
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
07 9200
JOINT SEALANTS
DIVISION 09 - FINISHES
09 2216
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
09 2900
GYPSUM BOARD
09 3013
CERAMIC TILING
09 5113
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
09 9123
INTERIOR PAINTING
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
TOC - 1
Table of Contents
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
Facility Services Subgroup
DIVISION 20 – COMMON FIRE SUPPRESSION, PLUMBING AND MECHANICAL
20 0010
BASIC MATERIALS, METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS
20 0020
SPECIAL CONDITIONS
20 0040
DEMOLITION
20 2529
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PIPING AND EQUPMENT
20 0548
VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION
21 0548
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
21 1000
WATER-BASED FIRE-SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING
22 0523
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
22 0700
PLUMBING INSULATION
22 1116
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
22 1119
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES
22 1316
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
22 1319
SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES
22 3300
ELECTRIC, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS
22 4000
PLUMBING FIXTURES
DIVISION 23 - HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING
23 0548
VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 0593
TESTING, BALANCING, AND COMMISSIONING FOR HVAC
23 0700
HVAC INSULATION
23 1123
FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING
23 2113
HYDRONIC PIPING
23 2213
STEAM AND STEAM CONDENSATE HEATING PIPING
23 2230
STEAM AND STEAM CONDENSATE SPECIALTIES
23 3100
HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS
23 3713
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES
23 3723
ROOF VENTILATORS
23 3813
COMMERCIAL-KITCHEN HOODS
23 7300
BELT DRIVE BLOWER COIL UNITS
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 0010
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
26 0040
ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION
26 0049
ELECTRICAL TEMPORARY FACILITIES
26 0050
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
26 0519
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
26 0526
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 0529
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 0533
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 0553
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING
26 2416
PANELBOARDS
26 2726
WIRING DEVICES
26 2816
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
26 5000
LIGHTING
DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
28 3111
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
TOC - 2
Table of Contents
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
DOCUMENT 00 0101
PROJECT TITLE PAGE
1.1
PROJECT MANUAL
A.
Oklahoma Memorial Union – Chick-Fil-A Remodel
B.
University of Oklahoma.
C.
OU Project No. 56-14.
D.
RFP #R-15135-15
E.
Facilities Management
F.
160 Felgar St
G.
Norman, OK 73019
H.
Issued for Construction: August 8, 2014
END OF DOCUMENT
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
00 0101 - 1
Project Title Page
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY FOR PRINTING
DOCUMENT 00 0107
SEALS PAGE
1.1
ARCHITECTURAL DESIGN PROFESSIONALS OF RECORD
A.
Architect:
1.
Keith D. Price
2.
OK #4312
3.
Responsible for Divisions 02-09.
(See page 2 for Engineering Design Professionals of Record)
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
00 0107 - 1
Seals Page
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
1.2
ENGINEERING DESIGN PROFESSIONALS OF RECORD
A.
General Information:
1.
William R. Cooper.
2.
OK #3165.
3.
Responsible for Division 00-01.
B.
Fire Suppression Engineer:
1.
Donald C. Carter.
2.
OK #16625.
3.
Responsible for Division 21.
C.
Plumbing Engineer:
1.
Julia R. Haiduk.
2.
OK #27270.
3.
Responsible for Division 20, 22.
D.
HVAC Engineer:
1.
Martin VanGundy.
2.
OK #21403.
3.
Responsible for Division 20, 23.
E.
Electrical Engineer:
1.
Scott M. Welch.
2.
OK #23399.
3.
Responsible for Division 26, 28.
END OF DOCUMENT
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
00 0107 - 2
Seals Page
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
DOCUMENT 00 0115
LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS
1.1
LIST OF DRAWINGS
A.
Drawings: Drawings consist of the Contract Drawings and other drawings listed on the Table of
Contents page of the separately bound drawing set titled Construction, dated 08/08/2014, as modified
by subsequent Addenda and Contract modifications.
B.
List of Drawings: Drawings consist of the following Contract Drawings and other drawings of type
indicated:
A1:
Architectural Symbols, Site Plan and Title Sheet
A1.1:
Perspective View and Finish Notes
A2:
Demolition and Equipment Plan
A3:
Dimension and Interior Elevation Reference Plan
A4:
Electrical Rough-In and Floor Finish Plan
A5:
Reflected Ceiling Plan
A6:
Equipment Schedules
A7:
Equipment Schedules and Vendor List
A8:
Elevations
A9:
Elevations
A10:
Elevations
A11:
Counter Plans and Sections
A12:
Details
A13:
Sections
A14:
Door Schedule and Sections
A15:
Overall Plan
M1.0:
Mechanical Notes and Legends
M2.0:
Mechanical Demolition Plan, New Mechanical Plan and Details
th
th
M3.0:
4 Floor Mechanical Demolition Plan, 4 Floor New Mechanical Plan and Details
E1.0:
Electrical Notes and Legends
E2.0:
Electrical Improvement Plans
E3.0:
Lighting and Life Safety Plan
P1.0:
Plumbing Notes and Legends
P2.0:
Plumbing Demolition Plans
P3.0:
Plumbing Improvement Plans
P3.1:
Plumbing Alternate Improvement Plan
P4.0:
Plumbing Details and Schedules
FP1.0:
Fire Sprinkler Plans
U14-414-1: Kitchen Hood Details
U14-414-2: Kitchen Hood Fire System Details
U14-414-3: Kitchen Hood Details
U14-414-4: Kitchen Hood Fire System Details
END OF DOCUMENT
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
00 0115 - 1
List of Drawing Sheets
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY FOR PRINTING
DOCUMENT 00 3100
AVAILABLE PROJECT INFORMATION
1.1
AVAILABLE PROJECT INFORMATION
A.
This Document and its referenced attachments are part of the Procurement and Contracting
Requirements for Project. They provide Owner's information for the Bidder's convenience and are
intended to supplement rather than serve in lieu of the Bidder's own investigations. They are made
available for the Bidder's convenience and information but are not a warranty of existing conditions. This
Document and its attachments are not part of the Contract Documents.
B.
Existing drawings, specifications and submittals that include information on existing conditions including
previous construction at Project site are available for viewing at the office of the Owner – University of
Oklahoma, Facilities Management Department, 160 Felgar St., Norman, OK.
C.
Permit Application: The building permit for Project has been applied for by Owner. A copy of the permit
will be on display at the project site.
D.
Hot-Work Permits: Application for Hot-Work Permits shall be made by the contractor through the
University of Oklahoma Office of the Fire Marshall.
END OF DOCUMENT
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
00 3100 - 1
Available Project Information
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY FOR PRINTING
SECTION 01 1000
SUMMARY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
PROJECT INFORMATION
A.
Project Identification: Chick-Fil-A Remodel – Proj. 56-14
1.
Project Location: University of Oklahoma, Oklahoma Memorial Union, Food Court
B.
Owner: University of Oklahoma
C.
Architect: KTP Architecture
D.
Engineers: OU Facilities Management Department
E.
The Work consists of the remodel of the Oklahoma Memorial Union Chick-Fil-A as described in the
accompanying design drawings and documents. Generally, the work consists of expanding Chick-FIl-A
into the adjacent tenant space, including wall demolition and construction, new ceiling and lighting, new
HVAC system and ductwork, plumbing modifications to accommodate new equipment, new flooring,
painting, fire suppression system modifications, and other items to remodel the existing food areas.
F.
Work by Owner: Asbestos abatement, selective equipment removal/storage (equipment disconnection
and re-connection to be performed by associated contractors).
G.
Owner-Furnished Products:
1.
The following products will be furnished by Owner and installed by the contractors, General
Contractor to Coordinate.
a.
Selected kitchen equipment, refer to schedules in architectural drawings.
1.2
WORK RESTRICTIONS
A.
Contractor's Use of Premises: During construction, Contractor will have limited use of space indicated.
1.
Owner will occupy the building during construction. Perform construction during normal working
hours Monday thru Friday, (other than holidays), unless otherwise agreed to in advance by
Owner. Clean up work areas at the end of each work period.
2.
Driveways, Walkways, and Entrances: Keep driveways loading areas and entrances serving
premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times.
Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials.
B.
Nonsmoking Building: Smoking or any other use of tobacco products is not permitted on University of
Oklahoma property.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
01 1000 - 1
Summary
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY FOR PRINTING
SECTION 01 2500
SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
A.
Substitutions include changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from
those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.
B.
Where one or more manufacturers are listed for a particular equipment item, the Contractor shall furnish
the equipment as manufactured by one of the manufacturers listed. If the Contractor desires to
substitute a manufacturer not listed, he must submit his request to the Architect/Engineer in
writing at least ten (10) days before bids on the project are received. If the proposed substitute
equipment is determined to be acceptable, the Architect/Engineer will list the approved substitute
equipment in an addendum to the project plans/specifications and the Contractor shall base his bid on
the equipment items listed.
C.
The Architect/Engineer WILL NOT give verbal approval of any substitute materials or consider
requests for substitute materials if received less than ten (10) days before bids are received.
D.
Substitutions proposed shall be equivalent in such features as noise level, power requirements, metal
gages, vibration attenuation, finish, appearance, certification of recognized testing agencies and
standards bureaus, allowable working pressures, physical size and arrangement so far as affects
installation in the available space, factory applied insulation, electrical devices, controls, access to
internal parts, water and air pressure drops, operating speeds, coil face areas, fan diameters, operating
efficiencies, and features and capacities specified herein.
E.
If required by the Architect/Engineer, the Contractor shall provide complete samples of substitute
equipment to be delivered to the Architect/Engineer for examination. Handling, storage, shipping and
delivery to and from the Architect/Engineer of any sample required shall be at the cost of the Contractor.
F.
If the electrical characteristics of the submitted item differ in any way from the specified item, this
contractor is responsible for coordinating with the Electrical Contractor. This contractor shall include
purchase and installation of all wiring, conduit, circuit breakers, fused disconnects, and devices
necessary to make the substituted item work properly.
G.
Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or
fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and
Drawing numbers and titles.
1.
Substitution Request Form: Use CSI Form 13.1A
2.
Submit requests within 10 days before bids are received.
3.
Identify product to be replaced and show compliance with requirements for substitutions. Include
a detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work
specified, a list of changes needed to other parts of the Work required to accommodate proposed
substitution, and any proposed changes in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time should the
substitution be accepted.
4.
Owner will review proposed substitutions and provide notification if accepted by Addendum.
H.
Do not submit unapproved substitutions on Shop Drawings or other submittals.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
01 2500 - 1
Substitution Procedures
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
I.
After the submittals are approved, the Architect/Engineer will consider substitute equipment only if
unusual circumstances warrant further consideration. Requests for consideration of substitutes shall be
made in writing and state all applicable reasons and/or circumstances. The Contractor's presence will
be required in any meetings or discussions regarding the submittals. Owner will review proposed
substitutions and notify Contractor of their acceptance or rejection by Change Order. If necessary,
Owner will request additional information or documentation for evaluation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
01 2500 - 2
Substitution Procedures
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
SECTION 01 3000
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
A.
Key Personnel Names: Within 5 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key personnel
assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. List e-mail
addresses and telephone numbers.
B.
Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient
and orderly installation of each part of the Work.
C.
Requests for Information (RFIs): On discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation of
the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI. Use AIA Document G716.
D.
Schedule and conduct progress meetings at Project site weekly. Notify Owner of meeting dates and
times. Require attendance of each subcontractor or other entity concerned with current progress or
involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities.
1.
GC Project Manager will record minutes and distribute to everyone concerned, including Owner.
1.2
SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related
activities that require sequential activity.
1.
No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals
enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.
2.
The Contractor shall provide the submittals in electronic/PDF or hard-copy format. Owner will
return a copy with comments as appropriate.
a.
Electronic/PDF Format: Submit one (1) PDF version electronic file to the Owner’s
representative for approval.
b.
Hard-Copy Format: Submit four (4) copies, bound in four (4) hard plastic, three ring binders
with clear plastic envelope on cover and spline, to the Owner’s representative for approval.
B.
Submittal Schedule:
1.
Within twenty-one (21) calendar days after the project contract is signed or notice to proceed is
issued (whichever comes first), this Contractor shall submit the required documents to the
Architect/Engineer for his approval.
2.
If the submittal is not received by the Architect/Engineer within the allowed twenty-one (21)
calendar day period, each item of equipment must be furnished exactly as specified. If more than
one manufacturer is mentioned in the specifications, the Contractor must furnish the equipment of
the first manufacturer listed.
3.
The Architect/Engineer may require resubmittals on any equipment found to be unacceptable or
incomplete. Any item not resubmitted within ten (10) business days after the issue date of the
resubmittal notice shall be furnished exactly as specified.
4.
Contractor shall allow for 10 business days for each round of submittal review.
C.
Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as follows:
1.
Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal
requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling navigation
to each item.
2.
Name file with unique identifier, including project identifier, Specification Section number, and
revision identifier.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
01 3000 - 1
Administrative Requirements
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
3.
Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval markings
and action taken by Owner.
D.
Identify options requiring selection by Owner.
E.
Provide printed descriptive literature, shop drawings, and illustrations of the equipment submitted. Only
portions of catalogs that pertain to the equipment shall be included, and shall indicate completely all of
the specification requirements. Where catalog sheets or drawings indicate several sizes or types of
construction, they shall be clearly marked to indicate the size and/or type of construction proposed to be
used on this project. Complete catalogs are not acceptable as submittals.
F.
Identify any deviations in features, function, and/or performance from the equipment specified.
Deviations shall be clearly defined and attention directed to the item(s).
G.
Partial or incomplete submittals and submittals not conforming to the requirements of this specification
will not be accepted, and will be returned to the Contractor for completion and/or correction.
1.3
CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE SUBMITTAL PROCEDURE
A.
Submit required submittals in the following format:
1.
Working electronic copy of schedule file, where indicated.
2.
PDF electronic file.
3.
Two paper copies.
B.
Contractor's Construction Schedule: Initial schedule, of size required to display entire schedule for entire
construction period.
1.
Submit a working electronic copy of schedule, using Microsoft Project, and labeled to comply with
requirements for submittals. Include type of schedule (initial or updated) and date on label.
C.
Coordinate Contractor's construction schedule with the schedule of values, submittal schedule, progress
reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A.
2.2
General Submittal Procedure Requirements: Prepare and submit submittals required by individual
Specification Sections.
1.
Submit electronic material and equipment submittals via email as PDF electronic files.
a.
Owner will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an electronic
project record document file.
b.
Submit hard copies of full size shop drawings and samples as indicated below.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit 1 copy of each informational submittal. Owner will return a photo copy or electronic copy with
comments as appropriate.
B.
Product Data: Mark each copy to show applicable products and options. Include the following:
1.
Manufacturer's written recommendations, product specifications, and installation instructions.
2.
Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring.
3.
Printed performance curves and operational range diagrams.
4.
Testing by recognized testing agency.
5.
Compliance with specified standards and requirements.
C.
Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop
Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. Submit on sheets at
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
01 3000 - 2
Administrative Requirements
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 30 by 42 inches. Submit shop drawings 11x17 and smaller
electronically. Submit shop drawings larger than 11x17 electronically or submit two (2) sets of hard
copies. Include the following:
1.
Dimensions and identification of products.
2.
Fabrication and installation drawings and roughing-in and setting diagrams.
3.
Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring.
4.
Notation of coordination requirements.
5.
Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.
D.
2.3
Samples: Submit two (2) samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture and for a comparison of
these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. Include name
of manufacturer and product name on label.
1.
If variation is inherent in material or product, submit at least 3 sets of paired units that show
variations.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Informational Submittals: Submit 1 copy of each informational submittal. Owner will return a photo copy
or electronic copy with comments as appropriate.
B.
Qualification Data: Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and
addresses of Owners, and other information specified.
C.
Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product
complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
2.4
DELEGATED DESIGN SERVICES
A.
Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design
professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and
systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.
1.
If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written
request for additional information to Owner.
B.
Delegated-Design Submittal: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals,
submit 1 copy of a statement, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each
product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design
professional.
1.
Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract
Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services.
2.5
CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A.
Gantt-Chart Schedule: Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal Gantt-chart-type schedule
within 10 days of date established for Notice of Award.
B.
Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each
week with a continuous vertical line.
C.
Cost Correlation: Superimpose a cost correlation timeline, indicating planned and actual costs. On the
line, show planned and actual dollar volume of the Work performed as of planned and actual dates used
for preparation of payment requests.
D.
Recovery Schedule: When periodic update indicates the Work is 7 or more calendar days behind the
current approved schedule, submit a separate recovery schedule indicating means by which Contractor
intends to regain compliance with the schedule. Indicate changes to working hours, working days, crew
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
01 3000 - 3
Administrative Requirements
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
sizes, and equipment required to achieve compliance, and indicate date by which recovery will be
accomplished.
2.6
HOT WORK PERMIT
A.
All cutting, welding, brazing, soldering, torch applications, grinding or similar activities must have an
authorized hot work permit on display before work can start. Hot Work Permit application is available for
printing at the end of this section.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
SUBMITTAL REVIEW
A.
Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance
with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before
submitting to Architect/Engineer.
B.
Architect/Engineer will review each action submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modifications
required, will stamp each submittal with an action stamp, and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate
action.
C.
Informational Submittals: Architect/Engineer will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return
it if it does not comply with requirements. Owner will forward each submittal to appropriate party.
D.
The Architect/Engineer will review and prepare a report with recommendations on the submittal and one
(1) resubmittal. If the resubmittal is incomplete or in any other way unsatisfactory or unacceptable, the
review of any further required resubmittals will be at the Contractors expense, otherwise the material
must be furnished as specified.
E.
Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded.
3.2
CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A.
Updating: At weekly intervals, update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities.
Issue schedule 1 day before each regularly scheduled progress meeting.
1.
As the Work progresses, indicate Actual Completion percentage for each activity.
B.
Distribute copies of approved schedule to Owner, subcontractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and
parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know schedule responsibility. When revisions are made,
distribute updated schedules to the same parties.
END OF SECTION
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
01 3000 - 4
Administrative Requirements
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
HOT WORK PERMIT
CUTTING, WELDING, BRAZING, SOLDERING, TORCH APPLICATIONS, GRINDING OR SIMILAR ACTIVITIES
INSTRUCTIONS
1.
2.
3.
EVALUATE IF THE HOT WORK CAN BE AVOIDED OR COMPLETED
IN A SAFER WAY.
FOLLOW CHECKLIST AND PRECAUTIONS LISTED TO THE RIGHT.
COMPLETE PERMIT AND DISPLAY IN AREA WHERE WORK IS
BEING DONE.
HOT WORK APPLICANT INFORMATION
RESPONSIBLE PARTY:
________
COMPANY/DEPARTMENT:
________
JOB DATE:
WORK ORDER #
DESCRIBE LOCATION OF WORK (IF INSIDE, DENOTE BLDG. & ROOM #)
CHECKLIST & PRECAUTIONS
AVAILABLE SPRINKLERS, HOSE STREAMS, AND EXTINGUISHERS
ARE IN GOOD SERVICE AND GOOD REPAIR.
HOT WORK EQUIPMENT IS IN GOOD REPAIR.
REQUIREMENTS WITHIN 35 FT OF WORK
COMBUSTIBLE FLOORS WET DOWN, COVERED WITH DAMP
SAND, OR OTHER SHIELDING MATERIAL.
FLOORS SWEPT CLEAN OF COMBUSTIBLES.
EXPLOSIVE ATMOPHERE IN AREA ELIMINATED.
FLAMMABLE LIQUIDS, DUST, LINT, AND OILY DEPOSITS
REMOVED.
ALL WALL AND FLOOR OPENINGS WITHIN 35 FEET COVERED.
FIRE-RESISTANT COVERS SUSPENDED BENEATH WORK.
OTHER COMBUSTIBLE MATERIALS REMOVED OR COVERED
WITH FIRE-RESISTANT COVERS.
HOT WORK CONDUCTED OUTSIDE
IF OUTSIDE, COMBUSTIBLE VEGETATION, MULCH OR OTHER
MATERIAL IS WET DOWN OR PROPERLY COVERED
AN ADEQUATE WATER SOURCE FOR EXTINGUISHMENT WILL BE
PROVIDED
HOT WORK WILL NOT BE DONE ON EXTREME WIND WARNING
OR HIGH FIRE DANGER DAYS
JOB DESCRIPTION:
I VERIFY THAT THE ABOVE LOCATION HAS BEEN EXAMINED, THAT
PRECAUTIONS ON THE CHECKLIST HAVE BEEN TAKEN TO PREVENT
FIRE, AND THAT PERMISSION IS AUTHORIZED TO PERFORM THE
WORK.
WORK ON WALLS AND CEILINGS
COMBUSTIBLES ON THE OTHER SIDE OF WALL MOVED AWAY.
CONSTRUCTION IS NONCOMBUSTIBLE AND WITHOUT
COMBUSTIBLE COVERINGS.
AUTHORIZED HOT WORK PERMIT PROGRAM
WORK ON ENCLOSED EQUIPMENT
EQUIPMENT CLEANED OF ALL COMBUSTIBLES.
EQUIPMENT PURGED OF ALL FLAMMABLE VAPORS.
HOT WORK PERMIT WRITER:
SUPERVISOR:
FIRE WATCH:
APPROVED BY:____________________________________________
TITLE:___________________________________________________
PERMIT EXPIRES: DATE:
FIRE WATCH AND WORK AREA MONITORING
FIRE WATCH SHOULD BE PROVIDED DURING AND FOR 30
MINUTES AFTER WORK IS COMPLETED.
FIRE WATCH PERSONNEL ARE EQUIPPED AND TRAINED ON THE
USE OF FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND ARE FAMILIAR WITH
BUILDING FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS.
FIRE WATCH MAY BE REQUIRED ABOVE, BELOW AND IN
ADJACENT AREAS.
UNIVERSITY OF OKLAHOMA
TIME:
The University of Oklahoma
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY FOR PRINTING
SECTION 01 4000
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or
indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract
Document requirements.
B.
Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards
establish different or conflicting requirements, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer
uncertainties to Owner for a decision.
C.
Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the
minimum. The actual installation may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. Indicated numeric
values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to
Owner for a decision.
D.
Contractor's Statement of Responsibility: When required by authorities having jurisdiction, submit copy
of written statement of responsibility sent to authorities having jurisdiction before starting work on the
following systems:
1.
Seismic-force-resisting system, designated seismic system, or component listed in the
designated seismic system quality-assurance plan prepared by Owner.
2.
Main wind-force-resisting system or a wind-resisting component listed in the wind-force-resisting
system quality-assurance plan prepared by Owner.
E.
Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other Sections.
Include the following:
1.
Date of issue.
2.
Project title and number.
3.
Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency.
4.
Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.
5.
Names of individuals making tests and inspections.
6.
Description of the Work and test and inspection method.
7.
Identification of product and Specification Section.
8.
Complete test or inspection data.
9.
Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results.
10.
Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and
inspecting.
11.
Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the
Contract Document requirements.
12.
Name and signature of laboratory inspector.
13.
Recommendations on re-testing and re-inspecting.
F.
Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses,
certifications, inspection reports, notices, receipts for fee payments, and similar documents, established
for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.
G.
Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in
jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the
kind indicated.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
01 4000 - 1
Quality Requirements
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
H.
Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct
testing and inspecting indicated; and where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable
to authorities.
I.
Re-testing/Re-inspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's
responsibility, provide quality-control services, including re-testing and re-inspecting, for construction
that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.
J.
Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Owner and Contractor in performance of duties.
Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.
1.
Notify Owner and Contractor of irregularities or deficiencies in the Work observed during
performance of its services.
2.
Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase requirements of the Contract Documents or approve or
accept any portion of the Work.
3.
Do not perform any duties of Contractor.
K.
Associated Services: Cooperate with testing agencies and provide reasonable auxiliary services as
requested. Provide the following:
1.
Access to the Work.
2.
Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.
3.
Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspecting.
Assist agency in obtaining samples.
4.
Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples.
5.
Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment.
L.
Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction
to accommodate testing and inspecting.
1.
Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.
M.
Special Tests and Inspections: At Owner’s direction, engage a qualified testing/inspection agent to
conduct special tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
REPAIR AND PROTECTION
A.
General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged
construction and restore substrates and finishes.
B.
Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for
quality-control services.
END OF SECTION
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
01 4000 - 2
Quality Requirements
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
SECTION 01 4200
REFERENCES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless
otherwise indicated.
B.
Abbreviations and Acronyms: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other
Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names
are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract
Documents.
1.
AABC - Associated Air Balance Council; www.aabc.com.
2.
AAMA - American Architectural Manufacturers Association; www.aamanet.org.
3.
AAPFCO - Association of American Plant Food Control Officials; www.aapfco.org.
4.
AASHTO - American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials;
www.transportation.org.
5.
AATCC - American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists; www.aatcc.org.
6.
ABMA - American Bearing Manufacturers Association; www.americanbearings.org.
7.
ACI - American Concrete Institute; (Formerly: ACI International); www.concrete.org.
8.
ACPA - American Concrete Pipe Association; www.concrete-pipe.org.
9.
AEIC - Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The); www.aeic.org.
10.
AF&PA - American Forest & Paper Association; www.afandpa.org.
11.
AGA - American Gas Association; www.aga.org.
12.
AHAM - Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers; www.aham.org.
13.
AHRI - Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute (The); www.ahrinet.org.
14.
AI - Asphalt Institute; www.asphaltinstitute.org.
15.
AIA - American Institute of Architects (The); www.aia.org.
16.
AISC - American Institute of Steel Construction; www.aisc.org.
17.
AISI - American Iron and Steel Institute; www.steel.org.
18.
AITC - American Institute of Timber Construction; www.aitc-glulam.org.
19.
AMCA - Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; www.amca.org.
20.
ANSI - American National Standards Institute; www.ansi.org.
21.
AOSA - Association of Official Seed Analysts, Inc.; www.aosaseed.com.
22.
APA - APA - The Engineered Wood Association; www.apawood.org.
23.
APA - Architectural Precast Association; www.archprecast.org.
24.
API - American Petroleum Institute; www.api.org.
25.
ARI - Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute; (See AHRI).
26.
ARI - American Refrigeration Institute; (See AHRI).
27.
ARMA - Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association; www.asphaltroofing.org.
28.
ASCE - American Society of Civil Engineers; www.asce.org.
29.
ASCE/SEI - American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural Engineering Institute; (See ASCE).
30.
ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers;
www.ashrae.org.
31.
ASME - ASME International; (American Society of Mechanical Engineers); www.asme.org.
32.
ASSE - American Society of Safety Engineers (The); www.asse.org.
33.
ASSE - American Society of Sanitary Engineering; www.asse-plumbing.org.
34.
ASTM - ASTM International; (American Society for Testing and Materials International);
www.astm.org.
35.
ATIS - Alliance for Telecommunications Industry Solutions; www.atis.org.
36.
AWEA - American Wind Energy Association; www.awea.org.
37.
AWI - Architectural Woodwork Institute; www.awinet.org.
38.
AWMAC - Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada; www.awmac.com.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
01 4200 - 1
References
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
39.
40.
41.
42.
43.
44.
45.
46.
47.
48.
49.
50.
51.
52.
53.
54.
55.
56.
57.
58.
59.
60.
61.
62.
63.
64.
65.
66.
67.
68.
69.
70.
71.
72.
73.
74.
75.
76.
77.
78.
79.
80.
81.
82.
83.
84.
85.
86.
87.
88.
89.
AWPA - American Wood Protection Association; (Formerly: American Wood-Preservers'
Association); www.awpa.com.
AWS - American Welding Society; www.aws.org.
AWWA - American Water Works Association; www.awwa.org.
BHMA - Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; www.buildershardware.com.
BIA - Brick Industry Association (The); www.gobrick.com.
BICSI - BICSI, Inc.; www.bicsi.org.
BIFMA - BIFMA International; (Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's Association);
www.bifma.com.
BISSC - Baking Industry Sanitation Standards Committee; www.bissc.org.
BWF - Badminton World Federation; (Formerly: International Badminton Federation);
www.bwfbadminton.org.
CDA - Copper Development Association; www.copper.org.
CEA - Canadian Electricity Association; www.electricity.ca.
CEA - Consumer Electronics Association; www.ce.org.
CFFA - Chemical Fabrics & Film Association, Inc.; www.chemicalfabricsandfilm.com.
CFSEI - Cold-Formed Steel Engineers Institute; www.cfsei.org.
CGA - Compressed Gas Association; www.cganet.com.
CIMA - Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association; www.cellulose.org.
CISCA - Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association; www.cisca.org.
CISPI - Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute; www.cispi.org.
CLFMI - Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute; www.chainlinkinfo.org.
CPA - Composite Panel Association; www.pbmdf.com.
CRI - Carpet and Rug Institute (The); www.carpet-rug.org.
CRRC - Cool Roof Rating Council; www.coolroofs.org.
CRSI - Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute; www.crsi.org.
CSA - Canadian Standards Association; www.csa.ca.
CSA - CSA International; (Formerly: IAS - International Approval Services); www.csainternational.org.
CSI - Construction Specifications Institute (The); www.csinet.org.
CSSB - Cedar Shake & Shingle Bureau; www.cedarbureau.org.
CTI - Cooling Technology Institute; (Formerly: Cooling Tower Institute); www.cti.org.
CWC - Composite Wood Council; (See CPA).
DASMA - Door and Access Systems Manufacturers Association; www.dasma.com.
DHI - Door and Hardware Institute; www.dhi.org.
ECA - Electronic Components Association; (See ECIA).
ECAMA - Electronic Components Assemblies & Materials Association; (See ECIA).
ECIA ? Electronic Components Industry Association; www.eciaonline.org
EIA - Electronic Industries Alliance; (See TIA).
EIMA - EIFS Industry Members Association; www.eima.com.
EJMA - Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.ejma.org.
ESD - ESD Association; (Electrostatic Discharge Association); www.esda.org.
ESTA - Entertainment Services and Technology Association; (See PLASA).
EVO - Efficiency Valuation Organization; www.evo-world.org.
FIBA - F?d?ration Internationale de Basketball; (The International Basketball Federation);
www.fiba.com.
FIVB - F?d?ration Internationale de Volleyball; (The International Volleyball Federation);
www.fivb.org.
FM Approvals - FM Approvals LLC; www.fmglobal.com.
FM Global - FM Global; (Formerly: FMG - FM Global); www.fmglobal.com.
FRSA - Florida Roofing, Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors Association, Inc.;
www.floridaroof.com.
FSA - Fluid Sealing Association; www.fluidsealing.com.
FSC - Forest Stewardship Council U.S.; www.fscus.org.
GA - Gypsum Association; www.gypsum.org.
GANA - Glass Association of North America; www.glasswebsite.com.
GS - Green Seal; www.greenseal.org.
HI - Hydraulic Institute; www.pumps.org.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
01 4200 - 2
References
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
90.
91.
92.
93.
94.
95.
96.
97.
98.
99.
100.
101.
102.
103.
104.
105.
106.
107.
108.
109.
110.
111.
112.
113.
114.
115.
116.
117.
118.
119.
120.
121.
122.
123.
124.
125.
126.
127.
128.
129.
130.
131.
132.
133.
134.
135.
136.
137.
138.
139.
140.
HI/GAMA - Hydronics Institute/Gas Appliance Manufacturers Association; (See AHRI).
HMMA - Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association; (See NAAMM).
HPVA - Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association; www.hpva.org.
HPW - H. P. White Laboratory, Inc.; www.hpwhite.com.
IAPSC - International Association of Professional Security Consultants; www.iapsc.org.
IAS - International Accreditation Service; www.iasonline.org.
IAS - International Approval Services; (See CSA).
ICBO - International Conference of Building Officials; (See ICC).
ICC - International Code Council; www.iccsafe.org.
ICEA - Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc.; www.icea.net.
ICPA - International Cast Polymer Alliance; www.icpa-hq.org.
ICRI - International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc.; www.icri.org.
IEC - International Electrotechnical Commission; www.iec.ch.
IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The); www.ieee.org.
IES - Illuminating Engineering Society; (Formerly: Illuminating Engineering Society of North
America); www.ies.org.
IESNA - Illuminating Engineering Society of North America; (See IES).
IEST - Institute of Environmental Sciences and Technology; www.iest.org.
IGMA - Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance; www.igmaonline.org.
IGSHPA - International Ground Source Heat Pump Association; www.igshpa.okstate.edu.
ILI - Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc.; www.iliai.com.
Intertek - Intertek Group; (Formerly: ETL SEMCO; Intertek Testing Service NA);
www.intertek.com.
ISA - International Society of Automation (The); (Formerly: Instrumentation, Systems, and
Automation Society); www.isa.org.
ISAS - Instrumentation, Systems, and Automation Society (The); (See ISA).
ISFA - International Surface Fabricators Association; (Formerly: International Solid Surface
Fabricators Association); www.isfanow.org.
ISO - International Organization for Standardization; www.iso.org.
ISSFA - International Solid Surface Fabricators Association; (See ISFA).
ITU - International Telecommunication Union; www.itu.int/home.
KCMA - Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association; www.kcma.org.
LMA - Laminating Materials Association; (See CPA).
LPI - Lightning Protection Institute; www.lightning.org.
MBMA - Metal Building Manufacturers Association; www.mbma.com.
MCA - Metal Construction Association; www.metalconstruction.org.
MFMA - Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.maplefloor.org.
MFMA - Metal Framing Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.metalframingmfg.org.
MHIA - Material Handling Industry of America; www.mhia.org.
MIA - Marble Institute of America; www.marble-institute.com.
MMPA - Moulding & Millwork Producers Association; (Formerly: Wood Moulding & Millwork
Producers Association); www.wmmpa.com.
MPI - Master Painters Institute; www.paintinfo.com.
MSS - Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.; www.msshq.org.
NAAMM - National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers; www.naamm.org.
NACE - NACE International; (National Association of Corrosion Engineers International);
www.nace.org.
NADCA - National Air Duct Cleaners Association; www.nadca.com.
NAIMA - North American Insulation Manufacturers Association; www.naima.org.
NBGQA - National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc.; www.nbgqa.com.
NCAA - National Collegiate Athletic Association (The); www.ncaa.org.
NCMA - National Concrete Masonry Association; www.ncma.org.
NEBB - National Environmental Balancing Bureau; www.nebb.org.
NECA - National Electrical Contractors Association; www.necanet.org.
NeLMA - Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association; www.nelma.org.
NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association; www.nema.org.
NETA - InterNational Electrical Testing Association; www.netaworld.org.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
01 4200 - 3
References
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
141.
142.
143.
144.
145.
146.
147.
148.
149.
150.
151.
152.
153.
154.
155.
156.
157.
158.
159.
160.
161.
162.
163.
164.
165.
166.
167.
168.
169.
170.
171.
172.
173.
174.
175.
176.
177.
178.
179.
180.
181.
182.
183.
184.
185.
186.
187.
188.
189.
190.
191.
192.
193.
194.
NFHS - National Federation of State High School Associations; www.nfhs.org.
NFPA - NFPA; (National Fire Protection Association); www.nfpa.org.
NFPA - NFPA International; (See NFPA).
NFRC - National Fenestration Rating Council; www.nfrc.org.
NHLA - National Hardwood Lumber Association; www.nhla.com.
NLGA - National Lumber Grades Authority; www.nlga.org.
NOFMA - National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association; (See NWFA).
NOMMA - National Ornamental & Miscellaneous Metals Association; www.nomma.org.
NRCA - National Roofing Contractors Association; www.nrca.net.
NRMCA - National Ready Mixed Concrete Association; www.nrmca.org.
NSF - NSF International; (National Sanitation Foundation International); www.nsf.org.
NSPE - National Society of Professional Engineers; www.nspe.org.
NSSGA - National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association; www.nssga.org.
NTMA - National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association, Inc. (The); www.ntma.com.
NWFA - National Wood Flooring Association; www.nwfa.org.
PCI - Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute; www.pci.org.
PDI - Plumbing & Drainage Institute; www.pdionline.org.
PLASA - PLASA; (Formerly: ESTA - Entertainment Services and Technology Association);
www.plasa.org.
RCSC - Research Council on Structural Connections; www.boltcouncil.org.
RFCI - Resilient Floor Covering Institute; www.rfci.com.
RIS - Redwood Inspection Service; www.redwoodinspection.com.
SAE - SAE International; (Society of Automotive Engineers); www.sae.org.
SCTE - Society of Cable Telecommunications Engineers; www.scte.org.
SDI - Steel Deck Institute; www.sdi.org.
SDI - Steel Door Institute; www.steeldoor.org.
SEFA - Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association; www.sefalabs.com.
SEI/ASCE - Structural Engineering Institute/American Society of Civil Engineers; (See ASCE).
SIA - Security Industry Association; www.siaonline.org.
SJI - Steel Joist Institute; www.steeljoist.org.
SMA - Screen Manufacturers Association; www.smainfo.org.
SMACNA - Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association;
www.smacna.org.
SMPTE - Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers; www.smpte.org.
SPFA - Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance; www.sprayfoam.org.
SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau; www.spib.org.
SPRI - Single Ply Roofing Industry; www.spri.org.
SRCC - Solar Rating and Certification Corporation; www.solar-rating.org.
SSINA - Specialty Steel Industry of North America; www.ssina.com.
SSPC - SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings; www.sspc.org.
STI - Steel Tank Institute; www.steeltank.com.
SWI - Steel Window Institute; www.steelwindows.com.
SWPA - Submersible Wastewater Pump Association; www.swpa.org.
TCA - Tilt-Up Concrete Association; www.tilt-up.org.
TCNA - Tile Council of North America, Inc.; (Formerly: Tile Council of America); www.tileusa.com.
TEMA - Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.tema.org.
TIA - Telecommunications Industry Association; (Formerly: TIA/EIA - Telecommunications
Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance); www.tiaonline.org.
TIA/EIA - Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance; (See TIA).
TMS - The Masonry Society; www.masonrysociety.org.
TPI - Truss Plate Institute; www.tpinst.org.
TPI - Turfgrass Producers International; www.turfgrasssod.org.
TRI - Tile Roofing Institute; (Formerly: National Tile Roofing Manufacturing Association);
www.tileroofing.org.
UBC - Uniform Building Code; (See ICC).
UL - Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; www.ul.com.
UNI - Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association; www.uni-bell.org.
USAV - USA Volleyball; www.usavolleyball.org.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
01 4200 - 4
References
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
195.
196.
197.
198.
199.
200.
201.
202.
203.
204.
C.
USGBC - U.S. Green Building Council; www.usgbc.org.
USITT - United States Institute for Theatre Technology, Inc.; www.usitt.org.
WASTEC - Waste Equipment Technology Association; www.wastec.org.
WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau; www.wclib.org.
WCMA - Window Covering Manufacturers Association; www.wcmanet.org.
WDMA - Window & Door Manufacturers Association; www.wdma.com.
WI - Woodwork Institute; (Formerly: WIC - Woodwork Institute of California); www.wicnet.org.
WMMPA - Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association; (See MMPA).
WSRCA - Western States Roofing Contractors Association; www.wsrca.com.
WWPA - Western Wood Products Association; www.wwpa.org.
Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract
Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, are subject
to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.
1.
DIN - Deutsches Institut f?r Normung e.V.; www.din.de.
2.
IAPMO - International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials; www.iapmo.org.
3.
ICC - International Code Council; www.iccsafe.org.
4.
ICC-ES - ICC Evaluation Service, LLC; www.icc-es.org.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
01 4200 - 5
References
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY FOR PRINTING
SECTION 01 5000
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Use Charges: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in
the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Water and Electric Construction Power: Available from Owner's existing system without metering and
without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for
construction operations.
C.
Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric
service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.
D.
Accessible Temporary Egress: Comply with applicable provisions in ICC A117.1.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS – NOT USED
2.2
TEMPORARY FACILITIES
A.
2.3
Provide field offices, storage and fabrication sheds, and other support facilities as necessary for
construction operations and as approved by Owner. Store combustible materials apart from building.
EQUIPMENT
A.
Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and
classes of fire exposures.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service.
1.
Arrange with Owner for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections
for temporary services.
B.
Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking-water fixtures. Comply with
regulations and health codes for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and
facilities.
1.
Toilets: Use of Owner's existing toilet facilities will be permitted, as long as facilities are cleaned
and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these
facilities to condition existing before initial use.
C.
Heating and/or cooling: Provide temporary heating and/or cooling required for curing or drying of
completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures
or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or
elements being installed.
D.
Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction
operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
01 5000 - 1
Temporary Facilities and Controls
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
3.2
SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A.
Install project identification and other signs in locations approved by Owner to inform the public and
persons seeking entrance to Project.
B.
Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from
construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
C.
Use of Owner's existing elevators will be permitted, provided elevators are cleaned and maintained in a
condition acceptable to Owner. Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other
procedures to protect elevator car and entrance doors and frame. At Substantial Completion, restore
elevators to condition existing before initial use, including replacing worn cables, guide shoes, and
similar items of limited life.
3.3
SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A.
Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction as required to comply with
environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or
pollution or other undesirable effects.
B.
Pest Control: Engage pest-control service to recommend practices to minimize attraction and harboring
of rodents, roaches, and other pests and to perform extermination and control procedures at regular
intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial Completion. Perform control
operations lawfully, using environmentally safe materials.
C.
Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for
erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting.
D.
Provide floor-to-ceiling dustproof partitions to limit dust and dirt migration and to separate areas
occupied by Owner from fumes and noise.
E.
Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities. Comply with NFPA 241.
3.4
MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROL
A.
Before installation of weather barriers, protect materials from water damage and keep porous and
organic materials from coming into prolonged contact with concrete.
1.
Protect stored and installed material from flowing or standing water.
2.
Remove standing water from decks.
3.
Keep deck openings covered or dammed.
B.
After installation of weather barriers but before full enclosure and conditioning of building, protect as
follows:
1.
Do not load or install drywall or porous materials into partially enclosed building.
2.
Discard water-damaged material.
3.
Do not install material that is wet.
4.
Discard, replace, or clean stored or installed material that begins to grow mold.
5.
Perform work in a sequence that allows any wet materials adequate time to dry before enclosing
the material in drywall or other interior finishes.
3.5
OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL
A.
Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit
availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
01 5000 - 2
Temporary Facilities and Controls
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
B.
Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by
authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion.
C.
At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during construction
period.
END OF SECTION
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
01 5000 - 3
Temporary Facilities and Controls
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY FOR PRINTING
SECTION 01 6000
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A.
The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.
B.
Comparable Product Requests: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product. Identify
product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced.
1.
Show compliance with requirements for comparable product requests.
2.
Architect will review the proposed product and notify Contractor of its acceptance or rejection.
C.
Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Show compliance with requirements.
D.
Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products, select
product compatible with products previously selected.
E.
Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration,
and loss, including theft. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of
construction spaces.
2.
Deliver products to Project site in manufacturer's original sealed container or packaging,
complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.
3.
Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to ensure
that products are undamaged and properly protected.
4.
Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure.
5.
Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight
enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation.
F.
Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties
required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties
do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES
A.
Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are undamaged, and, unless otherwise
indicated, are new at the time of installation.
1.
Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, and other devices and components
needed for a complete installation and the intended use and effect.
2.
Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection.
3.
Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish
salient characteristics of products.
B.
Where the following headings are used to list products or manufacturers, the Contractor's options for
product selection are as follows:
1.
Products:
a.
Where requirements include "one of the following," provide one of the products listed that
complies with requirements.
b.
Where requirements do not include "one of the following," provide one of the products
listed that complies with requirements or a comparable product.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
01 6000 - 1
Product Requirements
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
2.
3.
Manufacturers:
a.
Where requirements include "one of the following," provide a product that complies with
requirements by one of the listed manufacturers.
b.
Where requirements do not include "one of the following," provide a product that complies
with requirements by one of the listed manufacturers or another manufacturer.
Basis-of-Design Product: Provide the product named, or indicated on the Drawings, or a
comparable product by one of the listed manufacturers.
C.
Where Specifications require "match Architect's sample," provide a product that complies with
requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed
product matches.
D.
Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range" or
similar phrase, select a product that complies with requirements. Architect will select color, gloss,
pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium
items.
2.2
COMPARABLE PRODUCTS
A.
Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the following conditions are
satisfied:
1.
Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents that it
is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is
compatible with other portions of the Work.
2.
Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the
Specifications.
3.
List of similar installations for completed projects, if requested.
4.
Samples, if requested.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
01 6000 - 2
Product Requirements
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
SECTION 01 7000
EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Cutting and Patching:
1.
Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, notify Owner of locations
and details of cutting and await directions from Owner before proceeding. Shore, brace, and
support structural elements during cutting and patching.
2.
Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a
manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that result in increased
maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.
3.
Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of
cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner that would, in
Owner's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities.
B.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on-site
recommendations and instructions for installation of products and equipment.
1.2
manufacturer's
written
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion.
B.
Certified List of Incomplete Items: Final submittal at Final Completion.
C.
Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit 2 copies of manual.
D.
PDF Electronic File: Assemble manual into a composite electronically indexed file. Submit on digital
media.
E.
Record Drawings: Submit 2 set(s) of marked-up record prints.
F.
Record Digital Data Files: Submit data file and 1 set(s) of plots.
G.
Record Product Data: Submit 2 paper copies and 1 electronic .pdf file of each submittal.
1.3
SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES
A.
Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the list, and
reasons why the Work is not complete.
B.
Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Before requesting Substantial Completion inspection,
complete the following:
1.
Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction permitting Owner unrestricted use
of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating
certificates, and similar releases.
2.
Submit closeout submittals specified in other sections, including project record documents,
operation and maintenance manuals, property surveys, similar final record information,
warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar
documents.
3.
Submit maintenance material submittals specified in other sections, including tools, spare parts,
extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to location designated by Owner.
4.
Submit test/adjust/balance records.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
01 7000 - 1
Execution & Closeout Requirements
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
5.
Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance.
C.
Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Before requesting Substantial Completion inspection,
complete the following:
1.
Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.
2.
Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner.
3.
Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment.
4.
Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial Completion.
5.
Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities.
6.
Participate with Owner in conducting inspection and walkthrough with local emergency
responders.
7.
Remove temporary facilities and controls.
8.
Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting.
9.
Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects.
D.
Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of request,
Owner will proceed with inspection or advise Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Owner will prepare
the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will advise Contractor of items that must be
completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.
1.4
FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES
A.
Submittals Prior to Final Completion: Before requesting inspection for determining final completion,
complete the following:
1.
Submit a final Application for Payment.
2.
Submit certified copy of Owner's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed
or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Owner. Certified copy of the list shall state that
each item has been completed or otherwise resolved.
3.
Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with
insurance requirements.
4.
Submit pest-control final inspection report.
B.
Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request, Owner will either
proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Owner will prepare final
Certificate for Payment after inspection or will advise Contractor of items that must be completed or
corrected before certificate will be issued.
1.
Re-inspection: Request re-inspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as
incomplete is completed or corrected.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use
materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.
B.
Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the
surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or
that might damage finished surfaces.
1.
Use cleaning products that comply with Green Seal's GS-37, or if GS-37 is not applicable, use
products that comply with the California Code of Regulations maximum allowable VOC levels.
2.2
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION
A.
Directory: Prepare a single, comprehensive directory of emergency, operation, and maintenance data
and materials, listing items and their location to facilitate ready access to desired information.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
01 7000 - 2
Execution & Closeout Requirements
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
B.
Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize manual into separate sections for each system and
subsystem, and separate sections for each piece of equipment not part of a system.
C.
Organize data into three-ring binders with identification on front and spine of each binder, and
envelopes for folded drawings. Include the following:
1.
Manufacturer's operation and maintenance documentation.
2.
Maintenance and service schedules.
3.
Maintenance service contracts. Include name and telephone number of service agent.
4.
Emergency instructions.
5.
Spare parts list and local sources of maintenance materials.
6.
Wiring diagrams.
7.
Copies of warranties. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims
2.3
RECORD DRAWINGS
A.
Record Prints: Maintain a set of prints of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings, incorporating new
and revised drawings as modifications are issued. Mark to show actual installation where installation
varies from that shown originally. Accurately record information in an acceptable drawing technique.
1.
Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING"
in a prominent location.
B.
Record Digital Data Files: Immediately before inspection for Certificate of Substantial Completion,
review marked-up record prints with Owner. When authorized, prepare a full set of corrected digital data
files of the Contract Drawings compatible with AutoCAD Release 2000.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION
A.
Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction
indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning site work, investigate and verify the
existence and location of underground utilities, mechanical and electrical systems, and other
construction affecting the Work.
B.
Before proceeding with each component of the Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with
Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
1.
Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates.
2.
Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems.
3.
Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
D.
Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Where portions of the Work are indicated
to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before
fabrication.
E.
Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings.
F.
Surface and Substrate Preparation: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for
preparation of substrates to receive subsequent work.
3.2
CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT AND FIELD ENGINEERING
A.
Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to the
property survey and existing benchmarks.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
01 7000 - 3
Execution & Closeout Requirements
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as
indicated.
1.
Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level.
2.
Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations.
C.
Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading
in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.
D.
Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory
prepared and field installed.
E.
Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size and
number to securely anchor each component in place. Where size and type of attachments are not
indicated, verify size and type required for load conditions.
1.
Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights
directed by Owner.
F.
Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange
joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.
G.
Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous.
3.4
CUTTING AND PATCHING
A.
Provide temporary support of work to be cut.
B.
Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide
protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting
and patching operations.
C.
Where existing services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such
services/systems before cutting to prevent interruption to occupied areas.
D.
Cutting: Cut in-place construction using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining
construction.
1.
Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent
surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.
E.
Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with
installation requirements specified in other Sections.
1.
Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into adjoining
construction in a manner that will minimize evidence of patching and refinishing.
2.
Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and
repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color,
texture, and appearance.
3.
Where patching occurs in a painted surface, prepare substrate and apply primer and intermediate
paint coats appropriate for substrate over the patch, and apply final paint coat over entire
unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent
surfaces.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
01 7000 - 4
Execution & Closeout Requirements
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
3.5
CLEANING
A.
Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Dispose of materials lawfully.
1.
Remove liquid spills promptly.
2.
Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the entire work
area, as appropriate.
3.
Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.
B.
Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial
Completion:
1.
Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities. Sweep paved
areas; remove stains, spills, and foreign deposits. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor
paved to a smooth, even-textured surface.
2.
Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove spills, stains, and other foreign deposits.
3.
Remove labels that are not permanent.
4.
Clean transparent materials, including mirrors. Remove excess glazing compounds.
5.
Clean exposed finishes to a dust-free condition, free of stains, films, and foreign substances.
Sweep concrete floors broom clean.
6.
Vacuum carpeted surfaces and wax resilient flooring.
7.
Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment. Remove excess lubrication and foreign
substances. Clean plumbing fixtures. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors.
8.
Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of
diffusers, registers, and grills.
3.6
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL PREPARATION
A.
Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data
indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a
system.
B.
Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only sheets
pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component
incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item
using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and
delete references to information not applicable.
1.
Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are unavailable and where
the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems.
C.
Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of
component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams.
3.7
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
A.
Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems,
subsystems, and equipment not part of a system. Include a detailed review of the following:
1.
Include instruction for basis of system design and operational requirements, review of
documentation, emergency procedures, operations, adjustments, troubleshooting, maintenance,
and repairs.
END OF SECTION
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
01 7000 - 5
Execution & Closeout Requirements
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY FOR PRINTING
SECTION 01 7419
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Action Submittals:
1.
Waste Management Plan: Submit plan within 5 days of date established for commencement of
the Work that maximizes salvage and recycling of materials.
B.
Informational Submittals:
1.
Waste Reduction Progress Reports: Submit concurrent with each Application for Payment.
Include total quantity of waste, total quantity of waste salvaged and recycled, and percentage of
total waste salvaged and recycled.
2.
Records of Donations and Sales: Receipts for salvageable waste donated or sold to individuals
and organizations. . Indicate whether organization is tax exempt.
3.
Recycling and Processing Facility Records: Manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices.
4.
Landfill and Incinerator Disposal Records: Manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices.
5.
Statement of Refrigerant Recovery: Signed by refrigerant recovery technician responsible for
recovering refrigerant, stating that all refrigerant that was present was recovered and that
recovery was performed according to EPA regulations.
C.
Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by EPA-approved certification program.
D.
Waste Management Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Section 01 3000 "Administrative Requirements." Review methods and procedures related to waste
management.
E.
Waste Management Plan: Develop a waste management plan consisting of waste identification, waste
reduction work plan, and cost/revenue analysis. Indicate quantities by weight or volume, but use same
units of measure throughout waste management plan.
1.
Salvaged Materials for Reuse: Identify materials that will be salvaged and reused.
2.
Salvaged Materials for Sale: Identify materials that will be sold to individuals and organizations,
include list of their names, addresses, and telephone numbers.
3.
Salvaged Materials for Donation: Identify materials that will be donated to individuals and
organizations, include list of their names, addresses, and telephone numbers.
4.
Recycled Materials: Include list of local receivers and processors and type of recycled materials
each will accept. Include names, addresses, and telephone numbers.
5.
Cost/Revenue Analysis: Indicate total cost of waste disposal as if there was no waste
management plan and net additional cost or net savings resulting from implementing waste
management plan.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS – NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PLAN IMPLEMENTATION
A.
General: Implement approved waste management plan. Provide handling, containers, storage, signage,
transportation, and other items as required to implement waste management plan during the entire
duration of the Contract.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
01 7419 - 1
Constr. Waste Mgmt. and Disposal
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
B.
3.2
Training: Train workers, subcontractors, and suppliers on proper waste management procedures, as
appropriate for the Work occurring at Project site.
1.
Distribute waste management plan to entities when they first begin work on-site. Review plan
procedures and locations established for salvage, recycling, and disposal.
SALVAGING DEMOLITION WASTE
A.
Salvaged Items for Owner's Use: Clean salvaged items and store in a secure area until delivery to
Owner.
B.
Doors and Hardware: Brace open end of door frames. Except for removing door closers, leave door
hardware attached to doors.
C.
Equipment: Drain tanks, piping, and fixtures. Seal openings with caps or plugs.
D.
Plumbing Fixtures: Separate by type and size.
E.
Lighting Fixtures: Separate lamps by type and protect from breakage.
3.3
RECYCLING WASTE
A.
General: Recycle paper and beverage containers used by on-site workers.
B.
Packaging:
1.
Cardboard and Boxes: Break down packaging into flat sheets. Bundle and store in a dry location.
2.
Polystyrene Packaging: Separate and bag materials.
3.
Pallets: As much as possible, require deliveries using pallets to remove pallets from Project site.
For pallets that remain on-site, break down pallets into component wood pieces and comply with
requirements for recycling wood.
3.4
DISPOSAL OF WASTE
A.
Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove waste materials
from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
B.
Do not burn waste materials.
END OF SECTION
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
01 7419 - 2
Constr. Waste Mgmt. and Disposal
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
SECTION 02 4119
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Items indicated to be removed and salvaged remain Owner's property. Carefully detach from existing
construction, in a manner to prevent damage, and deliver to Owner. Include fasteners or brackets
needed for reattachment elsewhere.
B.
Predemolition Photographs: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements.
Submit before Work begins.
C.
Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct
selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted.
D.
It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. If hazardous materials are
encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be
removed by Owner under a separate contract.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PEFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with EPA regulations and with hauling and disposal regulations of
authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
DEMOLITION
A.
Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage during selective
demolition operations. Before proceeding with demolition, provide temporary services/systems that
bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of the
building.
B.
Locate, identify, shut off, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and
mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished.
C.
Refrigerant: Remove refrigerant from mechanical equipment to be selectively demolished according to
40 CFR 82 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
D.
Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to
adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.
E.
Perform demolition in a manner that maximizes salvage and recycling of materials.
1.
Dismantle existing construction and separate materials.
2.
Set aside reusable, recyclable, and salvageable materials; store and deliver to collection point or
point of reuse.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
02 4119 - 1
Selective Demolition
Chick-Fil-A
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
F.
Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain. Erect and maintain
dustproof partitions. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been
removed.
G.
Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and
prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent
unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished.
H.
Provide temporary weather protection to prevent water leakage and damage to structure and interior
areas.
I.
Requirements for Building Reuse:
1.
Maintain existing building structure (including structural floor and roof decking) and envelope
(exterior skin and framing, excluding window assemblies and nonstructural roofing material) not
indicated to be demolished; do not demolish such existing construction beyond indicated limits.
2.
Maintain existing interior nonstructural elements (interior walls, doors, floor coverings, and ceiling
systems) not indicated to be demolished; do not demolish such existing construction beyond
indicated limits.
J.
Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods
least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction.
K.
Remove demolition waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved
landfill. Do not burn demolished materials.
L.
Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition
operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began.
END OF SECTION
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
02 4119 - 2
Selective Demolition
Chick-Fil-A
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
SECTION 05 4000
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Submittals: Product data and material certificates.
B.
Protect cold-formed metal framing from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery,
storage, and handling.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.2
ClarkDietrich Building Systems.
Marino\WARE.
Steel Network, Inc. (The).
Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
AISI Specifications and Standards: Unless more stringent requirements are indicated, comply with
AISI S100 and AISI S200.
B.
Comply with AISI S230.
C.
Comply with AWS D1.3.
2.3
MATERIALS
A.
Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer
recycled content not less than 25 percent.
B.
Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Type H, Grade ST33H, metallic coated, G60, A60, AZ50, or GF30
coating.
C.
Steel Studs: C-shaped, with flange width of not less than 1-5/8 inches, minimum uncoated steel
thickness and of depths indicated on drawings.
D.
Steel Track: U-shaped, minimum uncoated metal thickness same as studs or joists used with track, with
flange widths of 1-1/4 inches for studs and 1-1/2 inches for joists, of web depths indicated.
2.4
ACCESSORIES
A.
Fabricate from the same material and finish used for framing members, of manufacturer's standard
thickness and configuration, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with allowable load or strength
design capacities, calculated according to ICC-ES AC193 and ACI 318, greater than or equal to the
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
05 4000 - 1
Cold-Formed Metal Framing
Chick-Fil-A
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
design load, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified testing
agency.
C.
Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from
corrosion-resistant materials, with allowable load capacities calculated according to ICC-ES AC70,
greater than or equal to the design load, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190 conducted
by a qualified testing agency.
D.
Mechanical Fasteners: ASTM C 1513, self-drilling, self-tapping, steel drill screws, with corrosionresistant coating.
E.
Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780.
F.
Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch thick, selected from manufacturer's standard
widths to match width of bottom track or rim track members.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
FRAMING
A.
Install framing and accessories level, plumb, square, and true to line, and securely fastened, according
to AISI S200 and to manufacturer's written instructions unless more stringent requirements are
indicated.
1.
Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut.
2.
Fasten framing members by welding or screw fastening.
B.
Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads. Maintain braces and
supports in place until supporting structure has been completed and permanent connections are
secured.
C.
Install insulation, specified in Section 07 2100 "Thermal Insulation," in built-up exterior framing
members.
D.
Fasten hole-reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's approved or
standard punched openings.
E.
Erection Tolerances: Install cold-formed metal framing with a maximum variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet
and with individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from plan location.
Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing
materials.
F.
Studs: Install continuous top and bottom tracks securely anchored at corners and ends. Squarely seat
studs against webs of top and bottom tracks. Space studs as indicated; set plumb, align, and fasten
both flanges of studs to top and bottom tracks.
1.
Install and fasten horizontal bridging in stud system, spaced in rows not more than 48 inches
apart.
2.
Install steel-sheet diagonal bracing straps to both stud flanges, terminate at and fasten to
reinforced top and bottom track, and anchor to structure.
3.
Install miscellaneous framing and connections to provide a complete and stable wall-framing
system.
4.
Isolate nonload-bearing, curtain-wall framing from building structure using vertical slide clips or
deflection track to prevent transfer of vertical loads while providing lateral support.
END OF SECTION
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
05 4000 - 2
Cold-Formed Metal Framing
Chick-Fil-A
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
SECTION 05 5000
METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Submittals: Shop Drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
METALS
A.
Stainless-Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bars: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304.
B.
Stainless-Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 304.
2.2
FASTENERS
A.
Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners, J-molding, T molding, outside
and inside corner moldings as required for installation of stainless steel backsplashes.
B.
Adhesives. Provide polyurethane adhesive as recommended by manufacturer for interior applications.
2.3
FABRICATION
A.
General: Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease exposed edges.
Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without impairing work.
B.
Welding: Weld corners and seams continuously. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion
and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. At exposed connections, finish welds
and surfaces smooth, with contour of welded surface matching those adjacent.
2.4
STEEL FINISHES
A.
Stainless steel sheet and trim moldings shall have a brushed no. 4 finish. Steel sheet shall have a PVC
film on one side to help protect against scratching during fabrication, shipping and installation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where needed to secure items to in-place construction.
B.
Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing miscellaneous metal fabrications. Set metal
fabrication accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true,
and free of rack.
C.
Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints or, where indicated, with uniform
reveals and spaces for sealants and joint fillers.
END OF SECTION
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
05 5000 - 1
Metal Fabrications
Chick-Fil-A
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY FOR PRINTING
SECTION 06 1053
MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Submittals: ICC-ES evaluation reports for treated wood.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A.
Lumber: Provide dressed lumber, S4S, marked with grade stamp of inspection agency.
B.
Certified Wood: Wood-based materials produced from tropical forests shall be certified as "FSC Pure" or
"FSC Mixed Credit" according to FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest
Stewardship," and to FSC STD-40-004, "FSC Standard for Chain of Custody Certification."
2.2
TREATED MATERIALS
A.
Preservative-Treated Materials: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior construction not in contact
with the ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in contact with the ground, and Use
Category UC4a for items in contact with the ground.
1.
Use treatment containing no arsenic or chromium.
2.
Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent.
3.
Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of
Review.
B.
Fire-Retardant-Treated Materials: Products with a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested
according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is
extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet beyond
the centerline of the burners at any time during the test.
1.
Use Exterior type for exterior locations and where indicated.
2.
Use Interior Type A unless otherwise indicated.
3.
For enclosed roof framing, framing in attic spaces, and where high-temperature fire-retardant
treatment is indicated, provide material with design adjustment factors of not less than 0.85 for
modulus of elasticity and 0.75 for extreme fiber in bending for Project's climatological zone.
4.
Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent.
5.
Identify with appropriate classification marking of a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
C.
Provide fire-retardant treated materials for items indicated on drawings.
2.3
LUMBER
A.
Certified Wood: Lumber shall be certified as "FSC Pure" or "FSC Mixed Credit" according to FSC STD01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship," and to FSC STD-40-004, "FSC Standard
for Chain of Custody Certification."
B.
Miscellaneous Dimension Lumber: Standard, Stud, or No. 2 grade with 15 percent maximum moisture
content of any species. Provide for nailers, blocking, and similar members.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
06 1053 - 1
Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry
Chick-Fil-A
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
2.4
PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS
A.
2.5
Equipment Backing Panels: Plywood, Exterior, AC 3/4-inch nominal thickness.
FASTENERS
A.
Fasteners: Size and type indicated. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or
in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with
ASTM A 153/A 153M.
1.
Power-Driven Fasteners: CABO NER-272.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Set miscellaneous rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut,
and fitted. Locate nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other
construction.
B.
Securely attach miscellaneous rough carpentry to substrates, complying with the following:
1.
CABO NER-272 for power-driven fasteners.
2.
Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in the IBC
END OF SECTION
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
06 1053 - 2
Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry
Chick-Fil-A
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
SECTION 06 2000
FINISH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Submittals: Plywood sample showing veneer and matching
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS, GENERAL
A.
Lumber: DOC PS 20 and grading rules of inspection agencies certified by American Lumber Standards
Committee Board of Review.
B.
Certified Wood: Wood-based materials produced from tropical forests shall be certified as "FSC Pure" or
"FSC Mixed Credit" according to FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest
Stewardship," and to FSC STD-40-004, "FSC Standard for Chain of Custody Certification."
2.2
INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM
A.
WD-1: Interior Hardwood Lumber Trim: 5” wide, natural white oak boards, custom character grade.
Finish: Oiled or waterlox finish with black epoxy-filled knot holes as provided by Skylar Morgan Furniture
Designs.
1.
Flame-Spread Index: Not more than 75 when tested according to ASTM E 84.
2.
Thickness: Not less than 1/2 inch.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Condition interior finish carpentry in installation areas for 24 hours before installing.
B.
Install finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Scribe and cut to fit
adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts.
END OF SECTION
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
06 2000 - 1
Finish Carpentry
Chick-Fil-A
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY FOR PRINTING
SECTION 064116
PLASTIC LAMINATE FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Submittals: Shop Drawings, Samples showing the full range of colors available for each type of finish
and AWI Quality Certification Program certificates.
B.
Fabricator Qualifications: Certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program Certified
Compliance Program.
C.
Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS
A.
Quality Standard: Provide materials that comply with the requirements of AWI’s quality standards for
each type of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Certified Wood: Wood-based materials shall be certified as "FSC Pure" or "FSC Mixed Credit" according
to FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship.
C.
Wood Cabinets with laminate Finish: Premium grade.
1.
Type of Construction: Face frame.
2.
Cabinet Door and Drawer Style: Flush overlay.
3.
Semi exposed Surfaces Thermoset decorative panels.
4.
Laminate cladding: Surfaces other than tops, Grade HGS.
2.2
MATERIALS
A.
Wood Moisture Content: 8 to 13 percent.
B.
Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130, made with binder containing no urea
formaldehyde.
C.
Solid Surface Material: Homogeneous solid sheets of filled plastic resin complying with ISSFA-2.
D.
Plastic Laminate: Shall conform to NFPA UL and NEMA LD3-1993 for high pressure laminate.
2.3
CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A.
Double Acting Spring Hinges:
1.
Surface mounted spring Hinges for Flush Doors: ANSI K81111.
B.
Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, B01602, 135 degrees of opening, selfclosing.
C.
Pulls: Long tab pulls, solid metal 5-1/8” inches long, 1-3/4” inches deep, Matt Chrome, A832-MC by
Atlas Hardware.
D.
Shelf Pins: BHMA A156.9, B04013; metal.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
06 4113 - 1
Wood Veneer-Faced
Architectural Cabinets
Chick-Fil-A
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
E.
Exposed Hardware Finishes: Comply with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA code number indicated.
1.
Finish: Satin Chrome: BHMA 626 or BHMA 652.
F.
Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to 15 percent
moisture content.
2.4
FABRICATION
A.
Complete fabrication to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble
components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide
ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Before installation, condition cabinets to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas.
B.
Install cabinets to comply with referenced quality standard for grade specified.
C.
Install cabinet’s level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and
plumb (including tops) to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches.
D.
Scribe and cut cabinets to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts.
E.
Anchor cabinets to anchors or blocking built into or directly attached to substrates. Fasten with
countersunk concealed fasteners and blind nailing. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for
exposed nailing, countersunk and filled flush.
F.
Cabinets: Install so doors are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in
openings and to provide unencumbered operation.
1.
Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not more than 16 inches
o.c. with toggle bolts through metal backing or metal framing behind wall finish.
G
Countertops: Anchor substrate securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other
supports into underside of countertop.
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.2
Secure tops to substrate with manufacturer recommended adhesive. Align adjacent solidsurfacing-material countertops and form seams to comply with manufacturer's written
recommendations using adhesive in color to match countertop. Carefully dress joints smooth,
remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface.
Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a
straight line.
Secure backsplashes to tops and wall with manufacturer recommended adhesive.
Calk space between backsplash and wall with sealant.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects;
where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
END OF SECTION
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
06 4113 - 2
Wood Veneer-Faced
Architectural Cabinets
Chick-Fil-A
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
SECTION 06 6400
PLASTIC PANELING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Submittals: Product data and Samples.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PLASTIC SHEET PANELING
A.
General: Gel-coat-finished, glass-fiber-reinforced plastic panels complying with ASTM D 5319, ASTM E
84 CLASS A. Panels shall be USDA accepted for incidental food contact.
1.
Nominal Thickness: Not less than 0.09 inch .
2.
Surface Finish: Molded pebble texture.
B.
Trim Accessories: Manufacturer's standard one-piece vinyl extrusions designed to retain and cover
edges of panels. Provide division bars, inside corners, outside corners, and caps as needed to conceal
edges.
C.
Adhesive: As recommended by plastic paneling manufacturer.
D.
Sealant: Mildew-resistant silicone sealant recommended by plastic paneling manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Lay out paneling before installing. Locate panel joints so that trimmed panels at corners are not less
than 12 inches wide.
1.
Locate trim accessories to allow clearance at panel edges according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
B.
Install panels in a full spread of adhesive.
C.
Install trim accessories with adhesive and nails or staples. Do not fasten through panels.
D.
Fill grooves in trim accessories with sealant before installing panels and bed inside corner trim in a bead
of sealant.
E.
Maintain uniform space between panels and wall fixtures. Fill space with sealant.
END OF SECTION
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
06 6400 - 1
Plastic Paneling
Chick-Fil-A
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY FOR PRINTING
SECTION 07 8413
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Submittals: Product Data and Installer certificates signed by Installer certifying that products have been
installed in compliance with requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that
may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
1.
3M Fire Protection Products.
2.
A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc.
3.
Hilti, Inc.
4.
Specified Technologies, Inc.
5.
Tremco, Inc.
B.
Provide penetration firestopping materials that are compatible with one another, substrates, and
penetrating items if any.
C.
Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls and Horizontal Assemblies: Provide penetration
firestopping with ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive
pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg.
1.
F-Rating at Horizontal Assemblies: At least 1 hour, but not less than that of construction
penetrated.
2.
T-Rating at Horizontal Assemblies: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of
construction penetrated except for penetrations within the cavity of a wall.
D.
Penetrations in Smoke Barriers: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined per UL 1479.
1.
L-Rating: Not exceeding 5.0 cfm/sq. ft. of penetration opening at 0.30-inch wg at both ambient
and elevated temperatures.
E.
Exposed Penetration Firestopping: Provide products with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes
of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84.
F.
Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are needed to install fill
materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those components specified by penetration
firestopping manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency.
G.
Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that penetration firestopping is
installed according to specified requirements.
H.
Coordinate sized of sleeves, openings or cut openings to accommodate penetration firestopping
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install penetration firestopping to comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions
and published drawings for products and applications indicated.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
07 8413 - 1
Penetration Firestopping
Chick-Fil-A
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
B.
Identify penetration firestopping with preprinted metal or plastic labels. Attach labels permanently to
surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches of firestopping edge so labels will be visible to anyone seeking
to remove penetrating items or firestopping. Include the following information on labels:
1.
The words "Warning - Penetration Firestopping - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building Management of
Any Damage."
2.
Designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
3.
Manufacturer's name.
4.
Installer's name.
C.
Install fill materials for firestopping by proven techniques to produce the following results:
D.
1.
Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and penetrating items
as required to achieve fire resistance ratings.
E.
2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items.
F.
3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the work, finish to produce smooth, uniform
surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.
G.
4. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that insure that
penetration firestopping is without damage or deterioration at time of substantial completion. If, despite
such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, immediately cut out and remove damaged or
deteriorated penetration firestopping and install new materials to produce systems complying with
specified requirements.
END OF SECTION
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
07 8413 - 2
Penetration Firestopping
Chick-Fil-A
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
SECTION 07 9200
JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Submittals: Product Data and color Samples.
B.
Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants when ambient and substrate
temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
JOINT SEALANTS
A.
Low-Emitting Materials: Sealants shall comply with the following limits for VOC content:
1.
Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L..
2.
Other Sealants: 420 g/L.
3.
Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L.
4.
Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.
5.
Other Sealant Primers: 750 g/L.
B.
Low-Emitting Materials:
1.
Exterior reactive sealants shall have a VOC content of not more than 50 g/L or 4 percent by
weight, whichever is greater.
2.
Other exterior caulks and sealants shall have a VOC content of not more than 30 g/L or 2 percent
by weight, whichever is greater.
3.
Interior sealants shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions
from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
C.
Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, joint fillers, and other related materials that are compatible with one
another and with joint substrates under service and application conditions.
D.
Sealant for General Use Where Another Type Is Not Specified
1.
Single-component, neutral-curing silicone sealant, ASTM C 920, Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; for
Use NT.
a.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1)
2)
3)
4)
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
Dow Corning Corporation.
GE Construction Sealants; Momentive Performance Materials Inc.
Polymeric Systems, Inc.
Substitutions: Under provision of Division 1
07 9200 - 1
Joint Sealants
Chick-Fil-A
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
E.
Sealant for Interior Use at Perimeters of Door and Window Frames:
1.
Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF.
a.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
2.2
BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems.
Pecora Corporation.
Sherwin-Williams Company (The).
Tremco Incorporated.
Substitutions: Under provision of Division 1
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Provide sealant backings of materials that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates,
sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant
manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.
B.
Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise
contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.
C.
Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for
preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint.
Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.
D.
Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to
joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field
tests.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with ASTM C 1193.
B.
Install sealant backings to support sealants during application and to produce cross-sectional shapes
and depths of installed sealants that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
C.
Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and
backs of joints.
END OF SECTION
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
07 9200 - 2
Joint Sealants
Chick-Fil-A
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
SECTION 09 2216
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Submittals: Product Data.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1.
ClarkDietrich Building Systems.
2.
Marino\WARE.
3.
Steel Network, Inc. (The).
4.
Armstrong World Industries, Inc (Ceiling Suspension System)
5.
USG Corporation (Ceiling Suspension System)
6.
Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Provide materials and construction identical to those tested in
assemblies per ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction.
B.
STC-Rated Assemblies: Provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assemblies per
ASTM E 90 and classified per ASTM E 413 by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency.
C.
Curved Ceiling Suspension System
1.
ASTM C 636 Recommended Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for
Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels.
2.
ASTM C 645 Standard Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing Members
3.
ASTM C 754 Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum Board
4.
ASTM C1002 Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Board
or Metal Plaster Bases.
5.
ASTM E 119 Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Material .
2.3
METAL FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
A.
Steel Framing Members, General: ASTM C 754.
1.
Steel Sheet Components: ASTM C 645. Thickness specified is minimum uncoated base-metal
thickness.
2.
Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40, hot-dip galvanized zinc coating.
B.
Framing Systems:
1.
Studs and Runners: In depth and thickness as indicated on drawings.
2.
Flat Strap and Backing: In depth and thickness as indicated on drawings.
3.
Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: In depth and thickness as indicated on drawings.
4.
Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2 inch deep, with single- or double-leg configuration.
5.
Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.053 inch thick, 3/4 inch deep.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
09 2216 - 1
Non-Structural Metal Framing
Chick-Fil-A
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
2.4
ACCESSORIES
A.
General: Comply with referenced installation standards.
1.
Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and
other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.
B.
Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Asphalt felt or foam gasket.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install steel framing to comply with ASTM C 754."
1.
Gypsum Board Assemblies: C with ASTM C 840.
B.
Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab
bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.
C.
Isolate steel framing from building structure, except at floor, to prevent transfer of loading imposed by
structural movement.
1.
Where studs are installed directly against exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and
wall.
D.
Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with requirements of listed assemblies.
E.
Install suspension systems level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet.
END OF SECTION
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
09 2216 - 2
Non-Structural Metal Framing
Chick-Fil-A
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
SECTION 09 2900
GYPSUM BOARD
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Submittals: Product Data.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Provide materials and construction identical to those tested in
assemblies per ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction.
B.
STC-Rated Assemblies: Provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assemblies per
ASTM E 90 and classified per ASTM E 413 by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency.
2.2
PANEL PRODUCTS
A.
Provide in maximum lengths available to minimize end-to-end butt joints.
B.
Interior Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, in thickness indicated, with manufacturer's standard
edges. Type X.
C.
Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C 1178/C 1178M, of thickness indicated.
Type X.
2.3
ACCESSORIES
A.
Trim Accessories: ASTM C 1047, formed from galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc,
plastic, or paper-faced galvanized-steel sheet. For exterior trim, use accessories formed from hot-dip
galvanized-steel sheet, plastic, or rolled zinc.
1.
Provide cornerbead at outside corners unless otherwise indicated.
2.
Provide LC-bead (J-bead) at exposed panel edges.
3.
Provide control joints where indicated.
B.
Joint-Treatment Materials: ASTM C 475/C 475M.
1.
Joint Tape: Paper unless otherwise recommended by panel manufacturer.
2.
Joint Compounds: Setting-type taping compound and drying-type, ready-mixed, compounds for
topping.
C.
Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant
complying with ASTM C 834.
1.
Sealants shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less.
2.
Sealants shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of
Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various
Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
D.
Finish: Match buildings finish.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
09 2900 - 1
Gypsum Board
Chick-Fil-A
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install gypsum board to comply with ASTM C 840.
1.
Isolate gypsum board assemblies from abutting structural and masonry work. Provide edge trim
and acoustical sealant.
2.
Single-Layer Fastening Methods: Fasten gypsum panels to supports with screws.
B.
Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with requirements of listed assemblies.
C.
Finishing Gypsum Board: ASTM C 840.
1.
At concealed areas, unless a higher level of finish is required for fire-resistance-rated assemblies,
provide Level 1 finish: Embed tape at joints.
2.
At substrates for tile, provide Level 2 finish: Embed tape and apply separate first coat of joint
compound to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges.
3.
Unless otherwise indicated, provide Level 4 finish: Embed tape and apply separate first, fill, and
finish coats of joint compound to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges.
D.
Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panels: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.
END OF SECTION
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
09 2900 - 2
Gypsum Board
Chick-Fil-A
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
SECTION 09 3013
CERAMIC TILING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Submittals: Product Data and Samples.
B.
Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from same production run for each contiguous area.
C.
Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until
time of use. Comply with requirements in ANSI A137.1 for labeling ceramic tile packages.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CERAMIC TILE
A.
Ceramic tile that complies with ANSI A137.1.
B.
Wall Tile:
1.
T-1A. Subway wall tile, Daltile, Modern Dimensions, #K175 Biscuit, 4”x8”.
2.
T-1B. Subway tile cove base, Daltile, Modern Dimensions, #K175 Biscuit, 4-1/4"x 8-1/2”.
3.
T-1D Subway bullnose outer corner Daltile, Modern Dimensions, #175 Biscuit, 4-1/4”x 4-1/4”.
4.
T-1E Subway bullnose (4” side) Daltile, Modern Dimensions, #K175 4-1/4”x 8-1/2”.
5.
T-1F Subway bullnose (8” side) Daltile Modern Dimensions, #K175 Biscuit, 4-1/4”x 8-1/2”.
6.
T-2
Stainless Steel wall tile, Metal Mosaics by Ceramic Technics, running bond pattern, colorbrushed steel, size 1”x2” brick, Grout with G-2.
7.
T-6
Ceramic glazed wall tile 3/4” penny round mosaic tile by Specialty Tile Products,
color/finish-#SPS-8000, Grout with G-2.
C.
Floor Tile:
1.
T-3
2.
T-4
3.
KT-1A
4.
KT-1B
D.
2.2
Field tile, Daltile, Veranda, P504, color-gunmetal, 20”x20”. Grout with G-1.
Base tile, Daltile, Veranda, P504, color-gunmetal, 6”x13”. Grout with G-1.
Kitchen floor tile, Daltile, Quarry Textures, OTO1 Diablo Red, 8”x8”.
Kitchen cove base tile, Daltile, Quarry Textures, Q-3585-Diablo Red, 5”x8”.
Grout:
1.
G-1
Floor tile grout (T-3 and T-4), Mapei, Ultra Color Grout, 47/Charcoal, 1/8” Joint width.
2.
G-2
Wall tile grout (T-1 series, T-2, T-5, T-6) Mapei, Keracolor U with grout maximizer latex
additive, 09/gray, 1/6” grout joint. 47/Charcoal, 3/8” joint width.
3.
G-3
Floor tile grout (KT-1 series) Mapei, Keracolor IEG, 47/Charcoal, 3/8” joint width.
INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A.
Fiber-Cement Underlayment: ASTM C 1288, 1/2 inch thick.
B.
Low-Emitting Materials: Adhesives and fluid-applied waterproofing membranes shall have a VOC
content of 65 g/L or less.
C.
Low-Emitting Materials: Adhesives and fluid-applied waterproofing membranes shall comply with Green
Seal's GS-36 and with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public
Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from
Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers."
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
09 3013 - 1
Ceramic Tiling
Chick-Fil-A
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
D.
Mortar and Grouting Materials: Comply with material standards in ANSI's "Specifications for the
Installation of Ceramic Tile" that apply to materials and methods indicated.
1.
G-1
Floor grout, Mapei, Ultra Color.
2.
G-2
Wall tile, Mapei. Keracolor U with grout maximize latex additive.
3.
G-3
Floor grout, Mapei, Keracolor IEG epoxy grout.
4.
Latex Portland cement mortar ANSI A118.4 for floor and wall tile.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with TCNA's "Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation" for TCNA installation
methods specified in tile installation schedules. Comply with parts of ANSI A108 Series "Specifications
for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in TCNA installation methods, are specified in tile
installation schedules, and apply to types of setting and grouting materials used.
B.
Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile
abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight, aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping,
fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.\
C.
Install fiber-cement underlayment, and treat joints according to ANSI A108.11.
D.
Lay tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated. Align joints where adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls,
and trim are the same size.
E.
Install fiber-cement underlayment, and treat joints according to ANSI A108.11.
F.
Interior Floor Tile Installation Method(s):
1.
Over Concrete Subfloors: TCNA F115A-14; thinset mortar, epoxy grout.
G.
Interior Wall Tile Installation Method(s):
1.
Over Metal Studs or Furring: TCNA W244F-14 or W248-14; thinset mortar on fiber-cement
backer board or glass mat water resistant gypsum backer board.
END OF SECTION
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
09 3013 - 2
Ceramic Tiling
Chick-Fil-A
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
SECTION 09 5113
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Submittals: Product Data and Samples.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Seismic Standard: Acoustical panel ceiling shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined
according to ASCE/SEI 7.
B.
Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Provide materials and construction identical to those tested in
assemblies per ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction.
2.2
ACOUSTICAL PANELS
A.
Classification: As follows, per ASTM E 1264:
1.
Type 1 Clima Plus 3270.
2.
Type 3 Clima Plus 3260.
3.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: Class A Flame Spread 25, Smoke Development 50.
B.
Color: White.
C.
Edge Detail: Square.
D.
Thickness: 5/8 inch.
E.
Modular Size: 24 by 24 inches24 by 48 inches.
2.3
CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEM
A.
Ceiling Suspension System: Wide-face, direct-hung system; ASTM C 635, intermediate-duty structural
classification.
1.
Face Design: Flat, flush.
2.
Face Finish: Painted white.
B.
Attachment Devices: Sized for 5 times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, Direct Hung,
unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Zinc-coated carbon-steel wire; ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc
coating, soft temper.
1.
Size: Provide yield strength at least 3 times the hanger design load (ASTM C 635, Table 1, Direct
Hung), but not less than 0.135-inch diameter wire.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
09 5113 - 1
Acoustical Panel Ceilings
Chick-Fil-A
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install acoustical ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636/C 636M and seismic design requirements
indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook."
1.
Fire-Rated Assembly: Install fire-rated ceiling systems according to tested fire-rated design.
B.
Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension system runners and
edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit.
C.
Arrange directionally patterned acoustical units as indicated on Drawings.
END OF SECTION
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
09 5113 - 2
Acoustical Panel Ceilings
Chick-Fil-A
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
SECTION 09 9123
INTERIOR PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Submittals:
Product Data: Include printout of MPI's "MPI Approved Products List" with product highlighted.
Samples.
B.
Mockups: Full-coat finish Sample of each type of coating, color, and substrate, applied where directed.
C.
Extra Materials: Deliver to Owner 1 gal. of each color and type of finish-coat paint used on Project, in
containers, properly labeled and sealed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PAINT
A.
MPI Standards: Provide materials that comply with MPI standards indicated and listed in its "MPI
Approved Products List."
Primer Sealer, Latex: MPI #50.
Primer, Alkali Resistant, Water Based: MPI #3.
Primer Sealer, Institutional Low Odor/VOC: MPI #149.
Primer, Latex, for Interior Wood: MPI #39.
Primer Sealer, Alkyd, Interior: MPI #45.
Primer, Bonding, Water Based: MPI #17.
Primer, Bonding, Solvent Based: MPI #69.
Primer, Alkyd, Anticorrosive: MPI #79.
Primer, Galvanized, Water Based: MPI #134.
Latex, Interior, Flat, (Gloss Level 1): MPI #53.
Latex, Interior, (Gloss Level 2): MPI #44.
Latex, Interior, (Gloss Level 4): MPI #43.
Latex, Interior, Semigloss, (Gloss Level 5): MPI #54.
Latex, Interior, Gloss, (Gloss Level 6, except Minimum Gloss of 65 Units at 60 Degrees): MPI #114.
Latex, Institutional Low Odor/VOC, Flat (Gloss Level 1): MPI #143.
Latex, Institutional Low Odor/VOC, (Gloss Level 2): MPI #144.
Latex, Institutional Low Odor/VOC, Semigloss (Gloss Level 5): MPI #147.
Latex, High-Performance Architectural, (Gloss Level 2): MPI #138.
Latex, High-Performance Architectural, Semigloss (Gloss Level 5): MPI #141.
Alkyd, Interior, Flat (Gloss Level 1): MPI #49.
Alkyd, Interior, Semigloss (Gloss Level 5): MPI #47.
Alkyd, Interior, Gloss (Gloss Level 6): MPI #48.
Alkyd, Quick Dry, Semigloss (Gloss Level 5): MPI #81.
Alkyd, Quick Dry, Gloss (Gloss Level 7): MPI #96.
Floor Paint, Latex, Low Gloss (Maximum Gloss Level 3): MPI #60.
Floor Enamel, Alkyd, Gloss (Gloss Level 6): MPI #27.
B.
Material Compatibility: Provide materials that are compatible with one another and with substrates.
For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat
for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
09 9123 - 1
Interior Painting
Chick-Fil-A
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
C.
Paints and coatings shall comply with the following limits for VOC content:
Flat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L.
Nonflat Paints, Coatings: 150 g/L.
Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 200g/L.
Anticorrosive and Antirust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: 250 g/L.
D.
Colors: As scheduled.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Comply with recommendations in MPI's "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to
substrates indicated.
B.
Remove hardware, lighting fixtures, and similar items that are not to be painted. Mask items that cannot
be removed. Reinstall items in each area after painting is complete.
C.
Clean and prepare surfaces in an area before beginning painting in that area. Schedule painting so
cleaning operations will not damage newly painted surfaces.
3.2
APPLICATION
A.
Comply with recommendations in MPI's "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to
substrates indicated.
B.
Paint exposed surfaces, new and existing, unless otherwise indicated.
Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces.
Paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.
Paint the back side of access panels.
Color-code mechanical piping in accessible ceiling spaces.
Do not paint prefinished items, items with an integral finish, operating parts, and labels unless otherwise
indicated.
C.
Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Use brushes only where the use of other applicators is not practical.
Use rollers for finish coat on interior walls and ceilings.
D.
Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller
tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.
If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a
uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.
3.3
INTERIOR PAINT APPLICATION SCHEDULE
A.
PT-1A:
Primary Interior ceiling Paint: Two coats Sherwin Williams, PRO MAR 200 Zero VOC Paint, #SW-701
Natural Choice, Finish: Flat.
B.
PT1B:
Primary Interior Wall Paint: Two coats Sherwin Williams, PRO MAR 200 Zero VOC Paint, #7011 Natural
Choice, Finish: Flat.
C.
PT-3A:
Accent Ceiling Paint: Two coats Sherwin Williams, PRO MAR 200 Zero VOC Paint, SW7600 Bolero,
Finish: Egg Shell.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
09 9123 - 2
Interior Painting
Chick-Fil-A
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
D.
PT-3B:
Accent Interior Wall Paint: Two coats Sherwin Williams, PRO MAR 200 Zero VOC Paint, SW-7600
Bolero, Finish: Egg Shell.
END OF SECTION
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
09 9123 - 3
Interior Painting
Chick-Fil-A
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY FOR PRINTING
SECTION 20 0010
BASIC MATERIALS, METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
The Division 1 General Conditions applying to the General Contractor also apply to this Subcontractor
as modified by Division 20-23 requirements.
CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS
A.
1.3
The Contractor shall have experience in this field of construction. The Contractor shall have performed
at least three such projects, shall have a minimum of five years of experience installing these systems
or receive permission from the Owner's Representative 10 days prior to the bid opening date. The
Owner’s Representative shall furnish proof upon request.
CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITY
A.
1.4
The Contractor shall be the entity responsible for the proper execution of this project in accordance with
the drawings and following specifications. If a materials supplier and/or manufacturer's representative
assists in preparation of bids and/or submittals for the project, it is the Contractor's responsibility to
determine that the materials being submitted meet the quality and performance criteria of the materials
specified in these specifications.
DESCRIPTION OF THE WORK
A.
This contractor shall furnish all products called for or required, whether specifically mentioned or not, for
proper and successful operation of the systems. The products shall be new and a standard catalog
item of the manufacturer.
B.
This Contractor shall furnish, deliver, erect, and connect complete all the materials and appliances
described herein and also all the materials, appliances, tools and transportation, etc., required to make
the work complete in accordance with the true intent of the plans and specifications, and as required to
leave the system in first-class operating condition, excluding those items stated as work and materials
by others.
C.
If one contractor is responsible for both the HVAC and plumbing, it shall be his responsibility to insure
that all equipment is connected to their proper utility. If two separate contractors are used, the plumbing
contractor shall review the heating, ventilating, air conditioning plans to insure that all utilities are
provided for the equipment furnished by the heating, ventilating, and air conditioning contractor. This
shall include all steam lines, condensate drain lines, floor drains, plumbing vents from all plumbing and
HVAC equipment, and other items as necessary to make a complete first-class operating system.
D.
It is the intent of these specifications that the building be totally watertight. This includes all mechanical
penetrations to the exterior of the building, whether roof, wall, or underground. The Contractor shall use
standard products of the industry to provide this. Field fabricated products will not be acceptable.
1.5
CODES AND STANDARDS
A.
The basis for the design of this system was the 2009 International Building Code. In specific, the
International Plumbing Code, International Mechanical Code, and International Fire Code were used.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
20 0010 - 1
Basic Materials,
Methods, and Requirements
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
Project #56-14
RFP #R15135-15
B.
The contractor shall comply fully with all existing and current ordinances, laws and regulations of the
city, county, state and national governments, and local utilities, which are applicable to the materials,
labor and work under this contract. He shall at all times observe and comply with such regulations and
shall protect and indemnify the owner against any claims or liability arising from or based on any
violation of it.
C.
In case the specifications or plans conflict with such ordinances, laws or regulations, the conflicting
portion of work affected shall be installed in strict accordance with the regulations above mentioned; the
remainder of the plans and specifications, however, shall remain in full force. In no case will work or
materials inferior to these specifications be accepted even if permitted by code. In places where codes
conflict, the local code shall have preference.
1.6
DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A.
General:
1.
The following specifications and attached drawings have been made to form the basis for the
installation of the work. The drawings and specifications shall be considered as mutually
explanatory, and any work required by one, but not by the other, will be performed as though
required by both.
2.
The work shall be accomplished as called for in the specifications and as shown on the drawings.
B.
Basic documents describing the work:
1.
Drawings:
a.
Refer to the ("M") series drawings for the graphic representations, schedules and notations
showing mechanical work.
b.
Refer to the (“P") series drawings for the graphic representations, schedules and notations
showing plumbing work.
c.
Refer to the (“FP") series drawings for the graphic representations, schedules and
notations showing fire protection work.
2.
Specifications:
a.
Refer to Division 21 for the primary technical specifications of fire protection work.
b.
Refer to Division 22 for the primary technical specifications of plumbing work.
c.
Refer to Division 23 for the primary technical specifications of mechanical work.
3.
Base Bid Proposal: For the complete description refer to Division 1 and to the Bid Form.
4.
Alternate Bid Proposals: Refer to Division 1 and to the Bid Form for the complete description.
C.
Other documents affecting the work:
1.
The Architectural, Structural, Electrical, Plumbing, Fire Sprinkler System, Mechanical, Civil, and
other special system drawings and specifications for this project may also contain important
information that must be taken into consideration while preparing bids for and installing the work.
It is the responsibility of this Contractor to examine all available drawings and to determine their
effect on the mechanical work.
2.
Do not scale the drawings for locations of equipment and devices. Refer to the Architectural,
Structural, and shop drawings for actual dimensions.
D.
Accuracy of drawings and specifications:
1.
The specifications and drawings have been made to form the basis for the installation of this
contractor's work. The plans and specifications shall be considered as mutually explanatory, and
any work required by one, but not by the other shall be performed as though required by both.
2.
These drawings and specifications are presumed to be accurate, but extreme accuracy is not
guaranteed. Any errors or ambiguities in the drawings and/or specifications that are
discovered by the Contractor during the bidding phase shall be reported to the
Architect/Engineer. The Architect/Engineer will review and issue an addendum.
3.
Any errors or ambiguities in the drawings and specifications that are discovered by the Contractor
after the bidding phase shall be reported to the Architect/Engineer before the work is started.
Omission of particular reference to any item necessary for complete installation and proper
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
20 0010 - 2
Basic Materials,
Methods, and Requirements
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
Project #56-14
RFP #R15135-15
operation thereof shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility of furnishing the same at no
extra cost.
1.7
INTERPRETATION OF DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A.
If the Contractor has any questions concerning the true intent and/or meaning of these drawings and
specifications, he shall request a clarification in writing from the Architect/Engineer before submitting his
bid.
B.
In case of a dispute concerning the true intent and/or meaning of these drawings and specifications, the
Architect/Engineer shall interpret the same, and his interpretation shall be accepted by the Contractor
as final.
1.8
EXAMINATION OF THE SITE AND EXISTING FACILITIES
A.
All Contractors submitting proposals for this work shall, before submittal of proposals, examine the site
and thoroughly familiarize themselves with the existing conditions. All bid proposals shall take into
consideration all such conditions that may affect the work under this contract and the bidders shall
satisfy themselves as to the existing building conditions, the actual configurations, existing equipment,
etc. No information given on the drawings or in the specifications shall relieve the Contractor of this
responsibility.
B.
Failure of the Contractor to examine the site and/or existing facilities will not be cause for extras by
reason of unforeseen conditions.
1.9
PERMITS, FEES, LICENSES, AND TAXES
A.
1.10
A.
All necessary licenses or permits for the carrying out of this work shall be secured and paid for by this
Contractor. The Contractor shall be responsible for any damages sustained due to his failure to secure
such licenses or permits. This Contractor shall pay all taxes applicable to his work.
DEFINITIONS
The following definitions supplement definitions of the Contract, General Conditions, Supplementary
Conditions and other General Contract Documents, and apply generally to the work.
1.
General Requirements: Provisions of Division 1 sections of these specifications.
2.
Indicated: Shown on drawings by notes, graphics or schedules, or written into other portions of
contract documents. Terms such as "shown", "noted", "scheduled" and "specified" have same
meaning as "indicated", and are used to assist the reader in locating particular information.
3.
Directed, Requested, Approved, Accepted, etc.: These terms imply "by the Architect/Engineer",
unless otherwise indicated.
4.
Approved by Architect/Engineer: In no case releases Contractor from responsibility to fulfill
requirements of contract documents.
5.
Project Site: Space available to Contractor at location of project, either exclusively or to be
shared with separate Contractors, for performance of the work.
6.
Furnish: Supply and deliver to project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation,
and similar subsequent requirements.
7.
Install: Operations at project site, including unloading, unpacking, assembly, erection, placing,
anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar
requirements.
8.
Provide: Furnish and install, complete and ready for intended use.
9.
Installer: Entity (firm or person) engaged to install work, by Contractor, Subcontractor or Sub
subcontractor. Installers are required to be skilled experts in work they are engaged to install.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
20 0010 - 3
Basic Materials,
Methods, and Requirements
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
Project #56-14
RFP #R15135-15
1.11
COOPERATION
A.
This Contractor shall employ a full time experienced and competent superintendent to supervise the
installation of the systems, represent him on the project and to coordinate the work with the other
trades.
B.
This Contractor shall cooperate fully with all other Contractors on this project. If any part of this
Contractor's work depends for proper execution or results upon the work of any other Contractor, this
Contractor shall inspect and promptly report to the Architect/Engineer any defects in such work that
render it unsuitable for such execution and results. His failure to so inspect and report shall constitute
an acceptance of the other Contractor's work as fit and proper for the reception of this work.
C.
This Contractor shall coordinate work with all other Contractors or Subcontractors whose work will be in
contact with the work under this heading, so that proper cooperation between the different trades shall
result therefrom.
D.
To insure against delaying any other Contractor, this Contractor shall install immediately any of his work
necessary at the time for continuous construction operations, and shall be held responsible for any
delays caused due to his negligence. This Contractor shall at all times keep in close contact with the
project, so that all work will proceed without delay.
1.12
COORDINATION OF INSTALLATION
A.
Sequence, coordinate and integrate the various elements of mechanical work so that the mechanical
system will perform as indicated and be in harmony with the other work of the building. The
Architect/Engineer will not supervise the coordination, which is the exclusive responsibility of the
Contractor.
B.
Flues and steam or hot water lines shall not be installed closer than 6 inches from raceways and cables.
Right-of-way in confined-service spaces shall be given to piping which must slope for drainage and to
larger HVAC ductwork and similar services. The various phases of work shall have precedence over
each other in the following sequence:
1.
Soil and Waste Piping
2.
Condensate Piping
3.
Primary Electrical Conduit
4.
Domestic Water Piping
5.
Ductwork
6.
Chilled and Heating Hot Water Piping
7.
Gas Piping
8.
Fire Sprinkler Piping
9.
Electrical Conduit and Wireways
1.13
PRODUCT HANDLING AND STORAGE
A.
Scheduling: This contractor shall be responsible for the proper scheduling, for delivery of his materials,
equipment, and etc., to minimize the possibilities of damage or theft.
B.
Storage: This contractor shall be responsible for the proper care of all his materials, equipment, etc.,
delivered at the site. Building materials, contractor's equipment, etc., may be stored on the premises,
but the placing of it shall not interfere with the progress of work by other trades and is subject to
approval of the architect/general contractor. When any room in the building is used as a shop,
storeroom, etc., the one making use of such room will be held responsible for any repairs, patching, or
cleaning arising from such use.
C.
Damage: This contractor shall protect and be responsible for any damage to his work or material, from
the date of agreement until the final acceptance is made, and shall make good without cost to the
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
20 0010 - 4
Basic Materials,
Methods, and Requirements
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
Project #56-14
RFP #R15135-15
owner, any damage or loss that may occur during this period. Contractor shall handle all material as
directed, so that it may be inspected by the architect/engineer. Should any material be found defective
or in any way contrary to the contract, this material, no matter in what stage of completion, may be
rejected by the architect, and must be removed from the premises at once.
1.14
A.
1.15
PENETRATIONS OF FIRE WALLS AND SMOKE PARTITIONS
All openings for ductwork, piping, etc. which penetrate fire walls and/or smoke partitions shall be sealed
with an approved sealing material, which will maintain the fire and/or smoke rating of the separation.
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
A.
This Contractor shall provide the necessary personnel and equipment to demonstrate that the
mechanical, fire protection, and plumbing systems, equipment, and/or other system components are
functioning to the performance as specified. The necessary personnel shall include electricians,
technicians, engineers, or vendors’ representatives as necessary for the system involved.
B.
All mechanical, fire protection, and plumbing systems and installations shall be tested to show that the
equipment is installed and operates as planned and specified.
C.
At the completion of the project, and before final payment is made, this Contractor shall submit to the
Architect/Engineer for transmittal to the Owner, two (2) copies of a written record of performance tests
on the mechanical, fire protection, and plumbing systems. Such tests shall show compliance with
governing codes. These test reports shall be signed and certified by this Contractor.
D.
This Contractor shall take all actions necessary to eliminate the source of any objectionable noise or
vibration. Such changes shall be made without cost or inconvenience to the Owner. All air devices,
transformers, relays, starters, lighting units, and other equipment shall not exceed the noise criterion
curve of 35 db SPL when measured on the flat response C scale in any occupied spaces.
1.16
A.
1.17
A.
1.18
DAMAGE
Damage to the Owner's property or other Contractor's work caused by this Contractor, or damage due
to failure of his equipment or materials, shall be repaired or replaced at this Contractor's expense.
CLEANING AND TOUCH-UP
Prior to final inspection the Contractor shall clean the construction dust from diffusers and equipment,
clean any paint or other foreign material from all diffusers, thermostats, etc., and touch-up paint on all
mechanical equipment.
WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE
A.
The contractor shall deliver to the owner, via architect, all warranties on all equipment, which are for a
longer period than one year.
B.
Guarantee: The contractor shall guarantee the apparatus as installed by him to develop the
performance as specified and shall guarantee to keep the entire system as installed by him or his
subcontractors in repair and perfect working order for one year after date of substantial completion of
the project as determined by the architect. (NOTE: There will be a period of time (length unknown) that
the equipment will have to operate to complete the interior finishes on the project, i.e., humidity control
for painting, tile work, carpet, etc. This time shall not be included in the warranty period.) The
contractor shall furnish free of cost to the owner all materials, labor, and other expenses necessary to
comply with the above guarantee. Compressors for all cooling systems shall have a five (5) year
warranty.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
20 0010 - 5
Basic Materials,
Methods, and Requirements
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
Project #56-14
RFP #R15135-15
1.19
A.
1.20
SERVICE INTERRUPTIONS
Any revisions to the system which require interruption to the services in use in the existing building(s)
shall be of the shortest duration as practical. Times of interruption shall be coordinated with the
Owner's Representative and accomplished after hours, on weekends, and/or at times as directed.
SUBSTITUTIONS OF SPECIFIED MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A.
Where an item of equipment is specified on the plans or in the specifications with no specific
manufacturer named, it shall be assumed that products of any manufacturer meeting the requirements
of the specification will be acceptable.
B.
Refer to Section 01 2500 for additional information regarding substitutions.
1.21
SUBMITTALS
A.
General:
1.
Submittals shall be in accordance with Division 1 requirements except as modified herein. Refer
to Section 013000 for additional information regarding submittals
2.
Each item of mechanical, fire protection, and plumbing equipment shall be submitted for approval.
3.
The Mechanical, Fire Protection, and Plumbing Contractors are responsible for the content,
preparation and timely delivery of the associated submittals. If a second party prepares the
submittal for the Contractor, it is the Contractors’ responsibility to assure that the submittal is
complete and in the proper format and content as set forth in this specification.
4.
Contractor shall submit dimensioned shop drawings where required. Shop drawings shall show
relationship of the equipment with the building structure and equipment of other trades.
a.
Shop drawings will be submitted for any items or equipment which is fabricated specifically
for this project. All such shop drawings shall be included with the submittal data.
Fabrication or shipment of such equipment shall not be started until all shop drawings have
been approved and released by the Owners representative.
B.
Certification Statement:
1.
The submittal shall be accompanied by a statement by the associated sub-contractor (fire
protection, plumbing or mechanical) or his authorized representative stating that:
a.
He has thoroughly reviewed the project drawings and specifications and has made himself
aware of all of the requirements contained therein.
b.
He has thoroughly reviewed the submittal, certifies that it is complete, that he is familiar
with the equipment being submitted, and certifies that all substituted products are equal in
every way to those specified.
c.
He is submitting to the Architect/Engineer a list of any deviations in quality or performance
of materials being submitted from the quality or performance of materials specified on
drawings or in the specifications.
2.
Any submittal without this statement is considered to be incomplete and will not be reviewed until
the certification is received.
C.
Submittal Schedule:
1.
Refer to specification section 01 3000 for information regarding submittal schedule.
D.
Submittal Format:
1.
The Contractor shall provide the submittal in electronic/PDF or hard-copy format.
a.
Electronic/PDF Format: Submit one (1) PDF version electronic file to the Owner’s
representative for approval.
b.
Hard-Copy Format: Submit four (4) copies, bound in four (4) hard plastic, three ring binders
with clear plastic envelope on cover and spline, to the Owner’s representative for approval.
2.
Submittal shall be provided with an index and divided by specification section. Materials and
equipment shall be submitted under their associated specification section. Submittal data shall be
arranged in the same order as the specifications.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
20 0010 - 6
Basic Materials,
Methods, and Requirements
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
Project #56-14
RFP #R15135-15
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Provide a separate sheet similar to the index, recording deviations from Contract Document
requirements, including minor variations and limitations. Highlight these deviations so it is
apparent to the reviewer.
Include Contractor's certification that information and equipment complies with Contract
Document requirements.
Submittal shall be provided with section divider sheets, in the case of a PDF, or tab dividers, in
the case of a hard-copy submittal, corresponding to the index items.
Partial submittals will not be accepted. If mechanical and plumbing work is to be provided by the
same contractor, the plumbing and HVAC submittals shall be shall be enclosed in separate PDFs
or binders.
The submittal shall consist of a list of the materials and equipment to be furnished together with
descriptive literature, capacities, manufacturer's name, approximate delivery date, and any other
pertinent facts concerning the various items. The submittal shall consist of all the items in the
specifications, and shall include the following for each item or group of similar items:
a.
Item name and designation number shown on plans; manufacturer's name, model and size
number; capacity and performance data corresponding to that set forth in the specifications
and shown in the schedule on the plans.
b.
Printed descriptive literature and cuts showing general arrangement and design of the
equipment submitted. Complete catalogs are not acceptable. Include only the sheets
pertaining the exact equipment submitted, with specific items/models to be provided for the
project clearly indicated.
NOTE: PARTIAL OR INCOMPLETE SUBMITTALS AND SUBMITTALS NOT CONFORMING TO THE
REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SPECIFICATION WILL NOT BE ACCEPTED, AND WILL BE RETURNED TO THE
CONTRACTOR FOR COMPLETION AND/OR CORRECTION.
E.
1.22
Submittal Review:
1.
The Architect/Engineer will review the submittal for conformance with the requirements of the
specification and issue a report thereon. Items rejected, incomplete, or request for additional
information will be contained in the report and may require resubmittal.
2.
The Architect/Engineer will review and prepare a report with recommendations on the submittal
and one (1) resubmittal. If the resubmittal is incomplete or in any other way unsatisfactory or
unacceptable, the review of any further required resubmittals will be at the Contractors expense,
otherwise the material must be furnished as specified.
APPROVAL OF MATERIALS
A.
The Architect/Engineer will not, under any circumstances, give verbal approval for any item. The
Contractor must obtain the Architect/Engineer's written approval of each item submitted.
B.
The Architect/Engineer will not be required to prove that an item proposed for substitution is or is not of
equal quality to the specified item. It is mandatory that the Contractor submit to the Architect/Engineer,
in writing, all evidence required to support his contention that the item proposed for substitution is equal
to the item indicated by the plans and/or specifications. Any deviations from the specified products shall
be called to the attention of the Architect/Engineer.
C.
The Architect/Engineer's approval of such submittals shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility
for proper performance of all equipment.
D.
The Architect/Engineer's approval of submitted equipment shall not relieve the Contractor of the
responsibility for providing materials and equipment that have the features, function, and performance of
the specified items, unless he has in writing, directed the attention of the Architect/Engineer to such
deviations at the time the materials are submitted for approval.
E.
The Architect/Engineer's decision on the approval or rejection of any item shall be accepted by the
Contractor as final.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
20 0010 - 7
Basic Materials,
Methods, and Requirements
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
Project #56-14
RFP #R15135-15
F.
1.23
Approved submittals and shop drawings will become a part of the construction documents for this
project.
MATERIALS INSTALLED ON PROJECT
A.
The Contractor shall verify that materials installed on the project have been approved by the
Architect/Engineer.
B.
All materials furnished shall be new and a standard catalog product of the manufacturer. Experimental
or unproven designs will not be considered.
1.24
A.
1.25
A.
1.26
AS CONSTRUCTED DRAWINGS AND OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE (O&M) MANUAL
At the completion of the project, and before final payment is made, this Contractor shall submit as-built
Record Drawings to the Architect/Engineer. Refer to Section 01 7000 for information regarding Record
Drawings.
1.
As-Constructed Drawings: The Contractor shall maintain a set of drawings during construction on
which any and all changes made in the installation of the systems are recorded. These recorded
changes shall include any changes in routing of ductwork or piping, relocated equipment, etc. and
any other changes made during the progress of the work. Locate all underground piping with
dimensions.
SPARE MATERIALS AND KEYS
At the completion of the project, and before final payment is made, this Contractor shall submit the
following to the Architect/Engineer for transmittal to the Owner:
1.
Spare Materials: Deliver spare equipment specified in various sections of this specification and
store as directed.
WORKMANSHIP
A.
The work to be performed as a part of this contract shall be performed by experienced craftsmen in a
neat, careful, and workman-like manner, and in full compliance with all requirements of the latest
revision of the applicable codes and SMACNA standards. The entire installation shall conform to the
best standard practices of the mechanical industry.
B.
Any work found to be defective, not approved in writing, or in any way contrary to the provisions of this
specification, no matter in what state of completion, may be rejected by the Architect/Engineer and must
be brought into compliance immediately upon notification.
1.27
PROJECT CLOSEOUT OR SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION SITE VISIT
A.
The Architect/Engineer will conduct a review of the installation when the Contractor gives notification
that all the materials have been furnished and all work has been performed, and all the construction
provided for by the contract has been completed in accordance with the contract terms.
B.
Before the project is complete, all exposed equipment shall be painted, if exposed, at the direction of
the Architect. This shall include any louvers, air intakes, ducts, pipes, etc. which appear objectionable
to the Architect.
C.
In order to expedite the review of the system installation, the Contractor shall have the following
available at the job site on the agreed upon day(s) and time of the Architect/Engineer site visit.
1.
The associated Superintendent(s) (fire protection, mechanical, plumbing, etc.) to represent the
Contractor and to be available to answer any questions that may arise regarding the installation
of the system.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
20 0010 - 8
Basic Materials,
Methods, and Requirements
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
Project #56-14
RFP #R15135-15
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
D.
Three (3) copies of a list of any items that are not complete with supporting documentation for the
reasons the items are incomplete.
As constructed drawings per Section 20 0010.
Spare parts and equipment, per 20 0010.
Warranties, guarantees, and certification letters.
System performance test reports and certifications.
If it is necessary for the Architect/Engineer to make a return trip to the jobsite for another review due to
the Contractor's failure to adequately complete his portion of the work, the cost of the
Architect/Engineer's time and expenses of the return to the jobsite for the review will be at the
Contractor's expense and will be withheld from the Contractor's final payment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not applicable)
END OF SECTION
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
20 0010 - 9
Basic Materials,
Methods, and Requirements
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
Project #56-14
RFP #R15135-15
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY FOR PRINTING
SECTION 20 0020
SPECIAL CONDITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
INSTRUCTIONS FROM REPRESENTATIVE
A.
Where references are made on the drawings or specifications to selections, instructions or directions to
be given by the Representative dealing with locations, colors, or other characteristics of material or
equipment, all such instructions, directions or selections shall be secured prior to proceeding with any
work which might be influenced thereby.
B.
Where selections are mentioned in connection with colors or finishes, it shall be understood that a
reasonable number of choices will be made available, and that the absence of a reasonable number of
choices, from which a selection satisfactory to the Representative may be made, will constitute grounds
for rejection of the item or items in question.
C.
Failure to comply with any portion of the material under this heading shall render liability for all costs in
connection with changes required as a result thereof.
1.2
INSTRUCTIONS FROM MANUFACTURERS
A.
All manufactured articles, material, and equipment shall be applied and installed according to the best
practice as recommended by the manufacturer.
B.
Instructions from manufacturers shall be as published by the various manufacturers. Where published
instructions are not available from the manufacturer, new instructions shall be obtained in writing from
the manufacturer.
C.
Prior to final acceptance of the project, demonstrate to Representative's satisfaction compliance with
this paragraph of the specifications; which shall include inspections by and affidavits from authorized
manufacturer's representatives if required by the Representative.
1.3
VERIFICATION OF UTILITIES
A.
Verify location and depth of all utilities and call to attention of the Representative any discrepancies,
which involve additional work before signing of the contract.
B.
After the contract is signed, any additional work required for the complete and working project shall be
provided at no added cost to the Representative, unless specifically noted in the contract documents to
the contrary.
C.
Locations, depths, sizes, capacities, etc., of all utility lines shall be verified prior to doing any other work
on piping systems to be connected to such utility lines. Any work rendered unusable by failure to
comply with this provision shall be replaced at no cost to the Owner.
D.
Utilities mentioned in this division of the specifications shall be understood to include water, sewers, gas
and other piping systems necessary to the continued operation of any and all new or existing systems
and equipment, whether on a temporary or permanent basis as noted elsewhere in the contract
documents.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
20 0020 - 1
Special Conditions
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
Project #56-14
RFP #R15135-15
1.4
INTERRUPTION OF UTILITIES
A.
Utilities, which are inadvertently interrupted through the work of this Contract, shall be immediately
repaired by skilled workmen in the trade having jurisdiction over the utility service interrupted at no
additional cost to the Owner.
B.
Where it is necessary to re-route, move, or otherwise relocate existing utilities to accomplish any work of
this Contract, they shall be so altered in locations approved by the Architect. The cost of such
alterations shall be included in the Contractor's bid.
C.
The term "utility" for the purposes of the above paragraphs, shall include any service piped or wired
throughout the building or connected thereto and/or traversing the Owner's property. The term shall
include but not be limited to water, steam, natural gas, medical gas, oxygen, sewage, storm drainage,
electricity, telephone, electronic data, cable television, etc.
1.5
COMPATIBILITY OF EQUIPMENT
A.
1.6
Assume responsibility for satisfactory operation of all component parts of the mechanical, fire protection,
and plumbing systems to assure compatibility of all equipment and performance of the integrated
systems in accordance with requirements of the contract documents, and without excessive or unusual
operation, service and/or maintenance requirements. Should any part of the contract documents be
considered as rendering acceptance of such responsibility impossible, prohibitive, or restrictive, the
Representative shall be so notified before submitting a bid, and the bid shall be accompanied by a
written statement of any objection or exception to the contract documents. For compatibility of new
equipment to meet the existing equipment conditions see Paragraph below entitled "Renovation,
Remodeling, and Additions to Existing Buildings".
WORKING CONDITIONS
A.
Some of the work in this project for connecting to the site utilities may have to be accomplished during
off-peak hours such as nights and weekends. Any such work will be done at no additional cost to the
Owner. Work during this time shall be considered as regular pay.
B.
Valves shall be required on all piping systems to separate isolated areas, an example of such is toilet
areas. Valves shall be installed on each group of toilets to isolate from the main. Another example is to
provide valves to isolate each AHU/FCU from the main lines.
1.7
LAYING OUT OF THE WORK
A.
1.8
Carefully lay out work on the premises and make proper provision for other work. The exact location of
each item shall be determined by reference to the drawings, by measurements at the building, and in
cooperation with other contractors. Accurately locate all openings for ducts, pipes, etc., and access
doors required.
COORDINATION
A.
Any conflicts in the execution of the entire project that may arise as the result of lack of coordination, or
lack of cooperation, shall be resolved by the Representative when necessary, and at no added cost to
the Owner.
B.
Any interference of ductwork or piping systems with the structural conditions shall be corrected before
the work proceeds.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
20 0020 - 2
Special Conditions
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
Project #56-14
RFP #R15135-15
1.9
INTERFERENCE
A.
The drawings are generally diagrammatic and all work shall be harmonized with that of all other trades
so that interference between piping, conduits, ductwork, equipment and building and structural work will
be avoided. Revisions found necessary or desirable during the course of work shall be made only after
receiving prior written approval from Representative.
B.
All necessary ductwork, piping, offsets, fittings, etc., required to install work properly and as close as
possible to walls, ceilings, etc., to take up the least amount of space, shall be furnished and installed at
no added cost to Owner. Such work shall be coordinated with all other work and there shall be no
impairment of system operation as a result.
C.
The drawings do not give exact details as to elevations of lines, locations, etc., and do not show all the
piping and ductwork offsets, control lines, pilot lines, and other installation details. Carefully lay out the
work at the site to conform to the building conditions, to provide proper grading of lines, to avoid all
obstructions with other systems and structure, to conform to installation instructions supplied by
equipment manufacturers and thereby provide an integrated, satisfactorily operating installation.
D.
Should the particular equipment, which is proposed for substitution, require space requirements other
than those indicated on the drawings, arrangement for such space with the Representative shall be
made prior to bidding. Should changes be necessary due to failure of compliance with this clause,
make necessary changes at no added cost to the Owner.
E.
Any large piece of apparatus which is to be installed in any space in the building, and which is too large
to permit access through stairways, doorways or shafts shall be placed in the space before the
enclosing structure is completed.
1.10
RENOVATION, REMODELING, AND ADDITIONS TO EXISTING BUILDINGS
A.
Equipment Selection: It is imperative that the new equipment being installed match any existing
equipment to remain. This shall include manufacturer and model number of all mechanical equipment
on all of the mechanical systems. This does not include all of the mechanical items specified herein or
scheduled on the drawings. The Contractor shall verify these particular items at the jobsite, submit and
explain on the submittals why he is deviating from specified products, and order his equipment
accordingly. Any discrepancies in matching the existing equipment shall be corrected by the Contractor
at no cost to the Owner.
B.
All existing equipment, piping, and other accessories, which are needed to be relocated or removed, are
shown on the plans as well as can be defined. The Contractor shall visit the jobsite and notify the
Owner's Representative of any discrepancies or conflicts not shown on the drawings prior to the bid
date. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to modify, relocate, or re-pipe any equipment not
shown on the drawings, if it interferes in any manner with the renovation, repair or addition at no
additional cost to the Owner.
1.11
A.
1.12
A.
SCAFFOLDING, RIGGING, TOOLS, ETC.
Furnish all necessary scaffolding, tackle, tools, all equipment and all labor necessary for the expeditious
execution of this contract.
CUTTING AND PATCHING
All necessary cutting and patching of walls, floors, partitions, ceilings, etc. as required for the proper
installation of this work, shall be done in a neat and proper manner, subject to the approval of the
Representative, and at no added cost to the Owner. No joists, beams, girders, columns or other
structural member shall be cut without written approval from the Representative and the contractor shall
exercise due diligence to avoid cutting holes larger than necessary or in the wrong location.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
20 0020 - 3
Special Conditions
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
Project #56-14
RFP #R15135-15
B.
Labor and materials required to replace or rebuild structural members cut or damaged shall be furnished
at no added cost to Owner and subject to Representative's approval.
C.
Patched areas shall be finished to match adjacent areas whether new or existing.
1.13
A.
1.14
A.
1.15
SLEEVES
All floor pipe penetrations, except for slabs on grade, shall have a sleeve 2" larger than the actual pipe
size plus insulation that extends 6" above finished floor. Penetration shall be fire caulked to prevent
noise, fire and smoke from transmitting between floors.
SAFETY GUARDS
Furnish and install safety guards of reinforced sheetmetal around all motor drives, fan belts, flexible
couplings etc., as required to obtain certificates of inspection and approval from any authorities having
lawful jurisdiction, as satisfactory to equipment manufacturer and Representative.
MOTORS, STARTERS & CONNECTIONS
A.
All equipment requiring electrical motors, starters and other electrical control devices shall be furnished
complete with all such items. Electrical contractor shall provide electrical connection as required.
B.
All motors and other electrical devices shall be suitable for the electrical characteristics and type of
service shown on the drawings, and shall comply with the requirements of Section 26 0000 of the
specifications.
C.
Caution is advised to carefully check the requirements for such items as the number of auxiliary
contacts required in motor starters for proper interlocks, etc., before attempting to incorporate such
items into the systems and to coordinate with the electrical contractor.
D.
Where unitized equipment is specifically permitted by contract documents, some of the electrical
restrictions of these specifications may be waived and the standard design of the manufacturer will be
considered, provided such design of the manufacturer complies with minimum requirements of the NEC
and has UL approval. Merits of each case will be individually reviewed, judged and accepted or
rejected by the Representative.
E.
Motors manufactured by General Electric, Westinghouse, Marathon, Central, Wagner, Fairbanks-Morse
and Allis-Chalmers will be acceptable for use on mechanical equipment.
1.16
A.
1.17
A.
ACCESS PANELS
Access panels shall be provided for all mechanical equipment, which requires access for service or
operation. Provide Delaney, Model 988-1 at these locations. Access panel shall be thirteen-gauge
stainless steel with brushed finish and vandal proof screws. Frame assembly shall fit into 12" x 12"
cavity in wall.
LUBRICATION
All equipment requiring lubrication shall have permanently attached label or plate indicating type of and
recommended frequency of lubrication. Such information shall be added to the as-built drawings.
Motors and rotating shafts of less than 1/2 HP rating shall have permanently lubricated and sealed ball
bearings except when specified otherwise. All equipment shall be fully and properly lubricated prior to
final acceptance of the building.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
20 0020 - 4
Special Conditions
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
Project #56-14
RFP #R15135-15
1.18
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
A.
Upon completion of all work and all tests, Contractor shall furnish the necessary skilled labor and
helpers for operating his system and equipment for a period of three days of eight hours each. During
this period, instruct the Owner or his representative fully in the operations, adjustment, and maintenance
of all equipment furnished. Give at least forty-eight hours notice to the Owner in advance of this period.
B.
The Contractor shall furnish to the General Contractor, instructions for operating and maintaining all
systems and equipment included in this contract. Contractor shall provide either one (1) electronic PDF
copy or four (4) bound sets for delivery to the Architect. All instructions shall be submitted in draft, for
approval, prior to final issue. Manufacturer's advertising literature or catalogs will not be acceptable for
operating and maintenance instructions.
C.
The Contractor, in the above-mentioned instructions, shall include the maintenance schedule and
procedure for the principal items of equipment furnished under this contract.
1.19
COMPLETION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Before final acceptance, all of the following shall be furnished:
1.
Accurate as-built drawings showing, in red or other contrasting color, all changes from the original
plans made during installation of the work.
2.
Operation and maintenance manuals.
3.
Four hours of operation instruction to Owner's operating personnel, if requested.
4.
Testing and balancing reports.
5.
Written guarantee against faulty workmanship and material good for one year from date of
acceptance by Owner.
B.
Before the project is complete, all exposed mechanical equipment shall be painted, at the direction of
the Architect. This shall include any louvers, air intakes, ducts, pipes, etc. which appear objectionable
to the Architect.
C.
Final inspection will not be made until the foregoing completion requirements have been met.
1.20
A.
1.21
FINAL INSPECTION
Prior to calling for a final inspection, carefully inspect the work to make sure it is complete in accordance
with the contract documents.
TEMPORARY USE OF MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
A.
New equipment will not be used without the owner's permission and only when the building is
completely closed in and clean. Sanding, painting and other dust creating activities must be completed.
B.
All equipment and ducts will be protected and monitored. When building is turned over to owner all
equipment will be in new condition. Any equipment or ducts found to be dirty or dusty will be cleaned to
the Owner’s satisfaction.
C.
All equipment will be lubricated and have gone through the prescribed startup procedures prior to any
use. Equipment will be started by the mechanical contractor with the commissioning agent present.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not applicable)
END OF SECTION
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
20 0020 - 5
Special Conditions
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
Project #56-14
RFP #R15135-15
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY FOR PRINTING
SECTION 20 0040
DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
The Division 1 General Conditions applying to the General Contractor also apply to this Subcontractor
as modified by Division 20-23 requirements.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
The extent of demolition work is indicated on the drawings and by the requirements of this section. A
visit to the site will be required to properly bid the demolition work.
B.
Provide all demolition work required for the removal and/or relocation of mechanical, fire protection, and
plumbing equipment, piping, ductwork, domestic cold and hot water, lab hot and cold water, acid waste
and vent, and sanitary waste piping, plumbing fixtures, floor drains, etc. to provide a complete and
operable system upon completion of the project.
C.
Work shall at all times be in compliance with local and national safety codes. Great care shall be taken
to avoid leaving hazardous conditions unattended.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (not used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
DEMOLITION
A.
Where devices or equipment are indicated or required to be removed by the architectural layout, the
associated ductwork or piping serving such shall be removed back to their source.
B.
Where devices or equipment are indicated or required to be relocated by the architectural layout, the
associated ductwork or piping shall be removed back to a main line or main duct and new products shall
be used to extend the service to the new location.
C.
Where devices or equipment are served from under a concrete floor, the piping shall be cut off below
finish floor level and capped. Non-shrink cementitious grout shall be provided to level the finished floor.
D.
Where ductwork or piping is run above inaccessible ceilings or in walls, which are to remain
undisturbed, the ductwork or piping shall be capped and abandoned in place.
E.
Where the removal of devices or equipment renders equipment downstream inoperable, services shall
be extended to the downstream device or equipment so that the device or equipment is left in operating
condition.
F.
This Contractor shall remove all abandoned ductwork or piping in construction area.
END OF SECTION
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
20 0040 - 1
Demolition
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
Project #56-14
RFP #R15135-15
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY FOR PRINTING
SECTION 20 0529
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Submittals:
1.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
2.2
Hangers and Supports for Plumbing and HVAC Piping Equipment:
1.
Structural Performance: Hangers and supports shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and
stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to ASCE/SEI 7.
a.
Design supports for multiple pipes capable of supporting combined weight of supported
systems and system contents.
b.
Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported
equipment and connected systems and components.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC
A.
Carbon-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:
1.
Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components.
2.
Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped. Provide for piping and equipment that
will not have field-applied finish.
3.
Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner. Provide on attachments for electrolytic
protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.
4.
Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to support
bearing surface of piping.
5.
Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel.
B.
Copper Pipe Hangers:
1.
Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, copper-coated-steel, factory-fabricated
components.
2.
Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of copper-coated steel.
C.
Fastener Systems:
1.
Concrete and Masonry Anchors: Chemical adhesive drilled anchors with appropriate tension and
shear capacities for supported loads and masonry type where used, installed per manufacturer’s
directions. Manufactured by Hilti.
2.
Other Fasteners, including beam clamps: Pullover, tension & shear capacities appropriate for
supported loads and building materials where used.
D.
Miscellaneous Materials:
1.
Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.
2.
Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and
nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.
a.
Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.
b.
Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
20 0529 - 1
Hangers and Supports
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
Project #56-14
RFP #R15135-15
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL PIPING INSTALLATIONS
A.
Install piping free of sags and bends.
B.
Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
3.2
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A.
Comply with MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-89. Install building attachments within concrete.
B.
Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems.
C.
Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so piping live and dead loading and stresses from
movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
D.
Install hangers and supports on the outside of the insulation in such a way to not compromise or
damage the insulation.
E.
Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping
system Specification Sections, install the following types:
1.
Adjustable Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or insulated
stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.
2.
Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of pipes, NPS
3/4 to NPS 24, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation.
3.
Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 4 to allow off-center
closure for hanger installation before pipe erection.
4.
Adjustable Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes,
NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.
5.
Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type 9): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes,
NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.
6.
Single Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1 to NPS 30, from two rods if
longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.
7.
Adjustable Swivel-Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of noninsulated stationary
pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 2.
F.
Vertical-Piping Clamps (Concealed Locations): Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in
piping system Specification Sections, install the following types:
1.
Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to NPS 20.
2.
Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to
NPS 20, if longer ends are required for riser clamps.
G.
Vertical-Piping Clamps (Exposed Locations): Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in
piping system Specification Sections, install the following types:
1.
Support shall consist of steel strut channel and properly sized and compatible pipe clamping
accessories.
2.
Piping serving the same equipment or area shall run down the wall together and be supported on
the same strut.
H.
Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Specification Sections, install the following types:
1.
Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads.
2.
Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.
3.
Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
20 0529 - 2
Hangers and Supports
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
Project #56-14
RFP #R15135-15
4.
5.
Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of building
attachments.
Steel Weld-less Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.
I.
Building Attachments:
st
1.
The existing 1 floor structure is concrete, some pan and joists and some beam and slab type
th
construction. Use drilled type concrete anchors. The existing 4 floor structure is concrete floor
with gypsum roof panels supported by steel framing. Do not attach to gypsum panels, use beam
clamps. No welding, drilling or cutting of existing steel framing.
J.
Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Specification
Sections, install the following types:
1.
Steel Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation that
matches adjoining insulation.
2.
Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended by manufacturer to prevent crushing
insulation.
3.
Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe, 360-degree insert of high-density,
100-psi minimum compressive-strength, water-repellent-treated calcium silicate or cellular-glass
pipe insulation, same thickness
END OF SECTION
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
20 0529 - 3
Hangers and Supports
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
Project #56-14
RFP #R15135-15
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY FOR PRINTING
SECTION 20 0548
VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A.
1.2
Submittals:
1.
Contractor shall furnish complete submittal data, which shall indicate the size, type and deflection
of each isolator; and the supported weight, disturbing frequency and efficiency of each isolator
proposed; and any calculations and other information as may be required for the
Architect/Engineer to check the isolator selection for compliance with the specification.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Provide for vibration isolation supports for all equipment, piping and ductwork indicated herein. The
transmission of perceptible vibration, structural borne noise or objectionable air borne noise to occupied
areas by equipment installed under this Contract will not be permitted. Install vibration isolators as
specified herein or shown on the Drawings or otherwise required to prevent the transmission of vibration
which would create objectionable noise levels in occupied areas.
B.
The vibration isolation supplier must be a firm capable of dealing effectively with vibration and noise
characteristics effects and criteria; and one that can provide facilities and capabilities for measuring and
evaluating the aforementioned disturbances.
C.
Maintain ASHRAE criteria for average noise criteria curves for all equipment at full load condition.
D.
Provide vibration isolation devices, from a single manufacturer or supplier who will be responsible for
complete coordination of all phases of this Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
A.
All materials shall meet or exceed all applicable referenced standards, federal, state and local
requirements, and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
All vibration isolators shall be designed for and treated for resistance to corrosion.
C.
Steel components shall be PVC coated or phosphated and painted with industrial grade enamel. All
nuts, bolts and washers shall be zinc electroplated or cadmium plated.
D.
Required spring deflections for isolators supporting various items of equipment are shown on the
Drawings or tabulated elsewhere in these Specifications, but in no case shall be less than one inch.
Springs shall be capable of 30 percent over travel before becoming solid.
E.
All isolators supporting a given piece of equipment shall limit the length of the exposed adjustment bolt
between the top and base to a maximum range of 1 inch to 2 inches.
F.
All isolators supporting a given piece of equipment shall be selected for approximately equal spring
deflection.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
20 0548 - 1
Vibration Controls
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
Project #56-14
RFP #R15135-15
2.2
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.3
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1.
The VMC Group/Amber Booth
2.
Consolidated Kinetics.
3.
Mason Industries
4.
Vibration Eliminator.
ISOLATOR TYPES
A.
Isolator types and required deflections are specified under "Application." Isolator type designations are
The VMC Group/Amber Booth designators. The isolators shall comply with the following descriptions
for each type required on the Project:
B.
Type SW: Adjustable, freestanding, open-spring mounting with combination leveling bolt and
equipment fastening bolt. The spring mounting to baseplate and compression plate must be rigid. The
neoprene pad with a minimum thickness of ¼ inch is bonded to the baseplate. A minimum horizontalto-vertical spring rate of 1.0 is required.
C.
Type PBSRA: Combination spring and elastomeric hanger consisting of a rectangular steel box
capable of 200 percent minimum overload without visible deformation, with the addition of a load
transfer plate to hold the equipment or piping at a fixed elevation during installation, a coil spring, spring
retainers and elastomeric element. Incorporate a 30 degree angularity feature that will permit up to a 15
degree misalignment of the hanger rod from the vertical without interferance to the hanger box.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
VIBRATION-CONTROL DEVICE INSTALLATION
A.
Piping Restraints:
1.
Comply with requirements in MSS SP-127.
B.
Install cables so they do not bend across edges of adjacent equipment or building structure.
C.
Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at flanges of
beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members.
D.
Support piping connections to equipment mounted on isolators using spring hangers to nearest flexible
pipe connector as follows:
1.
Up to 4 inch pipe size: First three points of support.
2.
5 inch to 8 inch pipe size: First four points of support.
3.
10 inch pipe size and over: First six points of support.
4.
Select three hangers closest to vibration source for minimum of 1.0” static deflection or static
deflection of isolated equipment. Select remaining isolators for minimum 1.0” static deflection of
1/2 static deflection of isolated equipment.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Installation shall meet or exceed all applicable federal, state and local requirements, referenced
standards and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
All installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer's published recommendations.
C.
Install motor driven equipment with vibration isolators.
D.
All open-type spring isolators shall be restrained as recommended by the manufacturer.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
20 0548 - 2
Vibration Controls
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
Project #56-14
RFP #R15135-15
E.
Piping:
1.
Floor mounted supports shall have the same type of isolator or media as is used for the nearest
isolated equipment connected to the piping.
2.
The pipe hanger system shall have provisions for all piping to be shimmed or blocked in place
until all connections are made and the system filled with water; then, the isolators adjusted to
support the weights and the shim blocks removed.
3.
The first three support points from a piece of isolated equipment shall be of the positioning type
and provide not less than the static deflection of the equipment isolators.
4.
All springs supporting piping shall be capable of an additional ½ inch deflection prior to complete
compression and springs supporting vertical risers shall have provisions for limit stops.
5.
System operating temperatures (degrees F) are as follows:
a.
Chilled Water - Supply: 39-42; Return: 51-54
b.
Heating Hot Water - Supply: 140-180; Return: 120-165
F.
Fans and Air Handling Units: Such units shall have electrical flexible connections not less than 36
inches long and the flexible duct connections with a free length of not less than 8 inches.
G.
Ductwork: Isolate all high pressure ductwork within each equipment room and to a minimum of 50 feet
from fan with Type BS hangers or Type SW floor supports, sized for ¾ inch deflection.
3.3
APPLICATION
A.
The following is a schedule of equipment on a typical project that requires vibration isolation and base
isolators of the types specified. Refer to Drawings for equipment scheduled for the Project. Any
equipment, system or condition that may be altered, added, or changed; or that is not specifically
described in the Contract Documents shall be isolated in a manner specified for similar equipment,
system or condition in order to comply with these Specifications.
1.
Fan Coil Units (Suspended)
a.
Isolator Type: PBSRA
b.
Minimum Deflection (inches): 1”
B.
Piping Application:
1.
Type PBSRA for hangers in all horizontal piping at equipment; except at connections to risers use
BS.
2.
Type SW for all floor supports of floor supported piping at equipment or stanchion.
3.4
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform tests and inspections.
B.
Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
C.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.5
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust isolators after piping system is at operating weight.
B.
Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height. After
equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during normal operation.
C.
Adjust active height of spring isolators.
D.
Adjust restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of operation.
END OF SECTION
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
20 0548 - 3
Vibration Controls
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
Project #56-14
RFP #R15135-15
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY FOR PRINTING
SECTION 21 0548
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Submittals:
1.
Product Data: For each type of product.
2.
Delegated-Design Submittal: For each set of vibration isolation and seismic-restraint calculations
and details for selecting vibration isolators and seismic restraints complying with performance
requirements, design criteria, and analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional
engineer responsible for their preparation.
3.
Welder certification certificates.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
2.2
Comply with seismic-restraint requirements in the IBC unless requirements in this Section are more
stringent.
ELASTOMERIC ISOLATION PADS
A.
Elastomeric Isolation Pads:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.3
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
Isolation Technology, Inc.
b.
Kinetics Noise Control, Inc.
c.
Mason Industries, Inc.
Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01.
Fabrication: Single or multiple layers of sufficient durometer stiffness for uniform loading over pad
area, factory or field cut to match requirements of supported equipment.
Pad Material: Oil and water resistant with elastomeric properties, with waffle surface pattern.
Load-bearing metal plates adhered to pads.
ELASTOMERIC HANGERS
A.
Elastomeric Mount in a Steel Frame with Upper and Lower Steel Hanger Rods
1.
2.
3.
4.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
Isolation Technology, Inc.
b.
Kinetics Noise Control, Inc.
c.
Mason Industries, Inc.
Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01.
Frame: Steel, fabricated with a connection for an upper threaded hanger rod and an opening on
the underside to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular lower hanger-rod misalignment
without binding or reducing isolation efficiency.
Dampening Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber, neoprene, or other elastomeric material with a
projecting bushing for the underside opening preventing steel to steel contact.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
21 0548 - 1
Vibration and Seismic Controls for
Fire-Suppressions Piping & Equip.
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
2.4
RESTRAINT CHANNEL BRACINGS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
Hilti, Inc.
Mason Industries, Inc.
Unistrut; an Atkore International company.
B.
Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01.
C.
Description: MFMA-4, shop- or field-fabricated bracing assembly made of slotted steel channels, with
accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and to building structure at the other end
and other matching components, and with corrosion-resistant coating; rated in tension, compression,
and torsion forces.
2.5
MECHANICAL ANCHOR BOLTS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
Hilti, Inc.
Kinetics Noise Control, Inc.
Mason Industries, Inc.
B.
Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01.
C.
Mechanical Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type in zinc-coated steel for
interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with strength
required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
VIBRATION CONTROL AND SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICE INSTALLATION
A.
Equipment Restraints:
1.
Install resilient bolt isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts where clearance between
anchor and adjacent surface exceeds 0.125 inch.
B.
Piping Restraints:
1.
Comply with requirements in MSS SP-127.
2.
Space lateral supports a maximum of 40 feet o.c., and longitudinal supports a maximum of 80
feet o.c.
3.
Brace a change of direction longer than 12 feet.
C.
Install bushing assemblies for anchor bolts for floor-mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient
media between anchor bolt and mounting hole in concrete base.
D.
Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at flanges of
beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
21 0548 - 2
Vibration and Seismic Controls for
Fire-Suppressions Piping & Equip.
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
E.
3.2
Drilled-in Anchors:
1.
Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for anchors.
Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during coring or drilling. Notify the
structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered during drilling.
Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and telecommunications conduit, and gas lines.
2.
Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved full design
strength.
3.
Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy-duty sleeve
anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element to which anchor is to
be fastened.
4.
Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench.
5.
Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior and stainless-steel anchors for exterior applications.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform tests and inspections.
B.
Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
C.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
END OF SECTION
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
21 0548 - 3
Vibration and Seismic Controls for
Fire-Suppressions Piping & Equip.
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY FOR PRINTING
SECTION 21 1000
WATER-BASED FIRE-SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Submittals:
1.
Product Data for valves, sprinklers, specialties, and alarms.
2.
Submit sprinkler system drawings identified as "working plans" and calculations according to
NFPA 13. Submit required number of sets to authorities having jurisdiction for review, comment,
and approval. Include system hydraulic calculations.
3.
Submit test reports and certificates as described in NFPA 13.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Design and Installation Approval: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Hydraulically design sprinkler systems according to NFPA 13.
C.
Comply with NFPA 13 and NFPA 70.
D.
UL-listed and -labeled and FM-approved pipe and fittings.
2.2
PIPE AND FITTINGS
A.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, ASTM A 135, or ASTM A 795.
B.
Grooved-End Fittings: UL-listed and FM-approved, ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12 ductile iron or
ASTM A 47, Grade 32510 malleable iron, with grooves or shoulders designed to accept grooved
couplings.
C.
Grooved-End Couplings: UL 213, ASTM A 536 ductile-iron or ASTM A 47 malleable-iron housing, with
enamel finish. Include gaskets, bolts, and accessories.
D.
Provide hangers, supports, and seismic restraints with UL listing and FM approval for fire-protection
systems.
2.3
VALVES
A.
Two-Piece Ball Valves with Indicators:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
NIBCO INC.
b.
Victaulic Company.
Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01.
Description: UL 1091, and FM Global Class Number 1112, Forged brass or bronze, 175 psig
working pressure.
End Connections for Valves NPS 1 through NPS 2: Threaded ends.
End Connections for Valves NPS 2-1/2: Grooved ends.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131101 - 0
21 1000 - 1
Water-Based Fire
Suppression Systems
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
2.4
SPRINKLERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.
Victaulic Company.
Viking Corporation.
B.
Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01.
C.
Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" listing or "Approval Guide" listing published by FM
Global.
1.
Pressure Rating for Automatic Sprinklers: 175 psig minimum.
D.
Automatic Sprinklers with Heat-Responsive Element:
1.
Nonresidential Applications: UL 199.
2.
Characteristics: Nominal 1/2-inch orifice with Discharge Coefficient K of 5.6, and for "Ordinary"
temperature classification rating unless otherwise indicated or required by application.
E.
Sprinkler Finishes: Varies by location.
F.
Chrome plated pendant type.Sprinkler Escutcheons (for Ceiling and Sidewall Mounted):
plated steel, one piece, flat.
2.5
PIPING SPECIALTIES AND ALARM DEVICES
2.6
SLEEVES
Chrome-
A.
Galvanized-Steel-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc coated, with
plain ends.
B.
Galvanized-Steel-Sheet Sleeves: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded
longitudinal joint.
2.7
SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
Metraflex Company (The).
Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
Proco Products, Inc.
B.
Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01.
C.
Description: Modular sealing-element unit, designed for field assembly, for filling annular space between
piping and sleeve.
1.
Sealing Elements: EPDM-rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and
number required for pipe material and size of pipe.
2.
Pressure Plates: Carbon steel.
3.
Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, with corrosion-resistant coating, of length required to
secure pressure plates to sealing elements.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131101 - 0
21 1000 - 2
Water-Based Fire
Suppression Systems
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL PIPING INSTALLATIONS
A.
Install piping free of sags and bends.
B.
Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
C.
Sleeves:
1.
Install sleeves for piping passing through penetrations in floors, partitions, roofs, and walls.
2.
For sleeves that will have sleeve-seal system installed, select sleeves of size large enough to
provide 1-inch annular clear space between piping and concrete slabs and walls.
3.
Install sleeves in concrete floors, concrete roof slabs, and concrete walls as new slabs and walls
are constructed.
D.
Escutcheons:
1.
Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and finished floors.
2.
Install escutcheons with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and with OD
that completely covers opening.
E.
Install unions at final connection to each piece of equipment.
3.2
SPRINKLER PIPING INSTALLATION
A.
Install alarm devices in piping systems and connect to fire-alarm system.
B.
Protect piping from earthquake damage as required by NFPA 13.
C.
Install pressure gages on riser or feed main, at each sprinkler test connection, and at top of each
standpipe. Install gages to permit removal, and install where they will not be subject to freezing.
3.3
SPRINKLER SCHEDULE
A.
3.4
Lay-In Ceiling Areas: Pendant type sprinklers.
PIPING SCHEDULE
A.
3.5
Use steel pipe with welded and roll-grooved joints.
1.
For steel pipe joined by welding or roll-grooved pipe and fittings, use Schedule 40.
2.
This is a welded system. All pipe 1-1/4” and larger to be as specified in N.F.P.A. #13 6.3.1.1 with
rolled grooves and to be welded in fabrication shop using U.L. approved pattern outlets.
TESTING
A.
Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler piping systems according to NFPA 13.
END OF SECTION
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131101 - 0
21 1000 - 3
Water-Based Fire
Suppression Systems
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY FOR PRINTING
SECTION 22 0523
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Submittals:
1.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
ASME Compliance:
1.
ASME B1.20.1 for threads for threaded end valves.
2.
ASME B16.18 for solder-joint connections.
B.
NSF Compliance: NSF 61 and NSF 372 for valve materials for potable-water service.
2.2
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES
A.
Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Valves in Insulated Piping: With 2-inch stem extensions.
C.
Two-Piece, Bronze Ball Valves with Full Port, and Bronze or Brass Trim:
1.
2.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
Hammond Valve.
b.
NIBCO INC.
c.
Stockham Valves & Fittings, Inc.
d.
Victaulic Company of America.
e.
Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company.
Description:
a.
Standard: MSS SP-110.
b.
CWP Rating: 600 psig.
c.
Body Design: Two piece.
d.
Body Material: Bronze.
e.
Ends: Threaded and soldered.
f.
Seats: PTFE.
g.
Stem: Bronze or brass.
h.
Ball: Chrome-plated brass.
i.
Port: Full.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Use ball valves for shutoff duty.
B.
Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
22 0523 - 1
General-Duty Valves For
Plumbing Piping
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
C.
Install valves for each fixture and item of equipment.
D.
Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.
E.
Install valves in a position to allow full stem movement.
END OF SECTION
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
22 0523 - 2
General-Duty Valves For
Plumbing Piping
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
SECTION 22 0700
PLUMBING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Submittals:
1.
Product Data: For each type of product.
2.
For adhesives and sealants, documentation including printed statement of VOC content and
chemical components.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
2.2
Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less
according to ASTM E 84.
INSULATION MATERIALS
A.
Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation: Type I, 850°F, bonded by thermosetting resin, complying with
ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory applied ASJ. ASJ shall be white, kraft paper, fiberglassreinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing, complying with ASTM C 11396, type I.
1.
2.3
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company.
b.
Knauf Insulation.
c.
Manson Insulation Inc.
d.
Owens Corning.
ADHESIVES
A.
Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.
1.
2.
B.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products.
b.
Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries.
c.
Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products.
For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 80 g/L or less.
ASJ Adhesive Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation
jacket lap seams and joints.
1.
2.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products.
b.
Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries.
c.
Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products.
For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
22 0700 - 1
Plumbing Insulation
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
2.4
MASTICS
A.
Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on below ambient services.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.5
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products.
b.
Vimasco Corporation.
For indoor applications, use mastics that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less.
Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43-mil dry film
thickness.
Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F.
Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 58 percent by volume and 70 percent by weight.
Color: White.
SEALANTS
A.
Joint Sealants for Mineral Fiber Products:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
ASJ Flashing Sealants:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.6
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products.
b.
Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries.
c.
Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products.
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant.
Service Temperature Range: Minus 100 to plus 300 deg F.
Color: White or gray.
For indoor applications, sealants shall have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:
a.
Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products.
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.
Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F.
Color: White.
For indoor applications, sealants shall have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less.
FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS
A.
2.7
Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When factoryapplied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:
1.
ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing; complying with
ASTM C 1136, Type I.
2.
ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a
removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.
TAPES
A.
ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying
with ASTM C 1136.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
22 0700 - 2
Plumbing Insulation
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
a.
Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division.
b.
Compac Corporation.
c.
Ideal Tape Co., Inc,; an American Biltrite company.
d.
Venture Tape.
Width: 3 inches.
Thickness: 11.5 mils.
Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.
Elongation: 2 percent.
Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width.
ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with requirements of the Midwest Insulation Contractors Association's "National Commercial &
Industrial Insulation Standards" for insulation installation on pipes and equipment.
B.
Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install
insulation continuously through walls and partitions.
C.
Mineral-Fiber Insulation Installation:
1.
Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes: Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal
longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.
2.
For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above ambient surfaces, secure laps with outward
clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.
3.
For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below ambient surfaces, do not staple longitudinal
tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material
manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.
D.
All exposed insulated piping shall be protected with aluminum or stainless steel jacket to protect
insulation from being torn or punctured.
E.
Interior Piping System Applications: Insulate the following piping systems:
1.
Domestic cold and hot water.
2.
Recirculated domestic hot water.
3.
Exposed water supplies and sanitary drains of fixtures for people with disabilities.
F.
Do not apply insulation to the following systems, materials, and equipment:
1.
Flexible connectors.
2.
Sanitary drainage and vent piping.
3.
Drainage piping located in crawlspaces unless otherwise indicated.
4.
Underground piping.
5.
Chrome-plated pipes and fittings, except for plumbing fixtures for people with disabilities.
6.
Piping specialties, including air chambers, unions, strainers, check valves, plug valves, and flow
regulators.
3.2
INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE
A.
Domestic Cold, Hot and Recirculated Hot Water, All Pipe Sizes:
1.
Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick.
B.
Exposed Sanitary Drains and Stops for Plumbing Fixtures for People with Disabilities, All Pipe Sizes:
1.
Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick.
END OF SECTION
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
22 0700 - 3
Plumbing Insulation
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY FOR PRINTING
SECTION 22 1116
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Submittals:
1.
Product Data: For transition fittings and dielectric fittings.
2.
Product for solvent cements and adhesive primers, documentation including printed statement of
VOC content.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PREFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
2.2
Potable-water piping and components shall comply with NSF 61.
PIPE AND FITTINGS
A.
Hard Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Types L, water tube, annealed temper with copper pressure fittings,
cast-copper-alloy or wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings. Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indicated.
1.
Joining Materials: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, lead-free-alloy
solder.
B.
Flexible Connectors: Stainless-steel, corrugated-metal tubing with wire-braid covering. Workingpressure rating a minimum of 200 psig.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install piping free of sags and bends.
B.
Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
C.
Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals in water
piping.
D.
Soldered Joints: Comply with procedures in ASTM B 828 unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Comply with requirements in Section 22 0529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and
Equipment" for pipe hanger and support devices.
3.2
INSPECTING AND CLEANING
A.
Inspect and test piping systems as follows:
1.
Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound and that
piping is full of water.
2.
Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered,
extended, or repaired.
B.
Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping by filling system with water/chlorine solution with at
least 50 ppm of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours. Flush system with clean,
potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from system after the standing time.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
22 1116 - 1
Domestic Water Piping
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
3.3
PIPING SCHEDULE
A.
3.4
Aboveground Distribution Piping: Type L, hard copper tubing.
VALVE SCHEDULE
A.
Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the following
requirements apply:
1.
Shutoff Duty: Use bronze ball valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller.
B.
Install ball valves on inlet to each plumbing equipment item, on each supply to each plumbing fixture not
having stops on supplies, and elsewhere as indicated.
END OF SECTION
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
22 1116 - 2
Domestic Water Piping
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
SECTION 22 1119
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Submittals:
1.
Product Data: For each type of product.
2.
Operation and maintenance data.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PIPING SPECIALTIES
A.
2.2
Potable-water piping and components shall comply with NSF 61.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
2.3
Minimum Working Pressure for Domestic Water Piping Specialties:
indicated.
125 psig unless otherwise
MANUFACTURED UNITS
A.
Pipe-Applied, Atmospheric-Type Vacuum Breakers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
Conbraco Industries, Inc.
b.
Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company.
c.
Zurn Industries, LLC.
Standard: ASSE 1001.
Size: NPS 1/4 to NPS 3, as required to match connected piping.
Body: Bronze.
Inlet and Outlet Connections: Threaded.
Finish: Rough bronze in unfinished or utility area. Chrome plated where visible.
Reduced-Pressure-Principle Backflow Preventers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
Conbraco Industries, Inc.
b.
Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company.
c.
Zurn Industries, LLC.
Standard: ASSE 1013.
Operation: Continuous-pressure applications.
Pressure Loss: 12 psig maximum, through middle third of flow range.
Body: Bronze for NPS 2 and smaller.
End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller.
Configuration: Designed for horizontal, straight-through, vertical-inlet, horizontal-center-section,
and vertical-outlet, or vertical flow.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
22 1119 - 1
Domestic Water Piping Specialties
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
8.
C.
Accessories:
a.
Valves NPS 2 and Smaller: Ball type with threaded ends on inlet and outlet.
b.
Air-Gap Fitting: ASME A112.1.2, matching backflow-preventer connection.
Primary Thermostatic, Water Mixing Valves:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
Armstrong International, Inc.
b.
Symmons Industries, Inc.
c.
Zurn Industries, LLC.
Standard: ASSE 1017.
Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated.
Type: Exposed-mounted, thermostatically controlled, water mixing valve.
Body: Bronze with corrosion-resistant interior components.
Connections: Threaded or union inlets and outlet as required.
Accessories: Manual temperature control, check stops on hot- and cold-water supplies, and
adjustable, temperature-control handle.
Tempered-Water Setting: 120 deg F.
Valve Finish: Rough bronze.
Piping Finish: Copper.
D.
Y-Pattern Strainers:
1.
Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated.
2.
Body: Bronze for NPS 2 and smaller.
3.
End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller.
4.
Screen: Stainless steel with round perforations unless otherwise indicated.
5.
Drain: Pipe plug.
E.
Icemaker Outlet Boxes <Insert drawing designation>:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
F.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
a.
Acorn Engineering Company.
b.
IPS Corporation.
c.
LSP Products Group, Inc.
Mounting: Recessed.
Material and Finish: Enameled-steel, epoxy-painted-steel, or plastic box and faceplate.
Faucet: Valved fitting complying with ASME A112.18.1. Include NPS 1/2 copper tube outlet.
Supply Shutoff Fitting: NPS 1/2 gate, globe, or ball valve and NPS 1/2 copper, water tubing.
Water-Hammer Arresters:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
AMTROL, Inc.
b.
Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc.
c.
Tyler Pipe; a subsidiary of McWane Inc.
d.
Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company.
e.
Zurn Industries, LLC.
Standard: ASSE 1010 or PDI-WH 201.
Type: Copper tube with piston.
Size: ASSE 1010, Sizes AA and A through F, or PDI-WH 201, Sizes A through F.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
22 1119 - 2
Domestic Water Piping Specialties
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
G.
Supply-Type, Trap-Seal Primer Device:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
H.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
MIFAB, Inc.
b.
Precision Plumbing Products.
c.
Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc.
d.
Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.
e.
Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company.
f.
Zurn Industries, LLC.
Standard: ASSE 1018.
Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum.
Body: Bronze.
Inlet and Outlet Connections: NPS 1/2 threaded, union, or solder joint.
Gravity Drain Outlet Connection: NPS 1/2 threaded or solder joint.
Finish: Chrome plated, or rough bronze for units used with pipe or tube that is not chrome
finished.
WATER FILTRATION SYSTEM
1.
2.
3.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
a.
3M.
b.
Wade.
Kitchen Filter:
a.
Dual port water filtration system to serve multiple applications.
b.
Built-in pressure gauge, inlet water shut-off valve, outlet check valves, mounting brackets.
c.
3 cartridge manifold filters with bacteriostatic carbon block filtration medium.
d.
Dedicated external scale inhibition cartridge.
e.
¾” NPT connections.
Carbonator Filter:
a.
Single cartridge system with integrated membrane pre-activated carbon technology to
reduce sediment and chlorine taste, reduce number of microorganisms and water-borne
bacteria, and provide odor control.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install backflow preventers in each water supply to mechanical and plumbing equipment/systems and to
other equipment and water systems that may be sources of contamination. This includes, but is not
limited to water filters, coffee and tea brewers, ice makers, carbonators, chemical dispensers, and
dishwashers. Comply with the 2009 International Plumbing Code and the authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Install temperature-actuated, water mixing valves with check stops or shutoff valves on inlets and with
shutoff valve on outlet.
C.
Install Y-pattern strainers for water on supply side of each water filtration system and dishwasher.
D.
Install water-hammer arresters in water piping according to PDI-WH 201.
E.
Install supply-type, trap-seal primer valves with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a minimum
of 1 percent, and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust valve for proper flow.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
22 1119 - 3
Domestic Water Piping Specialties
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
3.2
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform the following tests and inspections:
1.
Test each vacuum breaker and backflow preventer/assembly according to authorities having
jurisdiction and the device's reference standard.
2.
Domestic water piping specialties will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and
inspections.
3.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
END OF SECTION
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
22 1119 - 4
Domestic Water Piping Specialties
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
SECTION 22 1316
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A.
1.2
Submittals:
1.
Product Data: For each type of product.
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Do not interrupt service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following
conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary service according to requirements
indicated:
1.
Notify Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of sanitary waste
service and do not proceed without written permission.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working pressure
unless otherwise indicated:
1.
Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water.
B.
Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
2.2
PIPES AND FITTINGS
A.
Hub-and-Spigot Cast-Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 74, Service class; ASTM C 564 rubber
gaskets.
B.
Hubless Cast-Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301.
C.
Cast-Iron, Hubless-Piping Couplings:
1.
2.
3.
D.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
a.
MG Piping Products Company.
Standard: ASTM C 1277.
Description: Two-piece ASTM A 48/A 48M, cast-iron housing; stainless-steel bolts and nuts; and
ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop.
CISPI, Hubless-Piping Couplings:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
ANACO-Husky.
Fernco Inc.
Matco-Norca.
MIFAB, Inc.
Tyler Pipe; a subsidiary of McWane Inc.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
22 1316 - 1
Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
2.
3.
Standards: ASTM C 1277 and CISPI 310.
Description: Stainless-steel corrugated shield with stainless-steel bands and tightening devices;
and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PIPING INSTALLATION
A.
Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook," Chapter IV,
"Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."
B.
Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate branches,
bends, and long-sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be used on vertical stacks
if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be
used on vent lines. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard
increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in
direction of flow is prohibited.
C.
Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes, unless otherwise
indicated:
1.
Building Sanitary Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 and smaller;
1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 and larger.
2.
Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow.
3.
Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack.
D.
Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities
having jurisdiction.
E.
Comply with requirements in Section 22 0529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and
Equipment" for pipe hanger and support devices.
3.2
PIPE SCHEDULE
A.
3.3
Aboveground Applications: Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Piping Inspection:
1.
Do not enclose, cover, or put drainage and vent piping into operation until it is inspected and
approved by authorities having jurisdiction.
2.
During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must
be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction:
a.
Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping system before concealing after
system roughing-in and before setting fixtures and equipment.
b.
Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe
tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.
3.
Re-inspections: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection,
make required corrections and arrange for re-inspection.
4.
Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Piping Testing: Test systems according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence of
published procedure, according to the following:
1.
Test for leaks and defects in new piping systems and parts of existing systems that have been
altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for
each test, complete with diagram of portion of system tested.
2.
Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced piping until it has been
tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
22 1316 - 2
Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
3.
4.
5.
6.
3.4
All work shall be inspected by an OUFM inspector as follows:
a.
Underground inspection shall be made after trenches or ditches are excavated and
bedded, piping installed, and before any backfill is put in place.
b.
Rough-in inspection shall be made after the roof, framing, fire blocking, firestopping,
draftstopping and bracing is in place and all sanitary, storm and water distribution piping is
roughed-in, and prior to the installation of wall or ceiling members.
c.
Final inspection shall be made after the building is complete, all plumbing fixtures are in
place and properly connected, and the structure is ready for occupancy.
In addition, completed work shall be tested per IPC requirements (summarized below), as
applicable, and test results witnessed by an OUFM inspector.
a.
Drainage & Vent Water Test:
1)
All drainage & vent work shall be subjected to 10 feet of water head minimum for at
least 15 minutes with no leakage.
b.
Drainage & Vent Air Test:
1)
All drainage & vent work shall be subjected to 5 psi air pressure, and following initial
adjustments, retain 5 psi for at least 15 minutes.
c.
Drainage & Vent Final Test:
1)
All drainage & vent work shall undergo visual determination of code compliance by
an OUFM inspector.
Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest system or portion thereof until satisfactory
results are obtained.
Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.
CLEANING
A.
Use procedures described below:
1.
Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired
before using.
2.
Clean piping by flushing with potable water.
END OF SECTION
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
22 1316 - 3
Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY FOR PRINTING
SECTION 22 1319
SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Submittals:
1.
Product Data: For each type of product.
a.
Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and accessories for grease interceptors.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
2.2
Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
CLEANOUTS
A.
Exposed Metal Cleanouts:
1.
ASME A112.36.2M, Cast-Iron Cleanouts:
a.
b.
c.
d.
B.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1)
Josam Company.
2)
Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.
3)
Tyler Pipe; a subsidiary of McWane Inc.
4)
Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company.
5)
Wade.
6)
Zurn Industries, LLC.
Body Material: Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe test tee as required to match connected piping.
Closure: Countersunk or raised-head, brass or cast-iron plug.
Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size.
Metal Floor Cleanouts <Insert drawing designation>:
1.
ASME A112.36.2M, Cast-Iron Cleanouts:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1)
Josam Company.
2)
Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc.
3)
Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.
4)
Tyler Pipe; a subsidiary of McWane Inc.
5)
Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company.
6)
Wade.
7)
Zurn Industries, LLC.
Type: Adjustable housing.
Outlet Connection: As required.
Closure: Brass plug with straight threads and gasket.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
22 1319 - 1
Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
2.3
FLOOR DRAINS
A.
Cast-Iron Floor Drains:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
2.4
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
Josam Company.
b.
Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.
c.
Tyler Pipe; a subsidiary of McWane Inc.
d.
Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company.
e.
Wade.
f.
Zurn Industries, LLC.
Standard: ASME A112.6.3.
Body Material: Cast iron.
Outlet: Bottom.
Top or Strainer Material: Nickel bronze.
Top Shape: Round.
Trap Material: Cast iron.
Trap Pattern: Standard P-trap.
Trap Features: Trap-seal primer valve drain connection.
FLOOR SINKS
A.
Cast-Iron Floor Sinks:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
2.5
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
Josam Company.
b.
Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.
c.
Tyler Pipe; a subsidiary of McWane Inc.
d.
Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company.
e.
Wade.
f.
Zurn Industries, LLC.
Standard: ASME A112.6.3.
Body Material: Cast iron.
Outlet: Bottom.
Sediment Bucket: Insert description.
Top or Strainer Material: Nickel bronze.
Bottom Strainer Finish: Plastic dome bottom strainer.
Top Shape: Square.
Trap Material: Cast iron.
Trap Pattern: Standard P-trap.
Trap Features: Trap-seal primer valve drain connection.
MISCELLANEOUS SANITARY DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES
A.
Air-Gap Fittings: ASME A112.1.2, chrome-plated brass cover.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to building sanitary
sewers.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
22 1319 - 2
Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
B.
Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with finished
floor unless otherwise indicated.
1.
Install floor-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and adjoining
flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.
2.
Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless otherwise
indicated.
C.
Install air-gap fittings on draining-type backflow preventers and on indirect-waste piping discharge into
sanitary drainage system.
END OF SECTION
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
22 1319 - 3
Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY FOR PRINTING
SECTION 22 3300
ELECTRIC, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Submittals:
1.
Product Data: For each type and size of domestic-water heater.
2.
Documentation indicating that units comply with applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1,
Section 7, "Service Water Heating."
3.
Domestic-Water Heater Labeling: Certified and labeled by testing agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Warranties: Submit a written warranty executed by manufacturer agreeing to repair or replace water
heaters that fail in materials or workmanship within five years from date of Substantial Completion.
Failures include, but are not limited to, tanks and elements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Comply with requirements of applicable NSF, AWWA, or FDA and EPA regulatory standards for
tasteless and odorless, potable-water-tank linings.
B.
Comply with performance efficiencies prescribed in ASHRAE 90.1, "Energy Standard for Buildings
Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings."
2.2
WATER HEATERS, GENERAL
A.
Insulation: Suitable for operating temperature and required insulating value. Include insulation material
that surrounds entire tank except connections and controls.
B.
Anode Rods: Factory installed, magnesium.
C.
Combination Temperature and Pressure Relief Valve: ASME rated and stamped and complying with
ASME PTC 25.3. Include relieving capacity at least as great as heat input and pressure setting less
than water heater working-pressure rating. Select relief valve with sensing element that extends into
tank.
D.
Drain Valve: Factory or field installed.
2.3
ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS
A.
Commercial, Electric, Storage, Domestic-Water Heaters:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Bradford White Corporation.
Lochinvar, LLC.
RECO USA.
Rheem Manufacturing Company.
Smith, A. O. Corporation.
State Industries.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
22 3300 - 1
Electric, Domestic-Water Heaters
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
B.
Standard UL 1453, 52-gal. capacity. Steel tank with 150-psig working-pressure rating. Multiple electric,
screw-in, immersion-type heating elements with adjustable thermostat for each element and wiring
arrangement for simultaneous.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install temperature and pressure relief valves and extend to closest floor drain.
B.
Install vacuum relief valves in cold-water-inlet piping.
C.
Install shutoff valves and unions at hot- and cold-water piping connections.
D.
Make piping connections with dielectric fittings where dissimilar piping materials are joined.
E.
Electrically ground units according to authorities having jurisdiction.
END OF SECTION
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
22 3300 - 2
Electric, Domestic-Water Heaters
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
SECTION 22 4000
PLUMBING FIXTURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Submittals:
1.
Product Data for each type of plumbing fixture, including trim, fittings, accessories, appliances,
appurtenances, equipment, and supports.
2.
Documentation indicating flow and water consumption requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in ICC A117.1, "Accessible and Usable Buildings
and Facilities"; Public Law 90-480, "Architectural Barriers Act"; and Public Law 101-336, "Americans
with Disabilities Act"; for plumbing fixtures for people with disabilities.
B.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in Public Law 102-486, "Energy Policy Act," about
water flow and consumption rates for plumbing fixtures.
C.
NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects," for fixture
materials that will be in contact with potable water.
3-COMPARTMENT SINK
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.3
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
Advance Tabco.
b.
Elkay.
c.
Griffin Products, Inc.
d.
Just Manufacturing.
Floor mounted with TIG welded legs.
Bowl: 3-compartment, 16” x 20” bowls.
Drain board(s): Right and left sides, 24”.
Construction: One piece, drawn sink bowls with integral drain boards and splash. 16 Gauge type
304 stainless steel.
Backsplash: 8” high.
Drain: 1-1/2” stainless steel basket drain, centered in bowls.
HAND SINK
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
Advance Tabco.
b.
Elkay.
c.
Griffin Products, Inc.
d.
Just Manufacturing.
Wall mounted hand sink supplied with splash mounted faucet.
Bowl: 10” x 14” x 8”.
Drain: 1-1/2” stainless steel basket drain, centered in bowl.
Construction: Seamless, heavy gauge type 304 stainless steel. Satin finish. Die formed
countertop edge.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
22 4000 - 1
Plumbing Fixtures
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
2.4
EXISTING FIXTURES TO BE RE-USED
A.
2.5
The following plumbing fixtures are to be re-used as noted.
1.
Stainless Steel Vegetable Prep Sink
a.
Relocate existing sink. Provide and install new hot/cold water faucet and new filtered water
faucet. Modify sink as required for installation of both faucets.
2.
Stainless Steel Hand Sink
a.
Relocate and re-use existing sinks and faucets as noted.
3.
Mop Sink
a.
Relocate and re-use existing sink and faucet as noted.
SINK FAUCETS
A.
Kitchen Sinks
1.
Vegetable Sink
a.
Domestic Hot/Cold Water: T&S Brass and Bronze B-0154-CR-C.
b.
Filtered Water: T&S Brass and Bronze B-0592-LF20.
2.
3-Compartment Utensil Sink
a.
Domestic Hot/Cold Water: T&S Brass and Bronze B-0152-CR-C-TEE.
B.
Hand Sink
1.
The existing hand sinks are to be relocated and reinstalled with the associated existing faucets at
the new sink location.
2.
New hand sinks are to be provided with faucets.
a.
Provided with handsink.
b.
2.0 GPM, gooseneck type.
c.
1/2" ”PS male thread hot and cold water connections.
d.
Brass and chrome plated fittings.
C.
Mop Sink
1.
The existing mop sink faucet is to be relocated and reinstalled at the new mop sink location.
2.6
DISHWASHER AIR-GAP FITTINGS
A.
Dishwasher Air-Gap Fittings:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.7
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
a.
Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc.
b.
Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company.
Coordinate connections and capacities with final dishwasher purchased.
ASSE 1021, Hose Connections: 5/8-inch- ID inlet and 7/8-inch- ID outlet.
Capacity: At least 5 gpm; at inlet pressure of at least 5 psig and at temperature of at least 140
deg F, with deck mounting.
FITTINGS
A.
Supply Fittings:
1.
Standards: Comply with NSF/ANSI 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects," for
faucet materials that will be in contact with potable water. ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1.
2.
Supply Piping: Chrome-plated-brass pipe or chrome-plated-copper tube matching water-supply
piping size. Include chrome-plated wall flange.
3.
Stops: Chrome-plated brass, one-quarter-turn, ball-type or compression stop with inlet connection
matching water-supply piping type and size.
4.
Risers: Chrome-plated, soft-copper flexible tube riser.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
22 4000 - 2
Plumbing Fixtures
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
B.
2.8
WASTE FITTINGS
1.
Standard: ASME A112.18.2/CSA B125.2.
2.
Drain: Grid type with NPS 1-1/2 straight tailpiece for standard kitchen sinks.
3.
Trap Sizes: NPS 1-1/2.
4.
Material: Chrome-plated, adjustable p-trap with clean out plug; and chrome-plated-brass or -steel
wall flange.
GROUT
A.
Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydrauliccement grout.
1.
Characteristics: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior applications.
2.
Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.
3.
Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install fitting insulation kits on fixtures for people with disabilities.
B.
Install fixtures with flanges and gasket seals.
C.
Fasten counter-mounting plumbing fixtures to casework.
D.
Secure supplies to supports or substrate within pipe space behind fixture.
E.
Install individual supply inlets, supply stops, supply risers, and tubular brass traps with cleanouts at
fixture.
F.
Install water-supply stop valves in accessible locations.
G.
Install traps on fixture outlets. Omit traps on fixtures having integral traps. Omit traps on indirect wastes
unless otherwise indicated.
H.
Install chrome escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed, finished locations and
within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons where required to conceal protruding pipe
fittings.
I.
Seal joints between piping and wall and floor penetrations using one-part, mildew-resistant, silicone
sealant. Match sealant color to adjacent surface color.
J.
Seal joints between fixtures and walls, floors, and counters using sanitary-type, one-part, mildewresistant, silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color.
K.
Install piping connections between plumbing fixtures and piping systems and plumbing equipment.
Install insulation on supplies and drains of fixtures for people with disabilities.
END OF SECTION
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
22 4000 - 3
Plumbing Fixtures
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY FOR PRINTING
SECTION 23 0548
VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A.
1.2
Submittals:
1.
Contractor shall furnish complete submittal data, which shall indicate the size, type and deflection
of each isolator; and the supported weight, disturbing frequency and efficiency of each isolator
proposed; and any calculations and other information as may be required for the
Architect/Engineer to check the isolator selection for compliance with the specification.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Provide for vibration isolation supports for all equipment, piping and ductwork indicated herein. The
transmission of perceptible vibration, structural borne noise or objectionable air borne noise to occupied
areas by equipment installed under this Contract will not be permitted. Install vibration isolators as
specified herein or shown on the Drawings or otherwise required to prevent the transmission of vibration
which would create objectionable noise levels in occupied areas.
B.
The vibration isolation supplier must be a firm capable of dealing effectively with vibration and noise
characteristics effects and criteria; and one that can provide facilities and capabilities for measuring and
evaluating the aforementioned disturbances.
C.
Maintain ASHRAE criteria for average noise criteria curves for all equipment at full load condition.
D.
Provide vibration isolation devices, from a single manufacturer or supplier who will be responsible for
complete coordination of all phases of this Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
A.
All materials shall meet or exceed all applicable referenced standards, federal, state and local
requirements, and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
All vibration isolators shall be designed for and treated for resistance to corrosion.
C.
Steel components shall be PVC coated or phosphated and painted with industrial grade enamel. All
nuts, bolts and washers shall be zinc electroplated or cadmium plated.
D.
Required spring deflections for isolators supporting various items of equipment are shown on the
Drawings or tabulated elsewhere in these Specifications, but in no case shall be less than one inch.
Springs shall be capable of 30 percent over travel before becoming solid.
E.
All isolators supporting a given piece of equipment shall limit the length of the exposed adjustment bolt
between the top and base to a maximum range of 1 inch to 2 inches.
F.
All isolators supporting a given piece of equipment shall be selected for approximately equal spring
deflection.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
23 0548 - 1
Vibration Controls
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
2.2
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.3
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1.
The VMC Group/Amber Booth
2.
Consolidated Kinetics.
3.
Mason Industries
4.
Vibration Eliminator.
ISOLATOR TYPES
A.
Isolator types and required deflections are specified under "Application." Isolator type designations are
The VMC Group/Amber Booth designators. The isolators shall comply with the following descriptions
for each type required on the Project:
B.
Type SW: Adjustable, freestanding, open-spring mounting with combination leveling bolt and
equipment fastening bolt. The spring mounting to baseplate and compression plate must be rigid. The
neoprene pad with a minimum thickness of ¼ inch is bonded to the baseplate. A minimum horizontalto-vertical spring rate of 1.0 is required.
C.
Type BS: Spring hanger consisting of a rectangular steel box, coil spring, spring retainers, neopreneimpregnated fabric washer and steel washer.
D.
Type PBSRA: Combination spring and elastomeric hanger consisting of a rectangular steel box
capable of 200 percent minimum overload without visible deformation, with the addition of a load
transfer plate to hold the equipment or piping at a fixed elevation during installation, a coil spring, spring
retainers and elastomeric element. Incorporate a 30 degree angularity feature that will permit up to a 15
degree misalignment of the hanger rod from the vertical without shorting out to the hanger box.
E.
Type SP-NRC Style A: Pad-type mounting consisting of a 16 gauge galvanized steel separator plate
bonded between an absorbing pad (two layers of 3/8 inch thick ribbed or waffled neoprene pads bonded
to ½" sound/vibration absorbing pad) and 3/8 inch thick flatback pad . Size pads for approximately 50 to
60 psi load and a deflection of 0.025 to 0.18 inch.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
VIBRATION-CONTROL DEVICE INSTALLATION
A.
Install cables so they do not bend across edges of adjacent equipment or building structure.
B.
Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at flanges of
beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members.
C.
Support piping connections to equipment mounted on isolators using spring hangers to nearest flexible
pipe connector as follows:
1.
Up to 4 inch pipe size: First three points of support.
2.
5 inch to 8 inch pipe size: First four points of support.
3.
10 inch pipe size and over: First six points of support.
4.
Select three hangers closest to vibration source for minimum of 1.0” static deflection or static
deflection of isolated equipment. Select remaining isolators for minimum 1.0” static deflection of
1/2 static deflection of isolated equipment.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Installation shall meet or exceed all applicable federal, state and local requirements, referenced
standards and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
23 0548 - 2
Vibration Controls
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
B.
All installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer's published recommendations.
C.
Install motor driven equipment with vibration isolators.
D.
All open-type spring isolators shall be restrained as recommended by the manufacturer.
E.
Piping:
1.
Floor mounted supports shall have the same type of isolator or media as is used for the nearest
isolated equipment connected to the piping.
2.
The pipe hanger system shall have provisions for all piping to be shimmed or blocked in place
until all connections are made and the system filled with water; then, the isolators adjusted to
support the weights and the shim blocks removed.
3.
The first three support points from a piece of isolated equipment shall be of the positioning type
and provide not less than the static deflection of the equipment isolators.
4.
All springs supporting piping shall be capable of an additional ½ inch deflection prior to complete
compression and springs supporting vertical risers shall have provisions for limit stops.
5.
System operating temperatures (degrees F) are as follows:
a.
Chilled Water - Supply: 39-42; Return: 51-54
b.
LP Steam and Condensate
- Supply: 225; Return: 225
F.
Fans and Air Handling Units: Such units shall have electrical flexible connections not less than 36
inches long and the flexible duct connections with a free length of not less than 8 inches.
3.3
APPLICATION
A.
The following is a schedule of equipment on a typical project that requires vibration isolation and base
isolators of the types specified. Refer to Drawings for equipment scheduled for the Project. Any
equipment, system or condition that may be altered, added, or changed; or that is not specifically
described in the Contract Documents shall be isolated in a manner specified for similar equipment,
system or condition in order to comply with these Specifications.
1.
Blower Coil Unit (Suspended - Up to 15 HP)
a.
Isolator Type: PBSRA
b.
Minimum Deflection (inches): 1.5”
B.
Piping Application:
1.
Type PBSRA for hangers in all horizontal piping at equipment; except at connections to risers use
BS.
2.
Type SW for all floor supports of floor supported piping at equipment or stanchion.
3.4
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform tests and inspections.
B.
Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
C.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.5
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust isolators after piping system is at operating weight.
B.
Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height. After
equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during normal operation.
C.
Adjust active height of spring isolators.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
23 0548 - 3
Vibration Controls
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
D.
Adjust restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of operation.
END OF SECTION
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
23 0548 - 4
Vibration Controls
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
SECTION 23 0593
TESTING, BALANCING, AND COMMISSIONING FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A.
The Testing and Balancing services for this project are open to all sub-contractors meeting the
requirements of the specifications. The Mechanical Contractor’s bid shall include pricing for testing and
balancing of the proposed HVAC system(s).
B.
The University has a contracted rate structure with Optimum Energy Solutions, Inc. 4101 Perimeter
Center Drive, Suite 235, Oklahoma City, OK 73112, Phone # (405) 604-2880. The Mechanical
Contractor may choose to utilize this contracted rate with OES for this project.
C.
The Testing and Balancing Contractor's local (metropolitan OKC area) office shall have at least one
person certified by the National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB) for Testing and Balancing.
D.
NEBB firm shall have been licensed under the Oklahoma State Department of Health Occupational
Licensing Service for at least 1 year and the license shall include air conditioning unlimited and heating
unlimited. The NEBB firm must have an office in the State of Oklahoma and be a member of the
Oklahoma Environmental Balancing Bureau (O.E.B.B.)
E.
The testing and balancing of mechanical systems shall be in accordance with NEBB standards and
procedures as specified here-in.
F.
Submittals:
1.
Certified TAB reports.
2.
Documentation of work performed per ASHRAE 62.1, Section 7.2.2 - "Air Balancing."
3.
Documentation of work performed per ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6.7.2.3 - "System
Balancing."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
SCOPE
A.
3.2
This section covers the testing, adjusting, and balancing of environmental systems including but not
limited to: air distribution systems, hydronic distribution systems, and the equipment and apparatus
connected thereto. The work required, herein, shall consist of setting volume (flow) and speed adjusting
facilities provided or specified for the systems, recording data, making test and preparing reports, all as
hereinafter specified.
SPECIFIC AREAS OF RESPONSIBILITY
A.
The Mechanical Contractor shall be responsible for the start-up procedures and shall not subcontract
these items. A copy of the start-up report shall be forwarded to the Engineer and/or Owner and the
Testing and Balancing Contractor prior to the testing and balancing procedures being accomplished.
The Testing and Balancing Contractor shall be responsible for all the testing and balancing procedures,
as well as all of the test and balance reports.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
23 0593 - 1
Testing, Adjusting, Balancing
and Commissioning
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
3.3
PROCEDURES
A.
The environmental systems including all equipment, apparatus and distribution systems shall be tested,
adjusted, and balanced in accordance with the latest edition of the NEBB Procedural Standards for
testing, adjusting, and balancing of environmental systems.
B.
All work performed under this section shall be under the direction of the supervisor who is designated
and qualified under the certification requirements of NEBB.
C.
All instruments used for measurements shall be accurate and calibration histories for each instrument
shall be available for examination. Calibration and maintenance of all instruments shall be in
accordance with the requirements of NEBB.
D.
Accuracy of measurements shall be in accordance with NEBB standards.
E.
Prior to the Testing and Balancing Contractor beginning the testing and balancing, he shall perform the
check list of startup procedures and the systems commissioning check list below. The tests shall be
conducted in the presence of the Owner-Representative; however, the Testing and Balancing
Contractor will proceed with testing and balancing after Owner-Representative has been notified that
the tests are in progress.
F.
Air balance and testing shall not begin until system has been completed and is in full working order.
The Testing and Balancing Contractor shall put all heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning systems and
equipment into full operation and shall continue the operation during each working day of testing and
balancing. All tests shall be in accordance with NEBB (National Environmental Balancing Bureau).
G.
After completion of test and balance work, the Owner-Representative at his discretion may request a
recheck to confirm the report against design air quantities, i.e., setting of any outlet, supply air fan, or
exhaust fan as listed in Test Report. The Testing and Balancing Contractor shall provide technicians to
assist the Owner-Representative in making any tests he may require during this period of time.
H.
The Mechanical Contractor shall, upon receipt of his contract to proceed with the air conditioning
installation, schedule this work in cooperation with other trades involved and comply with the completion
date.
I.
The Mechanical Contractor shall coordinate this effort with all affected contractors for completion of
work and for arranging access to all elements requiring measurement.
J.
Upon completion of the air-conditioning system installation the Mechanical Contractor shall compile the
test data, and submit reports as identified below.
K.
Check List of Startup Procedures
1.
Pre-startup Inspection:
a.
Verify proper equipment mounting and setting.
b.
Verify that control, interlock, and power wiring is complete.
c.
Verify alignment of motors and drives.
d.
Verify proper piping connections and accessories.
e.
Verify that lubrication is completed.
2.
First Run Observations:
a.
Verify direction of rotation.
b.
Verify setting of safety controls.
c.
Monitor heat buildup in bearings.
d.
Check motor loads against nameplate.
3.
Equipment Check:
a.
Verify function of safety and operating controls.
b.
Verify proper operation of equipment.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
23 0593 - 2
Testing, Adjusting, Balancing
and Commissioning
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
c.
d.
L.
Report on inspection, observation, and checking procedures.
Furnish start-up report.
Systems Commissioning Check List
1. Hydronic Systems:
a.
Cleaned and filled with proper heat transfer fluid.
b.
Vents and drains installed.
c.
Pressure check devices installed.
d.
Temperature check devices installed.
e.
Flow balancing devices installed.
f.
Air vented from systems.
g.
Initial insertion of chemical inhibitor in closed systems.
h.
Stuffing boxes and packing glands on pumps and valves adjusted.
2.
Air Handling Systems:
a.
Air distribution terminal devices installed.
b.
Fire dampers, smoke dampers, access panels installed.
c.
Control dampers operate smoothly with tight shutoff.
d.
Splitter dampers set and tightened.
e.
Duct thermometers installed.
f.
Ductwork sealed for air tightness, ducts tested and test reports furnished.
g.
Clean filters installed, spare filters furnished.
h.
Filter draft gauges installed, filled with fluid.
i.
Belt drives checked for tension and alignment.
3.
Temperature Controls:
a.
Installation complete.
b.
Control devices calibrated.
c.
Control diagrams and sequences corrected to as-built.
d.
Control sequences checked by supervisor.
e.
Safety and operating control set points checked.
f.
Control linkages checked for smooth full stroke operation.
General:
a.
Check lubrication of all bearings, install lubrication tags.
b.
Installation has been cleaned up and temporary coverings, stickers, and tags removed.
c.
Painted finishes have been touched up where damaged.
e.
d. Equipment and piping identification work has been completed. One set of operating and
maintenance manuals has been prepared especially for use by testing and balancing
technicians.
M.
INSTRUMENTS
N.
The Testing and Balancing Contractor shall provide all instruments required to perform the testing
procedures. The instruments shall be accurately calibrated and maintained in working order.
3.4
SYSTEMS START-UP
A.
3.5
After the mechanical systems installation has been completed and prior to testing and balancing, the
Mechanical Contractor shall prepare the equipment for start-up and prepare for balancing and testing.
Each item of equipment shall be checked for proper piping, proper wiring, piping specialties, etc. A log
shall be kept on each item of equipment, of the procedure and a record made of the date and individual
accomplishing the tasks. All items to be verified are listed in Check List of Startup Procedures and
Systems Commissioning Check List below.
AIR TESTING PROCEDURE
A.
Coordinate air test and balance with Owner’s controls contractor.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
23 0593 - 3
Testing, Adjusting, Balancing
and Commissioning
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
B.
Preliminary Readings: The Testing and Balancing Contractor shall perform the following tests and
balance the systems in accordance with the following requirements:
1.
Make pitot tube traverse of main supply ducts and obtain design CFM at fans. Locate test plugs
to provide straight run of duct upstream of test plug.
2.
Test and record system static pressures, suction, and discharge.
3.
Test and adjust system for CFM recirculated air.
4.
Test and adjust system for design CFM outside air, both minimum and maximum.
5.
Test and record entering air temperatures. (D.B. heating and cooling) (W.B. cooling)
C.
Adjustments:
1.
Adjust fan RPM to provide proper static pressure at inlet to last terminal device. -----This
adjustment to be performed with clean filters at 0.20 to 0.40 in. w.c. This intent to be
accomplished as described and not by closing of dampers in duct system.
2.
Adjust all zones to proper design CFM, supply and return.
3.
Test and adjust all diffusers, grilles, and registers to within 10% of design requirements.
4.
Each grille, diffuser, and register shall be identified as to location and area. Size, type and
manufacture of diffusers, grilles, registers, and all tested equipment shall be identified and listed.
Manufacturer's ratings on all equipment shall be used to make required calculations. Readings
and tests of diffusers, grilles, and registers shall include required FPM velocity and test resultant
velocity, required CFM and test resultant CFM after adjustments.
5.
In cooperation with the Controls Contractor, set adjustments of automatically operated dampers
to operate as specified, indicated, and/or noted. Testing and Balancing Contractor shall
coordinate all controls for proper calibration and list all controls requiring adjustment by the
Control Contractor.
6.
All diffusers, grilles, and registers shall be adjusted to minimize drafts in all areas.
D.
As a part of the work of his contract, the Mechanical Contractor shall make any changes in the pulleys,
belts, and dampers or the addition of dampers required for correct balance at no additional cost to the
Owner.
3.6
WATER TESTING PROCEDURE
A.
Preliminary Readings: Work shall include all vav boxes, pumps, air handling units, fan coil units,
computer room unit, heat exchangers and other water devices. The contractor shall prepare the water
systems for balancing in the following manner, as applicable:
1.
Open all valves to full open position. Close coil bypass stop valves. Set mixing valve to full coil
flow.
2.
Contractor to remove and clean all strainers.
3.
Examine water in system and determine if water has been treated.
4.
Check pump rotation.
5.
Check expansion tanks to determine that they are not air bound and the system is completely full
of water.
6.
Check all air vents at high points of water systems and determine that all are installed and
operating freely.
7.
Set all temperature controls so all coils are calling for full cooling. This should close all automatic
bypass valves at coils. The same procedure to be used when balancing hot water coils; set on
full call for heating.
8.
Check operating of automatic bypass valves.
9.
Check and set operating temperatures of heat exchangers to design requirements.
10.
Complete air balance must have been accomplished before actual water balance begins.
B.
Adjustments to Water Balance:
1.
Check water temperature at inlet side of cooling and heating coils. Note rise or drop of
temperatures from source.
2.
Proceed to balance each chilled-water and hot-water coil.
3.
Upon completion of flow readings and adjustments at coils, mark all settings and record data.
4.
Entering air DB and WB temperatures
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
23 0593 - 4
Testing, Adjusting, Balancing
and Commissioning
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Leaving air DB and WB temperatures
Air flow CFM
Entering water temperature
Leaving water temperature
Water flow GPM
Motor amperage readings and voltage at which test was made
Motor nameplate data.
C.
Final Water Balance: Upon completion of all items described above, the Contractor shall proceed with
the following, as applicable:
1.
Read pressure drop through coils at set flow rate on call for full cooling and on full heating. Set
pressure drop across bypass valves, when used, to match coil full pressure drop. This prevents
unbalanced flow conditions when coils are on full bypass.
2.
Record and check the inlet water temperatures at each cooling and heating element.
3.
Record and check the leaving water temperatures at each cooling and heating element.
4.
Record and check the pressure drop of each coil.
5.
Record and check the pressure drop across each bypass valve.
6.
Record and check the pump operating suction and discharge pressure and final total developed
head (TDH).
7.
Record and list all mechanical specifications of pumps.
8.
Record and list rated and actual running amperage of pump motor and voltage of test.
9.
Record and list water metering device readings.
10.
Record and list steam metering device readings.
D.
MUA unit:
1.
Verify proper operation of steam & CHW controls & coils, fan & VFD, freeze-stat & OA damper.
2.
With all supplied devices in operation, determine minimum fan speed required to supply required
MUA. In particular, verify proper operation of all kitchen hoods. Coordinate with Controls
Contractor as required.
E.
Kitchen Hoods:
1.
Measure and adjust MUA, Capture Jet and exhaust airflows to within 10% of scheduled values.
3.7
All information from above shall be included in the completed Test and Balance Report.REPORTS
A.
Balancing firm, at completion of testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems, submit a completed report
consisting of certified, typewritten NEBB reporting forms covering all phases of work specified and a set
of single line drawings. Single line drawings shall be to the same scale as the design drawings and on
same size sheets. Drawings shall show all significant deviations from the original design and be known
as the "Corrected Balancing and Adjusting Drawings."
B.
Submit one (1) electronic copy of report to the Engineer or Owner. Reports shall be signed by the
principal of the balancing agency and person in charge of on-site work, and shall show NEBB
registration stamp of the firm.
C.
Each individual final reporting form submitted shall bear the name of the person who recorded the data
and the seal of the supervisor of the performing firm.
D.
Identification of all types of instruments used and their last dates of calibration shall be submitted with
the final report.
3.8
GUARANTEE
A.
The NEBB certified firm guarantees that all testing, adjusting, balancing and commissioning work will be
performed in accordance with NEBB standards and procedures and shall provide evidence of their
certification for the Engineer.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
23 0593 - 5
Testing, Adjusting, Balancing
and Commissioning
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
B.
All reports shall be sent to the Owner's representative and to the O.E.B.B. Quality Assurance
Inspection Board for review. N.E.B.B. contractor shall rebalance and resubmit if review board or
Owner's representative feels necessary. If a recheck or rebalance is necessary, the Testing and
Balancing contractor shall perform this work at no additional cost to the Owner.
END OF SECTION
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
23 0593 - 6
Testing, Adjusting, Balancing
and Commissioning
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
SECTION 23 0700
HVAC INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Submittals:
1.
Product Data: Identify thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and field
applied, if any), for each type of product indicated, if required for this project.
2.
For adhesives and sealants, documentation including printed statement of VOC content.
B.
Packaging: Ship insulation materials in containers marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM
specification designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.
C.
Scheduling: Schedule insulation application after testing duct and piping systems. Insulation application
may begin on segments of ducts and piping that have satisfactory test results. Where applicable,
schedule insulation application of piping systems after installation and testing of heat-trace tape.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
2.2
Surface-Burning Characteristics:
1.
Indoor Insulation and Related Materials: To be factory-labeled designating maximum flamespread index of 25 or less and smoke-developed index of 50 or less according to
ASTM E 84.
2.
Outdoor Insulation and Related Materials: To be factory labeled designating maximum flamespread index of 75 or less and smoke-developed index of 150 or less according to
ASTM E 84.
INSULATION MATERIALS
A.
Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process.
B.
Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C
553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type I, with factory applied foil scrim kraft (FSK).
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
CertainTeed Corporation.
b.
Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company.
c.
Knauf Insulation.
d.
Owens Corning.
e.
Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01.
C.
Insulation for exterior of grease ducts:
1.
Manufacturers: Provide 3M Fire Barrier Duct Wrap 615+
2.
External duct wrap system requires two (2) 1.5-inch layers of lightweight, flexible wrap
overlapped to provide an effective fire barrier. The barrier is installed in 24-inch or 48-inch
wide sections. Insulation pins are welded in certain locations to maintain the fire barrier
material up against the duct.
3.
Grease duct doors to be installed so the door can be removed and re installed and meet
code requirements.
4.
Install duct wrap as tested per manufacturer’s instructions to assure the duct wrap is
mechanically attached per the manufacturer’s spacing of bands or weld pins.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
23 0700 - 1
HVAC Insulation
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
5.
6.
Vertical and horizontal members of the support hanger system shall be wrapped with one
layer of the insulation. Vertical and horizontal portions shall be wrapped independent of one
another. The horizontal hanger shall be removed from the vertical support rods and wrapped
and then immediately replaced so that an adjacent horizontal support can be removed,
wrapped, and reinstalled. The end of the threaded vertical rod shall extend 6-inch past the
horizontal member at the beginning of the installation.
Penetrations: Where ducts penetrate fire rated walls, floors and roofs, the duct wrap shall be
used in conjunction with a firestop system that is listed by a nationally recognized laboratory
and rated for penetration of a rated wall or floor by the fire rated grease duct system used.
D.
Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory
applied all-service jacket (ASJ) manufactured from kraft paper, reinforcing scrim, aluminum foil, and
vinyl film.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company.
b.
Knauf Insulation.
c.
Owens Corning.
d.
Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01.
2.
Where used for steam or steam condensate, shall be capable of 850 degrees F.
E.
Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products.
b.
Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products.
c.
Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01.
2.
For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 80 g/L or less when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
3.
Provide and apply adhesives as recommended by the insulation manufacturer.
F.
Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on below ambient services.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products.
b.
Vimasco Corporation.
c.
Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01.
2.
Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43-mil dry film
thickness.
3.
Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 58 percent by volume and 70 percent by weight.
4.
Provide and apply mastic as recommended by the insulation manufacturer.
G.
Factory-Applied Jackets: When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:
1.
ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing; complying
with ASTM C 1136, Type I.
2.
FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing; complying
with ASTM C 1136, Type II.
H.
ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying
with ASTM C 1136.
I.
FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive;
complying with ASTM C 1136.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
23 0700 - 2
HVAC Insulation
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other
conditions affecting performance of insulation application.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
3.3
Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely
affect insulation application.
INSULATION INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with requirements of the Midwest Insulation Contractors Association's "National Commercial &
Industrial Insulation Standards" for insulation installation on pipes and equipment.
B.
Apply insulation materials, accessories, and finishes according to the manufacturer's written
instructions; with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; and free of voids throughout the length of ducts
and fittings.
C.
Use accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Use accessories that
do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.
D.
Apply insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal pipe runs.
E.
Apply multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
F.
Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.
G.
Seal joints and seams with vapor-retarder mastic on insulation indicated to receive a vapor retarder.
H.
Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
I.
Apply insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive
recommended by the insulation material manufacturer.
J.
Apply insulation with the least number of joints practical.
K.
Apply insulation over fittings, valves, and specialties, with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder
integrity, unless otherwise indicated. Refer to special instructions for applying insulation over fittings,
valves, and specialties.
L.
Hangers and Anchors: Where vapor retarder is indicated, seal penetrations in insulation at hangers,
supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-retarder mastic. Apply insulation continuously
through hangers and around anchor attachments.
M.
Insulation Terminations: For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated, seal ends with a
compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor retarder.
N.
Apply adhesives and mastics at the manufacturer's recommended coverage rate.
O.
Apply insulation with integral jackets as follows:
1.
Pull jacket tight and smooth.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
23 0700 - 3
HVAC Insulation
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
2.
3.
a.
4.
5.
Circumferential Joints: Cover with 3-inch-wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket.
Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip and
spaced 4 inches o.c.
Longitudinal Seams: Overlap jacket seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Apply insulation with
longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap.
Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 4 inches o.c.
Exception: Do not staple longitudinal laps on insulation having a vapor retarder.
Vapor-Retarder Mastics: Where vapor retarders are indicated, apply mastic on seams and
joints and at ends adjacent to flanges, unions, valves, and fittings.
At penetrations in jackets for thermometers and pressure gages, fill and seal voids with
vapor-retarder mastic.
P.
Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install
insulation continuously through walls and partitions.
Q.
Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall, Partition, and Floor Penetrations: Install insulation continuously
through penetrations. Seal penetrations.
3.4
MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION INSTALLATION - DUCTWORK:
A.
For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous, unbroken vapor
barrier.
B.
Blanket Applications for Ducts and Plenums:
1.
Secure board and blanket insulation with adhesive and anchor pins and speed washers.
2.
Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per square foot,
for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.
3.
Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions.
4.
Install anchor pins and speed washers on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of
vertical ducts as follows:
a.
On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, along longitudinal centerline of duct.
Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c.
b.
On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches. Space 16 inches o.c. each way, and
3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Apply additional pins and clips to hold insulation
tightly against surface at cross bracing.
c.
Anchor pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums.
d.
Do not overcompress insulation during installation.
5.
Impale insulation over anchors and attach speed washers.
6.
Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulation
surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing.
7.
Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches
from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation
segment with 1/2-inch staples, 1 inch o.c., and cover with pressure-sensitive tape having
same facing as insulation.
8.
Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches on longitudinal seams and end joints.
Secure with steel band at end joints and spaced a maximum of 18 inches o.c..
9.
Apply insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation segment for
each surface. Groove and score board insulation to fit as closely as possible to outside and
inside radius of elbows. Apply insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually
mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.
10.
Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond the insulation surface with
6-inch- wide strips of the same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of
stiffener, hanger, and flange with anchor pins spaced 6 inches o.c.
11.
Apply vapor-retarder mastic to open joints, breaks, and punctures for insulation indicated to
receive vapor retarder.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
23 0700 - 4
HVAC Insulation
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
3.5
MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION INSTALLATION - PIPING:
A.
Apply insulation to straight pipes and tubes as follows:
1.
Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire, tape, or bands without
deforming insulation materials.
2.
Where vapor retarders are indicated, seal longitudinal seams and end joints with vaporretarder mastic. Apply vapor retarder to ends of insulation at intervals of 15 to 20 feet to form
a vapor retarder between pipe insulation segments.
3.
For insulation with factory-applied jackets, secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6
inches o.c.
4.
For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below ambient surfaces, do not staple
longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by the insulation
material manufacturer and seal with vapor-retarder mastic.
B.
Apply insulation to flanges as follows:
1.
Apply preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
2.
Make width of insulation segment the same as overall width of the flange and bolts, plus
twice the thickness of the pipe insulation.
3.
Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of
adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation.
4.
Apply canvas jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlapping
seams at least 1 inch, and seal joints with vapor-retarder mastic.
C.
Apply insulation to fittings and elbows as follows:
1.
Apply pre-molded insulation sections of the same material as straight segments of pipe
insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions.
2.
When pre-molded insulation elbows and fittings are not available, apply mitered sections of
pipe insulation, or glass-fiber blanket insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe
insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire, tape, or bands.
3.
Cover fittings with standard PVC fitting covers.
4.
Cover fittings with heavy PVC fitting covers. Overlap PVC covers on pipe insulation jackets
at least 1 inch at each end. Secure fitting covers with manufacturer's attachments and
accessories. Seal seams with tape and vapor-retarder mastic.
D.
Apply insulation to valves and specialties as follows:
1.
Apply pre-molded insulation sections of the same material as straight segments of pipe
insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions.
2.
When pre-molded insulation sections are not available, apply glass-fiber blanket insulation to
valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation
without disturbing insulation. For check valves, arrange insulation for access to strainer
basket without disturbing insulation.
3.
Apply insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
4.
Use preformed standard PVC fitting covers for valve sizes where available. Secure fitting
covers with manufacturer's attachments and accessories. Seal seams with tape and vaporretarder mastic.
5.
Use preformed heavy PVC fitting covers for valve sizes where available. Secure fitting
covers with manufacturer's attachments and accessories. Seal seams with tape and vaporretarder mastic.
E.
For larger sizes where PVC fitting covers are not available, seal insulation with canvas jacket and
sealing compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer.
3.6
FIELD-APPLIED JACKET APPLICATION
A.
Apply PVC jacket where indicated, with 1-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Seal with
manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
23 0700 - 5
HVAC Insulation
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
3.7
DUCT AND PIPING SYSTEM APPLICATIONS
A.
Materials and thicknesses for systems listed below are specified in schedules at the end of this Section.
B.
Plenums and Ducts Requiring Insulation:
1.
Concealed and exposed supply and outdoor air.
2.
Concealed and exposed return air located in non-conditioned space.
3.
Concealed and exposed Tempered Make Up Air.
4.
Exhaust grease ducts – Note: 2 layers 3M 615+ fire wrap –or- 3” air gap and gyp.
board/noncombustible framing chase required.
C.
Plenums and Ducts Not Insulated:
1.
Metal ducts with duct liner.
2.
Factory-insulated plenums and casings.
3.
Flexible connectors.
4.
Vibration-control devices.
5.
Double-wall insulated supply and return air ducts.
6.
Testing agency labels and stamps.
7.
Nameplates and data plates.
8.
Factory-insulated access panels and doors.
D.
Piping Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following:
1.
Drainage piping located in crawlspaces.
2.
Underground piping.
3.
Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury.
3.8
DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION SCHEDULE
A.
Round and rectangular, interior duct insulation shall be the following:
1.
Mineral-Fiber Blanket: One layer, 2 inches thick and 1.5-lb/cu. ft. nominal density with FSK
jacket. Minimum installed R-value of 6.
B.
Grease Exhaust Duct insulation shall be the following:
1.
3” 3M Fire Barrier Duct Wrap 615+, in (2) 1-1/2 layers, installed per manufacturer’s
instructions.
C.
Rectangular, transfer air duct insulation:
1.
As noted on drawings.
D.
Shell/back of supply air grilles and diffuser insulation shall be the following:
1.
Mineral-Fiber Blanket: One layer, 2 inches thick and 1.5-lb/cu. ft. nominal density FSK
jacket. Minimum installed R-value of 6.
3.9
HVAC PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE
A.
Chilled Water Supply and Return: Insulation shall be the following:
1.
Operating Temperature: 35 to 75 deg F (2 to 24 deg C).
2.
Insulation Material: Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe, Type I.
3.
Insulation Thickness: Apply the following insulation thicknesses:
a.
½" pipe: 1" thickness.
b.
Pipe ¾”and above: 1-1/2" thickness.
4.
Field-Applied Jacket: PVC in mechanical rooms up to 8' above floor, also in any exposed
locations such as surface mount.
5.
Vapor Retarder Required: Yes.
6.
Finish: None.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
23 0700 - 6
HVAC Insulation
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
B.
Steam and Steam Condensate : Insulation shall be the following:
1.
Operating Temperature: 850 deg F.
2.
Insulation Material: Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe.
3.
Insulation Thickness: Apply the following insulation thicknesses:
a.
Steel, 1" to 3”" pipe size: 2-1/2" thickness
4.
Field-Applied Jacket: PVC in mechanical rooms up to 8' above floor.
5.
Vapor Retarder Required: No.
6.
Finish: None.
END OF SECTION
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
23 0700 - 7
HVAC Insulation
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY FOR PRINTING
SECTION 23 1123
FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Submittals:
1.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
2.
Shop Drawings: For facility natural-gas piping layout.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Minimum Operating-Pressure Ratings:
1.
Piping and Valves: 100 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Natural-Gas System Pressure within Space: Less than 2.0 psig.
2.2
PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS
A.
2.3
Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel, Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grade B.
1.
Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern.
2.
Wrought-Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M for butt welding and socket welding.
3.
Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass-to-iron seat, ground joint, and
threaded ends.
SPECIALTIES
A.
Appliance Flexible Connectors:
1.
Indoor, Fixed-Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.24.
2.
Indoor, Movable-Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.69.
B.
Strainers: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast-iron body, Y-pattern, full size of connecting piping, CWP rating of
125 psig. Include 40-mesh startup strainer and perforated stainless-steel basket.
2.4
MANUAL GAS-SHUTOFF VALVES
A.
General Requirements for Metallic, Manual Gas-Shutoff Valves: Comply with ASME B16.33.
1.
CWP Rating: 125 psig.
B.
Bronze Plug Valves: MSS SP-78.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
A.Y. McDonald Mfg. Co.
b.
Lee Brass Company.
Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584.
Plug: Bronze.
Operator: Square head or lug type with tamperproof feature where indicated.
Pressure Class: 125 psig.
Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20140725 - 0
23 1123 - 1
Facility Natural Gas Piping
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
7.
2.5
Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body.
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS
A.
Galvanized-Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.
B.
Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal
joint.
C.
Modular rubber sealing-element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between pipe and
sleeve.
1.
Sealing Elements: Ethylene-propylene-diene-monomer-rubber interlocking links shaped to fit
surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.
2.
Pressure Plates: Carbon steel or Stainless steel.
3.
Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, with corrosion-resistant coating, or Stainless steel of
length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements.
2.6
GROUT
A.
2.7
Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout.
ESCUTCHEONS AND FLOOR PLATES
A.
One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With chrome-plated finish and spring-clip fasteners.
B.
One-Piece Floor Plates: Cast-iron flange with holes for fasteners.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION
A.
Install piping free of sags and bends.
B.
Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
C.
Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and
service areas.
D.
Install escutcheons at penetrations of interior walls, ceilings, and floors.
E.
Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe
penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirements in
Section 07 8413 "Penetration Firestopping."
F.
Install gas stops for shutoff to appliances with low-pressure gas supply.
G.
Install natural-gas piping at uniform grade of 2 percent down toward drip and sediment traps.
H.
Use eccentric reducer fittings to make reductions in pipe sizes. Install fittings with level side down.
I.
Connect branch piping from top or side of horizontal piping.
J.
Install unions in pipes NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connection to each piece of
equipment. Unions are not required at flanged connections.
K.
Install strainer on inlet of each line-pressure regulator and automatic or electrically operated valve.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20140725 - 0
23 1123 - 2
Facility Natural Gas Piping
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
L.
Install pressure gage upstream and downstream from each line regulator.
M.
Connect gas piping to equipment and appliances with shutoff valves and unions. Install gas valve
upstream from and within 72 inches of each appliance using gas. Install union or flanged connections
downstream from valves.
N.
Extend relief vent connections for service regulators, line regulators, and overpressure protection
devices to the outdoors and terminate with weatherproof vent cap.
O.
Do not use natural-gas piping as grounding electrode.
3.2
PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A.
Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads complying with ASME B1.20.1. Utilize pipe
thread compound on all threaded joints.
B.
Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12M/D10.12, using qualified processes and
welding operators.
3.3
VALVE INSTALLATION
A.
Install manual gas-shutoff valve for each gas appliance ahead of corrugated stainless-steel tubing,
aluminum, or copper connector.
B.
Install regulators and overpressure protection devices with maintenance access space adequate for
servicing and testing.
3.4
INDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE
A.
Aboveground, branch piping NPS 1 and smaller shall be the following:
1.
Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints.
B.
Aboveground, distribution piping shall be the following:
1.
Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints.
3.5
ABOVEGROUND, MANUAL GAS-SHUTOFF VALVE SCHEDULE
A.
Valves for pipe sizes NPS 2 and smaller shall be the following:
1.
Bronze plug valve.
B.
Valves in branch piping for single appliance shall be the following:
1.
Bronze plug valve.
END OF SECTION
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20140725 - 0
23 1123 - 3
Facility Natural Gas Piping
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY FOR PRINTING
SECTION 23 2113
HYDRONIC PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Submittals:
1.
Product Data including rated capacities of selected models, weights (shipping, installed, and
operating), furnished specialties, accessories, and installation instructions for each hydronic
specialty and special-duty valve specified.
a.
Submit flow and pressure drop curves for diverting fittings and calibrated plug valves,
based on manufacturer's testing.
2.
Maintenance data for hydronic specialties and special-duty valves to include in the operation and
maintenance manual specified in Division 1.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
ASME Compliance:
1.
ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials, products, and installation. Safety valves
and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label.
2.
Fabricate and stamp air separators and compression tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1.
3.
Welding Standards: Qualify welding processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
B.
Hydronic piping components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum
working pressure and temperature:
1.
Chilled-Water Piping: 150 psig at 200 deg F.
2.
Cooling Coil Condensate-Drain Piping: 150 deg F.
3.
Safety-Valve-Inlet and -Outlet Piping: Equal to the pressure of the piping system to which it is
attached.
2.2
PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS
A.
Hard Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type L with ASME B16.22 wrought-copper solder fittings and
ASTM B 32, 95-5 tin antimony solder.
B.
Flexible Connectors: Stainless-steel bellows with woven, flexible, bronze, wire-reinforcing protective
jacket; 150-psig minimum working pressure, 250 deg F maximum operating temperature.
C.
Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; plain,
threaded ends.
2.3
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES
A.
Two-Piece, Bronze Ball Valves with Full Port and Bronze or Brass Trim (3/4-inch valves and larger):
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
Conbraco Industries, Inc.
b.
Crane; Crane Energy Flow Solutions.
c.
NIBCO INC.
d.
Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
23 2113 - 1
Hydronic Piping
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Standard: MSS SP-110.
SWP Rating: 150 psig and CWP Rating: 600 psig.
Ball: Chrome-plated brass.
Seats: Teflon seats and seals.
End Connections: Threaded or soldered.
Operator: Vinyl-covered steel lever handle.
Stem extension: For valves installed on insulated piping
Memory Stop: For operator handles.
B.
Two-Piece, Bronze Ball Valves with Regular Port and Bronze or Brass Trim (1/2-inch valves and
smaller):
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
Conbraco Industries, Inc.
b.
NIBCO INC.
c.
Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company.
2.
Standard: MSS SP-110.
3.
SWP Rating: 150 psig and CWP Rating: 600 psig.
4.
Ball: Chrome-plated brass.
5.
Seats: Teflon seats and seals.
6.
End Connections: Threaded or soldered.
7.
Operator: Vinyl-covered steel lever handle.
8.
Stem extension: For valves installed on insulated piping
9.
Memory Stop: For operator handles.
C.
Class 125, Bronze Swing Check Valves with Bronze Disc (2-1/2 inch and smaller):
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
Crane; Crane Energy Flow Solutions.
b.
KITZ Corporation.
c.
NIBCO INC.
d.
Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company.
2.
Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 3.
3.
CWP Rating: 200 psig.
4.
Body and Cap: ASTM B 62 cast-bronze.
5.
Disc: Horizontal swing, Y-pattern.
6.
Seat: Rubber or compostition.
7.
End Connections: Threaded or soldered.
D.
Class 125, Cast-Iron Swing Check Valves with Bronze Disc (2-1/2 inch and sm3-inch and larger):
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
Crane; Crane Energy Flow Solutions.
b.
KITZ Corporation.
c.
NIBCO INC.
d.
Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company.
2.
Standard: MSS SP-71.
3.
CWP Rating: 200 psig.
4.
Body and Cap: ASTM A 126 cast-iron body and bolted cap.
5.
Disc: Horizontal swing.
6.
End Connections: Flanged or grooved.
E.
Class 125, Wafer Check Valves:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
Hammond Valve Corporation.
b.
Keystone Valve USA, Inc.
c.
NIBCO INC.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
23 2113 - 2
Hydronic Piping
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
d.
Stockham Valves & Fittings, Inc.
e.
Victaulic Company of America.
CWP Rating: 200 psig.
Body: ASTM A 126 cast-iron.
Disc: Bronze disc/plates.
Pins and Springs: Stainless steel.
Seals: Buna N.
End Connections: Installed between Flanges.
F.
Class 125, RS, Bronze Gate Valves (2-1/2 inch and smaller):
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
Crane; Crane Energy Flow Solutions.
b.
KITZ Corporation.
c.
NIBCO INC.
d.
Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company.
2.
Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 2.
3.
CWP Rating: 200 psig.
4.
Body and Bonnet: ASTM B 62 cast-bronze.
5.
Wedge: Solid bronze.
6.
Rising Stem: Copper-silicon alloy.
7.
Packing: Teflon-impregnated with bronze packing nut.
8.
End Connections: Threaded or soldered.
9.
Handwheel: Malleable iron or aluminum.
G.
Class 125, OS&Y, Iron Gate Valves (3-inch and larger):
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
Crane; Crane Energy Flow Solutions.
b.
KITZ Corporation.
c.
NIBCO INC.
d.
Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company.
2.
Standard: MSS SP-70, Type I.
3.
CWP Rating: 200 psig.
4.
Body and Bonnet: ASTM A 126 cast-iron.
5.
Wedge: Solid cast-iron.
6.
Stem: Brass alloy.
7.
Packing: Teflon-impregnated with 2-piece packing gland assembly.
8.
End Connections: Flanged.
9.
Handwheel: Cast-iron.
H.
Class 125 Butterfly Valves:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
Crane; Crane Energy Flow Solutions.
b.
KITZ Corporation.
c.
NIBCO INC.
d.
Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company.
2.
Standard: MSS SP-67.
3.
CWP Rating: 200 psig.
4.
Max Pressure Differential: 150 psig.
5.
Body and Bonnet: ASTM A 126 cast-iron.
6.
Stem: Stainless steel..
7.
Sleave and stem seals: EPDM or Buna N, field-replaceable.
8.
Disc Type: Aluminum or bronze.
9.
Operator: Varies by size.
a.
2-inch to 6-inch: Standard lever handle with memory stop.
b.
8-inch to 24-inch: Gear operator with position indicator.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
23 2113 - 3
Hydronic Piping
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
I.
2.4
Class 125, Bronze Globe Valves:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
Crane; Crane Energy Flow Solutions.
b.
KITZ Corporation.
c.
NIBCO INC.
d.
Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company.
2.
Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 1.
3.
CWP Rating: 200 psig.
4.
Stem and Disc: Bronze.
SPECIAL-DUTY VALVES
A.
2.5
Brass, Automatic Flow-Control Valves
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
Flow Design, Inc.
b.
Griswold Controls.
c.
Armstrong
2.
Body: Brass housing, stainless-steel operating parts.
3.
Connections: Soldered, threaded, or compression connections.
4.
CWP Rating: Minimum 150 psig.
5.
Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F.
6.
Factory set to automatically control flow rates within plus or minus 5 percent design, while
compensating for system operating-pressure differential.
7.
Provide quick disconnect valves for flow measuring equipment.
8.
Provide metal identification tag with chain for each valve, factory marked with the zone
identification, valve model number, and flow rate.
HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES
A.
Manual Air Vents:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
AMTROL, Inc.
b.
Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
c.
Bell & Gossett; a Xylem brand.
d.
Taco, Inc.
2.
Body: Bronze body and nonferrous internal parts
3.
CWP Rating: Minimum 150 psig.
4.
Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F.
5.
Connections: 1/8-inch NPS discharge connection and 1/2-inch NPS inlet connection.
6.
Manually operated with screwdriver or thumbscrew.
B.
Automatic Air Vent:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
AMTROL, Inc.
b.
Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
c.
Bell & Gossett; a Xylem brand.
d.
Taco, Inc
2.
Body: Bronze body and nonferrous internal parts.
3.
CWP Rating: Minimum150-psig.
4.
Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F.
5.
Connections: 1/4-inch NPS discharge connection and 1/2-inch NPS inlet connection.
6.
Designed to vent automatically with float principle.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
23 2113 - 4
Hydronic Piping
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
C.
Y-Pattern Strainers: 125-psig working pressure; cast-iron body (ASTM A 126, Class B), flanged ends for
NPS 2-1/2 and larger, threaded connections for NPS 2 and smaller, bolted cover, perforated Type 304
stainless-steel basket, and bottom drain connection.
D.
Escutcheons and Floor Plates:
1.
One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with chrome-plated finish and
spring-clip fasteners.
2.
One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With chrome-plated finish and spring-clip fasteners.
3.
One-Piece Floor Plates: Cast-iron flange with holes for fasteners.
2.6
PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE TEST PROVISIONS
A.
Pete's Plug: 1/4 inch MPT by 3 inches long, brass body and cap, with retained safety cap, Nordel selfclosing valve cores, permanently installed in piping where shown, or in lieu of pressure gage test
connections shown on the drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with requirements in Section 23 0529 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment"
for hanger, support, and anchor devices. Comply with the following requirements for maximum spacing
of supports.
B.
Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and
service areas.
C.
Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and servicing of
valves.
D.
Install drains at low points in mains, risers, and branch lines consisting of a tee fitting, 3/4-inch NPS ball
valve, and short 3/4-inch NPS threaded nipple and cap.
E.
Install piping free of sags and bends and install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
F.
Use the fewest number of joints belowground and within floor slabs.
G.
Install piping at a uniform slope of 0.2 percent upward in the direction of flow, except for condensate
drain pipe, which shall be sloped 1 percent minimum downward toward drain.
H.
Make reductions in pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side up. This does not
apply to drainage piping.
I.
Install branch connections to mains using T-fittings in main with takeoff out the bottom of the main,
except for up-feed risers, which shall have swing joint and takeoff out the top of the main line.
J.
Install unions in pipes 2-inch NPS and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connections with each
piece of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. Unions are not required at flanged connections.
K.
Install flexible connectors at inlet and discharge connections to pumps (except in-line pumps) and other
vibration-producing equipment, and also where indicated on drawings.
L.
Install flanges on valves, apparatus, and equipment having 2-1/2-inch NPS and larger connections.
M.
Install strainers on supply side of each control valve, and elsewhere as indicated. Install 3/4-inch NPS
nipple and ball valve in blow-down connection of strainers 2-inch NPS and larger.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
23 2113 - 5
Hydronic Piping
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
N.
Anchor piping to ensure proper direction of expansion and contraction.
O.
Remove stems, seats, and packing of valves and accessible internal parts at piping specialties before
soldering or brazing.
P.
Escutcheons:
1.
Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and finished floors.
2.
Install escutcheons with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and with OD
that completely covers opening.
3.2
PIPE SCHEDULE
A.
Hot and Chilled Water, 2-1/2 Inch NPS and Smaller - Aboveground: As noted in drawings. If not noted,
Type L drawn-temper copper tubing with soldered joints.
B.
Hot and Chilled Water, 3 Inch NPS and Larger - Aboveground: Steel pipe with welded and flanged
joints.
C.
AHU Condensate Drain Lines: Type L drawn-temper copper tubing with soldered joints.
3.3
VALVE INSTALLATIONS
A.
Shutoff Duty: Use gate or ball valves.
B.
Throttling Duty: Use globe or ball valves.
C.
Install shutoff-duty valves at each branch connection to supply mains, at supply connection to each
piece of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.
D.
Install throttling-duty valves at each branch connection to return mains, at return connections to each
piece of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.
E.
Install calibrated plug valves or automatic flow control valves, as noted on the drawings, on the outlet of
each heating or cooling element and elsewhere as required to facilitate system balancing.
F.
Install drain valves at low points in mains, risers, branch lines, and elsewhere as required for system
drainage, consisting of a T-fitting, NPS 3/4 ball valve, and short NPS 3/4 threaded nipple and cap.
G.
Install check valves on each pump discharge and elsewhere as required to control flow direction.
H.
Install manual air vents at high points in the system, at heat-transfer coils, and elsewhere as required for
system air venting.
I.
Install valves with stem up. Allow clearance above stem for check mechanism removal.
J.
Install check valves for proper direction of flow in horizontal position with hinge pin level.
1.
Swing Check Valves: Horizontal position with hinge pin level.
2.
Wafer Check Valves: Horizontal or vertical position, between flanges.
3.4
VALVE CONNECTIONS
A.
Soldered Connections
1.
Cut tube square and to exact lengths.
2.
Clean end of tube to depth of valve socket with steel wool, sand cloth, or a steel wire brush to a
bright finish. Clean valve socket.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
23 2113 - 6
Hydronic Piping
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Apply proper soldering flux in an even coat to inside of valve socket and outside of tube.
Open gate and globe valves to fully open position.
Remove the cap and disc holder of swing check valves having composition discs.
Insert tube into valve socket, making sure the end rests against the shoulder inside valve. Rotate
tube or valve slightly to ensure even distribution of the flux.
Apply heat evenly to outside of valve around joint until solder melts on contact. Feed solder until
it completely fills the joint around tube. Avoid hot spots or overheating valve. Once the solder
starts cooling, remove excess amounts around the joint with a cloth or brush.
B.
Threaded Connections
1.
Note the internal length of threads in valve ends and proximity of valve internal seat or wall to
determine how far pipe should be threaded into valve.
2.
Align threads at point of assembly.
3.
Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to the external pipe threads, except where dry seal
threading is specified.
4.
Assemble joint, wrench tight. Wrench on valve shall be on the valve end into which the pipe is
being threaded.
C.
Flanged Connections
1.
Align flange surfaces parallel.
2.
Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of flanges and gaskets as
flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually and
uniformly with a torque wrench.
3.
For dead-end service, butterfly valves require flanges both upstream and downstream for proper
shutoff and retention.
3.5
VALVE END SELECTION
A.
3.6
Select valves with the following ends or types of pipe/tube connections:
1.
Copper Tube Size, 2-1/2 Inches (DN65) and Smaller: Solder ends, except provide threaded ends
for heating hot water service.
2.
Steel Pipe Sizes, 2-1/2 Inches (DN65) and Smaller: Threaded or grooved end.
3.
Steel Pipe Sizes, 3 Inches (DN80) and Larger: Grooved end or flanged.
ADJUSTING
A.
3.7
Adjust or replace packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service, but before final
adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if leak persists.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A.
General: Hanger, support, and anchor devices are specified in Division 23 Section "Hangers and
Supports." Conform to requirements below for maximum spacing of supports.
B.
Install the following pipe attachments:
1.
Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal runs.
C.
Install hangers for steel piping with the following minimum rod sizes and maximum spacing:
1.
3/4-Inch NPS: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
2.
1-Inch NPS: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
3.
1-1/2-Inch NPS: Maximum span, 9 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
4.
2-Inch NPS: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
5.
2-1/2-Inch NPS: Maximum span, 11 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
6.
3-Inch NPS: Maximum span, 12 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
D.
Install hangers for drawn-temper copper piping with the following minimum rod sizes and maximum
spacing:
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
23 2113 - 7
Hydronic Piping
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
3.8
3/4-Inch NPS: Maximum span, 5 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
1-Inch NPS: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
1-1/2-Inch NPS: Maximum span, 9 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
2-Inch NPS: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
2-1/2-Inch NPS: Maximum span, 11 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
3-Inch NPS: Maximum span, 12 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
SPECIALTIES INSTALLATIONS
A.
Install manual air vents at high points in system, at heat-transfer coils, and elsewhere as required for
system air venting.
B.
Install strainers on inlet side of each control valve, pressure-reducing valve, solenoid valve, in-line
pump, and elsewhere as indicated.
3.9
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
A.
Testing Preparation: Prepare hydronic piping according to ASME B31.9 and as follows:
1.
Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during test.
2.
Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints that cannot sustain reactions due to test
pressure. If temporary restraints are impractical, isolate expansion joints from testing.
3.
Clean and flush hydronic piping systems. Remove, clean, and replace strainer screens.
4.
Isolate equipment that is not subjected to test pressure from piping. If a valve is used to isolate
equipment, its closure shall be capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve.
Flanged joints where blinds are inserted to isolate equipment need not be tested.
5.
Install relief valve set at a pressure no more than one-third higher than test pressure, to protect
against damage by expanding liquid or other source of overpressure during test.
B.
Testing: Test hydronic piping as follows:
1.
Use ambient temperature water as testing medium, except where there is risk of damage due to
freezing. Another liquid may be used if it is safe for workers and compatible with piping system
components.
2.
Use vents installed at the high points of system to release trapped air while filling system. Use
drains installed at low points for complete removal of liquid.
3.
Examine system to see that equipment and parts that cannot withstand test pressures are
properly isolated. Examine test equipment to ensure that it is tight and that low-pressure filling
lines are disconnected.
4.
Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the design
pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum pressure for any vessel, pump, valve, or
other component in system under test. Check to verify that stress due to pressure at bottom of
vertical runs does not exceed either 90 percent of specified minimum yield strength or 1.7 times
"SE" value in Appendix A of ASME B31.9, Code for Pressure Piping, "Building Services Piping."
5.
After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine piping, joints,
and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing components as
appropriate, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks.
6.
Prepare written report of testing.
7.
Balance water flow as required by Section 23 0593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC."
3.10
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect finish. Remove burrs,
dirt, and construction debris, and repair damaged finishes including chips, scratches, and abrasions.
B.
Flush hydronic piping systems with clean water. Remove, clean, and replace strainer screens. After
cleaning and flushing hydronic piping system, but before balancing, remove any disposable fine-mesh
strainers..
END OF SECTION
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
23 2113 - 8
Hydronic Piping
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
SECTION 23 2213
STEAM AND CONDENSATE HEATING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Perform all Work required to provide and install steam and condensate pipe, valves and fittings
indicated by the Contract Documents with supplementary items necessary for the proper installation of
the steam and condensate piping systems.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
General mechanical requirements and items, which are common to more than one section of Division
23: Section 23 0010, Basic Mechanical Materials , Methods, and Requirements.
B.
Section 23 2230, Steam and Steam Condensate Specialties.
C.
Piping insulation: Section 23 0700, HVAC Insulation.
D.
Section 23 7300, Belt Drive Blower Coil Units and Section 23 3100, HVAC Ducts and Casings.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Valve manufacturer’s name and pressure rating shall be marked on valve body.
B.
All valves of the same type shall be provided from same manufacturer.
C.
All fittings of the same type (threaded or welding) shall be provided from same manufacturer.
D.
All flanges shall be from same manufacturer.
E.
Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to Chapter V, ANSI/ASME SEC B31.9 and applicable state
labor regulations.
F.
Welders Certification: In accordance with ANSI/AWS D10.12.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit in accordance with: Section 23 0010, Basic Mechanical Materials, Methods and Requirements.
B.
Manufacturer's Literature and Data for all of the following to be used in project:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
C.
Pipe and equipment supports.
Pipe and tubing, with specification, class or type, and schedule.
Pipe fittings, including miscellaneous adapters and special fittings.
Flanges, gaskets and bolting.
Valves of all types.
Dielectric fittings
Pipe alignment guides.
Expansion joints.
Expansion compensators.
Welder’s Certification of compliance with ANSI/AWS D10.12 and ANSI/ASME B31.9
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20140416 - 0
23 2213 - 1
Steam and Steam Condensate
Heating Piping
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
D.
1.5
As Built Piping Diagrams: Refer to : Section 23 0020, Mechanical Special Conditions – As-built
Drawings.
APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS
A.
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications
are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.
B.
American Society of Mechanical Engineers/American National Standards Institute (ASME/ANSI):
1.
2.
C.
American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
D.
B16.1 2005 Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings
B16.3 2006 Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings
B16.9 2007 Factory-Made Wrought Buttwelding Fittings
B16.11 2005
Forged Fittings, Socket Welding and Threaded
B16.14 91 Ferrous Pipe Plugs, Bushings, and Locknuts with Pipe Threads
B16.22 2001
Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings
B16.23 2002
Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings
B16.24 2006
Cast Copper Alloy Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class 150, 300, 400, 600,
900, 1500 and 2500
B16.39 98 Malleable Iron Threaded Pipe Unions, Classes 150, 250, and 300
B31.1 2007 Power Piping
B31.9-2008 Building Services Piping
B40.100-2005 Pressure Gauges and Gauge Attachments
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: SEC VIII D1-2001, Pressure Vessels, Division 1
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
E.
B1.20.1-83(R2006) Pipe Threads, General Purpose (Inch)
B16.4 2006 Gray Iron Threaded Fittings
A47 99 Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings
A53 2007 Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless
A106 2008 Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for High Temperature Service
A126 2004 Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings
A181 2006 Carbon Steel Forgings, for General-Purpose Piping
A183 2003 Carbon Steel Track Bolts and Nuts
A216 2008 Standard Specification for Steel Castings, Carbon, Suitable for Fusion Welding, for
High Temperature Service
A285-01
Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, Low-and-Intermediate-Tensile Strength
A307 2007 Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength
A516-2006 Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, for Moderate-and- Lower Temperature
Service
A536 84(2004)e1 Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings
B32 2008 Solder Metal
B61 2008 Steam or Valve Bronze Castings
B62 2009 Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings
B88 2003 Seamless Copper Water Tube
F439 06
Socket Type Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule
80
F441 02(2008) Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40 and 80
American Welding Society (AWS):
1.
A5.8 2004 Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20140416 - 0
23 2213 - 2
Steam and Steam Condensate
Heating Piping
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
2.
F.
B2.1-00 Welding Procedure and Performance Qualifications
Manufacturers Standardization Society (MSS) of the Valve and Fitting Industry, Inc.:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
SP 67 95
SP 70 98
SP 71 97
SP 72 99
SP 78 98
SP 80 97
SP 85 94
Butterfly Valves
Cast Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends
Gray Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends
Ball Valves with Flanged or Butt Welding Ends for General Service
Cast Iron Plug Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends
Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves
Cast Iron Globe and Angle Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends
G.
National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors (NB): Relieving Capacities of Safety Valves
and Relief Valves
H.
Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association: TEMA 18th Edition, 2000
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PIPE AND EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS, PIPE SLEEVES, AND WALL AND CEILING PLATES
A.
2.2
Provide in accordance with: Section 23 0010, Basic Mechanical Materials, Methods, and Requirements.
PIPE AND TUBING
A.
Steam Piping: Steel, ASTM A53, Grade B, seamless or ERW; A106 Grade B, Seamless; Schedule 40.
B.
Steam Condensate and Pumped Condensate Piping:
1.
All locations Steel, ASTM A53, Grade B, Seamless or ERW, or A106 Grade B Seamless,
Schedule 80.
C.
Vent Piping: Steel, ASTM A53, Grade B, seamless or ERW; A106 Grade B, Seamless; Schedule 40,
galvanized.
2.3
FITTINGS FOR STEEL PIPE
A.
2 inches and Smaller: Screwed or welded.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Butt welding: ASME B16.9 with same wall thickness as connecting piping.
Forged steel, socket welding or threaded: ASME B16.11.
Screwed: 150 pound malleable iron, ASME B16.3. 125 pound cast iron, ASME B16.4, may be
used in lieu of malleable iron, except for steam and steam condensate piping. Provide 300 pound
malleable iron, ASME B16.3 for steam and steam condensate piping. Cast iron fittings or piping is
not acceptable for steam and steam condensate piping. Bushing reduction of a single pipe size,
or use of close nipples, is not acceptable.
Unions: ASME B16.39.
Steam line drip station and strainer quick couple blowdown hose connection: Straight through,
plug and socket, screw or cam locking type for 1/2 inch ID hose. No integral shut off is required.
2 1/2 inches and Larger: Welded or flanged joints.
1.
2.
Butt welding fittings: ASME B16.9 with same wall thickness as connecting piping. Elbows shall be
long radius type, unless otherwise noted.
Welding flanges and bolting: ASME B16.5:
a.
Steam service: Weld neck or slip on, raised face, with non-asbestos gasket. Non-asbestos
gasket shall either be stainless steel spiral wound strip with flexible graphite filler or
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20140416 - 0
23 2213 - 3
Steam and Steam Condensate
Heating Piping
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
b.
C.
2.4
compressed inorganic fiber with nitrile binder rated for saturated and superheated steam
service 750 degrees F and 1500 psi.
Flange bolting: Carbon steel machine bolts or studs and nuts, ASTM A307, Grade B.
Welded Branch and Tap Connections: Forged steel weldolets, or branchlets and threadolets may be
used for branch connections up to one pipe size smaller than the main. Forged steel half couplings,
ASME B16.11 may be used for drain, vent and gage connections.
DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A.
Provide where copper tubing and ferrous metal pipe are joined.
B.
2 inches and Smaller: Threaded dielectric union, ASME B16.39.
C.
2 1/2 inches and Larger: Flange union with dielectric gasket and bolt sleeves, ASME B16.42.
D.
Temperature Rating, 250 degrees F for steam condensate and as required for steam service.
E.
Contractor’s option: On pipe sizes 2” and smaller, screwed end brass gate valves or dielectric nipples
may be used in lieu of dielectric unions.
2.5
SCREWED JOINTS
A.
Pipe Thread: ANSI B1.20.
B.
Lubricant or Sealant: Oil and graphite or other compound approved for the intended service.
2.6
VALVES
A.
Asbestos packing is not acceptable.
B.
All valves of the same type shall be products of a single manufacturer.
C.
Provide chain operators for valves 6 inches and larger when the centerline is located 7 feet or more
above the floor or operating platform.
D.
Manufactures include: NIBCO, Vogt, Crane, Vogt.
E.
Shut-Off Valves
1.
F.
Gate Valves:
a.
2 inches and smaller: MSS SP80, Bronze, 150 lb., wedge disc, rising stem, union bonnet.
b.
2 1/2 inches and larger: Flanged, outside screw and yoke.
1)
Low pressure steam service: MSS SP 70, iron body, bronze mounted, 125 psig
wedge disc.
Globe and Angle Valves:
1.
2.
Globe Valves:
a.
2 inches and smaller: MSS SP 80, bronze, 150 lb. Globe valves shall be union bonnet with
metal plug type disc.
b.
2 1/2 inches and larger:
1)
Low pressure steam service: 125 psig, flanged, iron body, bronze trim, MSS SP 85
for globe valves.
Angle Valves
a.
2 inches and smaller: MSS SP 80, bronze, 1034 kPa (150 lb.) Angle valves shall be union
bonnet with metal plug type disc.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20140416 - 0
23 2213 - 4
Steam and Steam Condensate
Heating Piping
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
b.
G.
Swing Check Valves
1.
2.
H.
2.7
2 1/2 inche) and larger:
1)
Low pressure steam service: 125 psig, flanged, iron body, bronze trim, MSS SP 85
for angle valves.
2 inches and smaller: MSS SP 80, bronze, 150 psi, 45 degree swing disc.
2-1/2 inches and Larger:
a.
Low pressure steam service:125 psig, flanged, iron body, bronze trim, MSS SP 71 for
check valves.
Manual Radiator/Convector Valves: Brass, packless, with position indicator.
PIPE ALIGNMENT
A.
2.8
Guides: Provide factory-built guides along the pipe line to permit axial movement only and to restrain
lateral and angular movement. Guides must be designed to withstand a minimum of 15 percent of the
axial force which will be imposed on the expansion joints and anchors. Field-built guides may be used if
detailed on the contract drawings.
FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
A.
General: Fabricated from materials suitable for steam service and that will provide flexible pipe
connections. Include 125 psig pressure rating, unless higher working pressure is indicated, and ends
according to the following:
1.
2” NPS and Smaller: Threaded
2.
2-1/2” NPS and larger: Flanged
B.
Stainless-Steel-Hose Flexible Connectors: corrugated, stainless steel inner tubing covered with
stainless steel braid. Include steel nipples or flanges, welded to hose.
C.
Stainless Steel Bellows: Woven, flexible bronze wire-reinforcing protective jacket, 150 psig minimum
working pressure and 250 degrees F maximum operating temperature. Connectors shall have threaded
or flanged end connections to match equipment connected and shall be capable of ¾” misalignment.
2.9
FIRESTOPPING MATERIAL
A.
Refer to Section 23 0010, Basic Mechanical Materials, Methods, and Requirements.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL
A.
The drawings show the general arrangement of pipe and equipment but do not show all required fittings
and offsets that may be necessary to connect pipes to equipment, fan-coils, coils, radiators, etc., and to
coordinate with other trades. Provide all necessary fittings, offsets and pipe runs based on field
measurements and at no additional cost. Coordinate with other trades for space available and relative
location of HVAC equipment and accessories to be connected on ceiling grid. Pipe location on the
drawings shall be altered by contractor where necessary to avoid interferences and clearance
difficulties.
B.
Store materials to avoid excessive exposure to weather or foreign materials. Keep inside of piping
relatively clean during installation and protect open ends when work is not in progress.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20140416 - 0
23 2213 - 5
Steam and Steam Condensate
Heating Piping
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
C.
Support piping securely. Refer to Section 23 0010, Basic Mechanical Materials, Methods, and
Requirements. Install convertors and other heat exchangers at height sufficient to provide gravity flow of
condensate to the condensate drain system tie-in, or flash tank and condensate pump.
D.
Install piping generally parallel to walls and column center lines, unless shown otherwise on the
drawings. Space piping, including insulation, to provide one inch minimum clearance between adjacent
piping or other surface. Unless shown otherwise, slope steam, condensate and drain piping down in the
direction of flow not less than one inch in 40 feet. Provide eccentric reducers to keep bottom of sloped
piping flat.
E.
Locate and orient valves to permit proper operation and access for maintenance of packing, seat and
disc. Generally locate valve stems in overhead piping in horizontal position. Provide a union adjacent to
one end of all threaded end valves. Control valves usually require reducers to connect to pipe sizes
shown on the drawing. Install butterfly valves with the valve open as recommended by the manufacturer
to prevent binding of the disc in the seat.
F.
Offset equipment connections to allow valving off for maintenance and repair with minimal removal of
piping. Provide flexibility in equipment connections and branch line take offs with 3 elbow swing joints
where noted on the drawings.
G.
Tee water piping runouts or branches into the side of mains or other branches. Avoid bull-head tees,
which are two return lines entering opposite ends of a tee and exiting out the common side.
H.
Connect piping to equipment as shown on the drawings. Install components furnished by others such
as:
1.
Flow elements (orifice unions), control valve bodies, flow switches, pressure taps with valve, and
wells for sensors.
I.
Firestopping: Fill openings around uninsulated piping penetrating floors or fire walls, with firestop
material.
J.
Where copper piping is connected to steel piping, provide dielectric connections.
K.
Pipe vents to the exterior. Where a combined vent is provided, the cross sectional area of the combined
vent shall be equal to sum of individual vent areas. Slope vent piping one inch in 40 feet (0.25 percent)
in direction of flow. Provide a drip trap elbow on relief valve outlets if the vent rises to prevent
backpressure. Terminate vent minimum 12 inches above the roof or through the wall minimum 8 feet
above grade with down turned elbow.
3.2
PIPE JOINTS
A.
Welded: Beveling, spacing and other details shall conform to ASME B31.1 and AWS B2.1.
B.
Screwed: Threads shall conform to ASME B1.20; joint compound shall be applied to male threads only
and joints made up so no more than three threads show. Coat exposed threads on steel pipe with joint
compound, or red oxide paint for corrosion protection.
C.
An operating test at design pressure, and for hot systems, design maximum temperature.
3.3
FLUSHING AND CLEANING PIPING SYSTEMS
A.
3.4
Steam, Condensate and Vent Piping: No flushing or chemical cleaning required. Accomplish cleaning
by pulling all strainer screens and cleaning all scale/dirt legs during start-up operation.
LEAK, OPERATING AND PERFORMANCE TEST AND INSTRUCTION
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20140416 - 0
23 2213 - 6
Steam and Steam Condensate
Heating Piping
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
A. Weldings:
1. All welds are subject to inspection, visual and/or x-ray, for compliance with Specifications. The
Owner will, at the Owner’s option, provide employees or employ a testing laboratory for the
purposes of performing said inspections and/or x-ray testing. Initial visual and x-ray inspections
will be provided by the Owner. Contractor shall be responsible for all labor, material and travel
expenses involved in the re-inspection and retesting of any welds found to be unacceptable. In
addition, Contractor shall be responsible for the costs involved in any and all additional testing
required or recommended by ASME/ANSI Standards B31.9 and B31.3 due to the discovery of
poor, unacceptable or rejected welds.
2. Welds lacking penetration, containing excessive porosity or cracks, or are found to be
unacceptable for any reason, must be removed and replaced with an original quality weld as
specified herein. All qualifying tests, welding and stress relieving procedures shall, moreover, be
in accord with Standard Qualification for Welding Procedures, Welders and Welding Operators,
Appendix A, Section 6 of the Code, current edition.
B. Leak Testing:
1. Inspect all joints and connections for leaks and workmanship and make corrections as necessary,
to the satisfaction of the Owner’s representative in accordance with the specified requirements.
Testing shall be performed in accordance with the specification requirements.
2. Equipment, valves, vents, expansion joints, pressure reducing stations, etc., must be removed or
isolated from test pressure and/or forces if the devices are not rated for the test pressures. All
water must be drained from all steam system piping and devices after test completion. Piping
shall be drained and protected any time the ambient is below freezing.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20140416 - 0
23 2213 - 7
Steam and Steam Condensate
Heating Piping
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
3. The following lines shall be tested at the stated pressure for the length of time noted:
Line
Steam M.P. &
L.P.
Steam
Condensate M.P.
Steam
Condensate H.P.
Pumped
Condensate
Return
Testing
Medium
Water
Testing
Pressure
(psig)
150
Time in
Minutes
15
Water
150
15
Water
150
15
Water
150
15
Where leaks occur, repair pipe and repeat tests. No leaks shall be corrected by peening. Remove and
replace defective piping and joints.
4.
Perform an operating test at design pressure, and for hot systems, design maximum temperature.
END OF SECTION
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20140416 - 0
23 2213 - 8
Steam and Steam Condensate
Heating Piping
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
SECTION 23 2230
STEAM AND STEAM CONDENSATE SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B.
Specifications throughout all Divisions of the Project Manual are directly applicable to this Section, and
this Section is directly applicable to them.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
Perform all Work required to provide and install the following steam specialties indicated by the Contract
Documents with supplementary items necessary for their proper installation.
1.
Steam traps.
2.
Steam pipe anchors.
3.
Steam pipe guides.
4.
Drip traps.
5.
Sediment strainers.
6.
Automatic air vents.
7.
Gauges and gauge connections.
8.
Thermometer and thermometer wells.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
The latest published edition of a reference shall be applicable to this Project unless identified by a
specific edition date.
B.
All reference amendments adopted prior to the effective date of this Contract shall be applicable to this
Project.
C.
All materials, installation and workmanship shall comply with the applicable requirements and standards
addressed within the following references:
1.
ASTM A105 Forgings, Carbon Steel, for Piping Components.
2.
ASTM A216 Steel Casings, Carbon, Suitable for Fusion Welding, for High Temperature Service.
3.
ASTM A395 Ferritic Ductile Iron Pressure Retaining Castings for Use at Elevated Temperatures.
4.
ASME B31.9 Building Services Piping.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
All specialties of the same type shall be provided from the same manufacturer.
B.
Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on body of each device.
1.5
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data:
1.
Submit Shop Drawings, wiring diagrams and product data on all steam specialties.
B.
Record Documents:
1.
Shop Drawing submittal of traps shall contain an itemized list with a tabulation of the load, trap
type and trap size.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
23 2230 - 1
Steam & Steam Condensate
Specialties
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
A.
2.2
All materials shall meet or exceed all applicable referenced standards, federal, state and local
requirements, and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction.
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Steam Traps:
1.
TLV.
B.
Automatic Air Vents:
1.
Spirax Sarco 13W
2.
Spence Engineering.
C.
Sediment Strainers:
1.
Muller Steam Specialty.
2.
Keckley.
3.
Spirax Sarco
2.3
INVERTED BUCKET TRAPS
A.
2.4
Cast iron or semi steel body and bolted cover for 250 psig working steam pressure (WSP); provide
access to internal parts without disturbing piping; with top test plug and bottom drain plugs, brass or
stainless steel bucket, stainless steel seats and plungers, and stainless steel lever mechanism with
knife edge operating surfaces.
FLOAT AND THERMOSTATIC TRAPS
A.
ASTM A126, cast iron or semi steel body and bolted cover for 125 psig WSP; provide access to internal
parts without disturbing piping; with bottom drain plug, stainless steel or bronze bellows type air vent,
stainless steel float, stainless steel lever and valve assembly.
B.
Float and thermostatic traps for clean steam service shall have Type 316L stainless steel bodies,
covers, and all internal components.
2.5
DRIP TRAPS
A.
Traps shall be 3/4 inch traps unless specifically shown to the contrary, i.e., they shall have 3/4 inch inlet
and outlet connections.
B.
Low-pressure traps shall be series sized to handle 200 percent of the load with an operating differential
pressure equal to 50 percent of the inlet steam pressure.
2.6
SEDIMENT STRAINERS
A.
Strainers in low and medium pressure steam piping systems 2 1/2 inches and larger shall be flanged
iron body strainers having bolted covers. These strainers shall be suitable for operating pressures as
high as 125 psig.
B.
Sediment strainers in low and medium pressure steam piping systems 2 inches and smaller shall be
arranged for screwed pipe connections.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
23 2230 - 2
Steam & Steam Condensate
Specialties
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
2.7
VACUUM BREAKERS
A.
Vacuum breakers shall be used on all modulating or on/off heat exchangers and coils, except in vacuum
return systems.
B.
Vacuum breakers shall be of hardened ball check valve design with all working parts manufactured from
stainless steel.
C.
Bodies shall be made of brass or stainless steel and shall be suitable for operating conditions of 300
psig saturated steam.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Installation shall meet or exceed all applicable federal, state and local requirements, referenced
standards and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Install specialties in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C.
Install float and thermostatic traps to drain condensate from unit heaters, converters, heating coils,
steam separators, flash tanks, steam jacketed equipment and direct steam injected equipment.
D.
Install float steam traps to drain condensate from steam main headers and branch lines at an operating
differential pressure equal to 50 percent of the inlet steam pressure unless noted otherwise.
E.
Size steam traps to handle minimum of two times maximum condensate load of apparatus served.
F.
Traps used on steam mains and branches shall be minimum 3/4-inch (20 mm) size.
G.
Install steam traps with union or flanged connections at both ends.
H.
Provide gate valve and strainer at inlet and gate valve at discharge of steam traps.
I.
Provide minimum 10-inch long dirt pocket of same pipe sizes as apparatus return connection between
apparatus and steam trap.
J.
Remove thermostatic elements from steam traps or valve out during temporary and trial usage and until
system has been operated and dirt pockets cleaned of sediment and scale.
K.
Steam Pipe Anchors:
1.
All steam lines shall be securely anchored at points designated on the Drawings and/or at such
points as may be needed to assure proper control of the expansion and contraction of such
systems.
L.
Steam Pipe Guides:
1.
All steam piping systems shall be properly guided.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
23 2230 - 3
Steam & Steam Condensate
Specialties
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
M.
Drip Traps:
1.
High-pressure drip trap assemblies shall be provided per the Contract Documents and where
required to keep piping systems completely drained of condensate.
2.
Where drip traps are installed in conjunction with 3 inch and larger steam lines, a drip pocket of
the nature detailed on the Drawings shall be provided where a natural pocket does not exist. The
piping and valves in trap assemblies shall be arranged as detailed on the Drawings; extra strong
pipes shall be used on both sides of the trap. The diameter of the drip pocket shall be the same
size as the distribution line up to 4 inches in diameter. The diameter shall be half the size of the
distribution line over 4 inches but never less than 4 inches.
3.
All drip traps used in medium pressure steam piping systems where automatic steam control
valves are not employed shall be arranged as shown on the Drawings. Each trap shall be
provided with a valved test line and shall be preceded by a sediment strainer.
4.
Condensate traps from coils, convertors, hot water generators, and all other devices where
modulating steam valves are employed shall be of the float and thermostatic type. Installed traps
with less than 12 inch of height between equipment outlet and trap inlet shall be sized for not less
than 300 percent of the load. Each trap shall be provided with a ½ inch valve test line and shall
be preceded by a sediment strainer. A vacuum breaker shall be supplied for these applications
and it can be integral to the trap. Under no circumstances shall a float and thermostatic trap be
installed in a manner to lift condensate up in a return line.
N.
Sediment Strainers:
1.
Each drip trap assembly, each control valve, for steam and each pressure reducing valve
assembly regardless of its size shall be preceded by a sediment strainer. The arrangement of
these sediment strainers shall be such that the screens may be removed for cleaning with ease
through a gasketed plug.
2.
Sediment strainers shall be placed in steam piping systems wherever shown on the Drawings
and at such other points as may be required for the removal of foreign material from the piping
systems.
3.
Full sized blow off valves shall be installed on all strainers in steam and steam condensate lines
and a properly sloped drain shall be installed from each valve to the nearest floor drain or drain
hub.
O.
Automatic Air Vents:
1.
Provide auto air vents with a pressure rating that is equal to system classification but not less
than 125 psig. Provide shut-off valve to facilitate maintenance of air vent.
2.
Locate all air vents and their discharge lines in accessible locations, preferably clustered.
P.
Vacuum Breakers:
1.
Vacuum breakers shall be installed in the supply side between the control valve and equipment.
2.
Install in a vertical position with cap at top.
3.
Mount the vacuum breaker on the highest point of the circuit.
4.
Large coils or equipment may require more than one vacuum breaker to be fitted.
END OF SECTION
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
23 2230 - 4
Steam & Steam Condensate
Specialties
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
SECTION 23 3100
HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Submittals:
1.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
B.
Structural Performance: Duct hangers and supports and seismic restraints shall withstand the effects of
gravity and seismic loads and stresses within limits and under conditions described in SMACNA's
"HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" and ASCE/SEI 7.
C.
Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in
ASHRAE 62.1.
D.
ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment"
and Section 7 - "Construction and System Start-up."
E.
ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6.4.4 - "HVAC
System Construction and Insulation."
F.
Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems" and with NFPA 90B,
"Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."
G.
Comply with UL 181 for ducts and closures.
2.2
DUCTS
A.
Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G60 hot-dip galvanized coating.
1.
Galvanized Coating Designation: G60.
2.
Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View: Mill phosphatized.
B.
Joint and Seam Sealants, General: All joint and seam sealants must comply with UL 181A
1.
Joint and Seam Sealant: One-part, water-based, latex sealant, formulated with a minimum of 70
percent solids, equal to Hard Cast Iron Grip 601, Ductmate Pro Seal, Polymer Adhesives Airseal
22, Childers CP-146, or Foster 32-19.
C.
Hangers and Support
1.
Building Attachments: Steel fasteners/anchors appropriate for building materials.
2.
Hanger Materials: Galvanized, sheet steel or round, threaded steel rod.
a.
Straps and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards-Metal and Flexible" for sheet steel width and thickness and for steel rod diameters.
3.
Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible with
duct materials.
4.
Trapeze and Riser Supports: Steel shapes complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M.
a.
Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel shapes and plates.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
23 3100 - 1
HVAC Ducts and Casings
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
2.3
Rectangular Metal Duct Fabrication
A.
Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." Comply with
requirements for metal thickness, reinforcing types and intervals, tie-rod applications, and joint types
and intervals.
1.
Lengths: Fabricate rectangular ducts in lengths appropriate to reinforcement and rigidity class
required for pressure classification.
2.
Materials: Free from visual imperfections such as pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, and
discolorations.
B.
Static-Pressure Classifications: Unless otherwise indicated, construct ducts to the following:
1.
Supply Ducts Between constant volume AHU’s & diffusers: 1-inch wg, minimum SMACNA seal
class C.
2.
Supply Ducts between AHUs and kitchen hoods (MUA ducts) 1-inch wg, minimum SMACNA seal
class B.
3.
Return Ducts: 1-inch wg, negative pressure, minimum SMACNA seal class C.
4.
Exhaust Grease Ducts: Positive or negative 3” wg, minimum SMACNA leakage class 3, 16 Ga.
minimum cold rolled steel with continuously welded seams, joints & penetrations.
C.
Cross Breaking or Cross Beading: Cross break or cross bead duct sides 19 inches and larger and
0.0359 inch thick or less, with more than 10 sq. ft. of un-braced panel area, unless ducts are lined.
D.
Elbows: Elbows shall be provided with radiused heel or turning vanes.
2.4
ROUND DUCT FABRICATION
A.
Round Ducts: All round ductwork shall be spiral type, constructed to SMACNA standards. Provide shop
fabricated or manufactured spiral ductwork. All fittings shall be factory fabricated, machine formed and
welded from galvanized sheet metal.
B.
Static-Pressure Classifications: Unless otherwise indicated, construct ducts to the following:
1.
Supply Ducts Downstream of Terminal Units and Reheat Coils: 1-inch wg
2.
Return Ducts: 1-inch wg, negative pressure.
2.5
ROUND SUPPLY FITTING FABRICATION
A.
90-Degree Tees and Laterals and Conical Tees: Fabricate to comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible," with metal thicknesses specified for longitudinal seam
straight duct.
B.
Diverging-Flow Fittings: Fabricate with a reduced entrance to branch taps with no excess material
projecting from body onto branch tap entrance.
C.
Elbows: Fabricate in die-formed, gored, pleated, or mitered construction. Fabricate bend radius of dieformed, gored, and pleated elbows one and one-half times elbow diameter. Unless elbow construction
type is indicated, fabricate elbows as follows:
1.
Round Elbows, 8 Inches and Smaller: Fabricate die-formed elbows for 45- and 90-degree elbows
and pleated elbows for 30, 45, 60, and 90 degrees only. Fabricate nonstandard bend-angle
configuration or nonstandard diameter elbows with gored construction.
2.
Round Elbows, 9 through 14 Inches: Fabricate gored or pleated elbows for 30, 45, 60, and 90
degrees, unless space restrictions require a mitered elbow. Fabricate nonstandard bend-angle
configuration or nonstandard diameter elbows with gored construction.
3.
Round Elbows, Larger Than 14 Inches, and All Flat-Oval Elbows: Fabricate gored elbows, unless
space restrictions require a mitered elbow.
4.
Die-Formed Elbows for Sizes through 8 Inches and All Pressures: 0.040 inch thick with two-piece
welded construction.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
23 3100 - 2
HVAC Ducts and Casings
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
5.
6.
2.6
Round Gored-Elbow Metal Thickness: Same as non-elbow fittings specified above.
Pleated Elbows for Sizes through 14 Inches and Pressures through 10-Inch wg: 0.022 inch.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Volume Dampers and Control Dampers: Single-blade and multiple opposed-blade dampers, standard
leakage rating, and suitable for horizontal or vertical applications; factory fabricated and complete with
required hardware and accessories.
1.
Available Manufacturers:
a.
Nailor Industries Inc.
b.
Penn Ventilation Company, Inc.
c.
Ruskin Company.
2.
Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01.
B.
Flexible Connectors: Flame-retarded or noncombustible fabrics, coatings, and adhesives complying with
UL 181, Class 1.
1.
Available Manufacturers:
a.
Ductmate Industries, Inc.
b.
Duro Dyne Corp.
c.
Ventfabrics, Inc.
d.
Ward Industries, Inc.
2.
Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01.
3.
Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene.
a.
Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd..
b.
Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch in the warp and 360 lbf/inch in the filling.
c.
Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.
C.
Flexible Ducts: Factory-fabricated, insulated, round duct, with an outer jacket enclosing 1-inch- thick,
glass-fiber insulation around a continuous inner liner complying with UL 181, Class 1.
1.
Available Manufacturers:
a.
Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.
b.
Hart & Cooley, Inc.
c.
McGill AirFlow Corporation.
2.
Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01.
3.
Flexible Duct Clamps: Stainless-steel band with cadmium-plated hex screw to tighten band with a
worm-gear action, in sizes 3 through 18 inches to suit duct size.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" unless
otherwise indicated.
B.
All longitudinal seams, transverse joints, and duct wall penetrations in shop and field fabricated
ductwork shall be sealed by applying one layer of approved sealant.
C.
Conceal ducts from view in finished and occupied spaces.
D.
Avoid passing through electrical equipment spaces and enclosures.
E.
Support ducts to comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible,"
Ch. 4, "Hangers and Supports."
F.
Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116, "Fibrous Glass Duct Construction
Standards," for fibrous-glass ducts.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
23 3100 - 3
HVAC Ducts and Casings
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
G.
Install ducts with fewest possible joints.
H.
Install fabricated fittings for changes in directions, changes in size and shape, and connections.
I.
Install couplings tight to duct wall surface with a minimum of projections into duct.
J.
Install ducts, unless otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally, parallel and perpendicular to
building lines; avoid diagonal runs.
K.
Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent
enclosure elements of building.
L.
Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness, unless noted otherwise.
M.
Conceal ducts from view in finished spaces. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions, unless
specifically indicated.
N.
Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling, fire dampers, lighting layouts, and similar finished work.
O.
Non-Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior walls,
and are exposed to view, conceal space between construction opening and duct or duct insulation with
sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as duct. Overlap opening on four sides by at least 1-1/2
inches.
P.
Clean new and existing duct system(s) before testing, adjusting, and balancing.
3.2
SEAM AND JOINT SEALING
A.
General: Seal all duct seams and joints in all supply, return, and exhaust systems.
B.
Seal externally insulated ducts before insulation installation.
3.3
HANGING AND SUPPORTING
A.
Install rigid round and rectangular metal duct with support systems indicated in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."
B.
Support horizontal ducts within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch
intersection.
C.
Install upper attachments to structures with an allowable load not exceeding one-fourth of failure (prooftest) load.
3.4
DUCT CLEANING
A.
Scope: Clean all ductwork which is existing and to remain in project area.
B.
Air Systems Cleaning Specialist Qualifications: Company shall be a certified member of NADCA,
employing an ASCS certified by NADCA on a full-time basis.
C.
Use existing service openings, as required for proper cleaning, at various points of the HVAC system for
physical and mechanical entry and for inspection. Utilize existing openings as much as possible, in lieu
of creating new openings. Comply with NADCA ACR 2006, “Guidelines for Constructing Service
Openings in HVAC Systems” Section. Access panels for use in Exhaust Grease Duct shall be UL listed,
and shall be installed per NFPA-96.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
23 3100 - 4
HVAC Ducts and Casings
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
D.
3.5
After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect the system. Vacuum
ducts before final acceptance to remove dust and debris.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
3.6
Upon completion of duct work and before installing ceilings, provide for visual inspection of ductwork by
University Mechanical Inspector. Schedule inspection a minimum of 24 hours in advance.
ADJUSTING
A.
Balance airflow within distribution systems, including submains, branches, and terminals, to indicated
quantities.
END OF SECTION
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
23 3100 - 5
HVAC Ducts and Casings
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY FOR PRINTING
SECTION 23 3713
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Submittals:
1.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including color charts for factory finishes.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
A.
Sizes, types and capacities shall be as indicated. Ceiling and wall frame types and dimensions shall be
verified from architectural drawings. Verify ceiling frame and panel style and dimension with reflected
ceiling plan, room finish schedule and material type. If final diffusers or registers have a higher sound
level than those specified or if dimensions are not compatible with finished walls, ceilings, floors or
architectural air cabinets (millwork), installed diffusers and registers shall be replaced at the Contractor’s
expense. Outlets and inlets shall be factory baked enamel finished with color selected by
Architect/Engineer unless indicated.
B.
Except as otherwise indicated, provide air devices where shown of the size, shape, capacity, and type
indicated, constructed of materials and components as indicated and as required for complete
installation. Devices in "wet areas" such as showers, swimming pools, exterior, etc. shall be aluminum
construction.
C.
Performance: Provide grilles and registers that have, as a minimum, the temperature and velocity
traverses, throw and drop, and meet noise criteria ratings for each size device as listed in
manufacturer's current data. Any device furnished and installed which causes excessive noise, air
movement, or drafts shall be replaced, at no additional cost to the owner, when so directed by the
Owner-Representative. The contractor shall remove and store removable cores of the air devices until
painting has been completed. If any cores are painted, the contractor must replace them at no cost to
the owner.
D.
All devices shall have phosphate treatment prior to painting. Painting shall be baked enamel or acrylic
finish accomplished by the electro-deposition method. Air dried is not acceptable.
2.2
DIFFUSERS
A.
Rectangular and Square Ceiling Diffusers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Stamped or spun, multi-core type diffuser to discharge air in 360 degree pattern, with direction
control and adjustable pattern where indicated. Shall be equivalent to Titus TMSA used as design
basis.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
Krueger.
b.
Price Industries.
c.
Titus.
Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01.
Material: Steel in dry environments. Aluminum in damp environments or as noted on drawings..
Finish: Baked enamel, white.
Mounting: As indicated on the drawings.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131101 - 0
23 3713 - 1
Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
2.3
REGISTERS AND GRILLES
A.
Fixed-Face Grille:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Sight-proof eggcrate grille with ½-inch x ½-inchspacing.. Shall be equivalent to Titus 45Fused as
design basis.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
Krueger.
b.
Price Industries.
c.
Titus.
Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01.
Material: Aluminum.
Finish: Baked enamel or acrylic, white, equal to Titus #26 White.
Mounting: As indicated on the drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb.
B.
Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and
accessories. Make final locations where indicated, as much as practical. For units installed in lay-in
ceiling panels, locate units in the center of panel unless otherwise indicated. Where architectural
features or other items conflict with installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location.
C.
Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connection to ducts and to allow service and
maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers.
D.
Provide manual locking volume dampers in branch ducts to all registers, grilles, and diffusers. Unless
shown otherwise, dampers shall be installed as far from the air distribution devices as possible.
E.
After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed, before
starting air balancing.
3.2
CLEANING
A.
After installation of diffusers, registers, and grilles, inspect exposed finish. Clean exposed surfaces to
remove burrs, dirt, and smudges. Replace diffusers, registers, and grilles that have damaged finishes.
END OF SECTION
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131101 - 0
23 3713 - 2
Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
SECTION 23 3723
HVAC ROOF VENTILATORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Submittals:
1.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5 or T-52.
B.
Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003 or 5005 with temp.
C.
Fasteners: Same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal or 300 Series stainless steel unless otherwise
indicated. Do not use metals that are incompatible with joined materials.
1.
Use types and sizes to suit unit installation conditions.
2.
Use hex-head or Phillips pan-head screws for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated
2.2
ROOF HOODS
A.
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1.
Greenheck Fan Corporation.
2.
Loren Cook Company.
3.
PennBarry.
B.
Factory or shop fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible," Figures 5-6 and 5-7.
C.
Materials: Aluminum sheet, minimum 0.063-inch- thick base and 0.050-inch- thick hood; suitably
reinforced.
D.
Roof Curbs and curb adaptors: Factory-fabricated, galvanized-steel sheet; with mitered and welded
corners; 1- 1/2-inch- thick, rigid fiberglass insulation adhered to inside walls; and 1-1/2-inch wood nailer.
Size as required to fit roof opening and roof hood base.
1.
Overall Height: Low as possible and yet maintain required clearances.
E.
Bird Screening: Aluminum, 1/2-inch- square mesh, 0.063-inch wire.
F.
Insect Screening: Aluminum, 18-by-16 mesh, 0.012-inch wire.
G.
Finish:
1.
Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces of dirt, grease, and other contaminants. Clean welds,
mechanical connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing according to ASTM A 780.
a.
Color and Gloss: Plain..
H.
Capacities and Characteristics: See schedule on Mechanical drawings for capacities and
characteristics.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
23 3723 - 1
HVAC Roof Ventilators
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install ventilators level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work.
B.
Install ventilators with clearances for service and maintenance.
C.
Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.
D.
Repair finishes damaged by cutting, welding, soldering, and grinding. Restore finishes so no evidence
remains of corrective work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the factory, make
required alterations, and refinish entire unit or provide new units.
3.2
CONNECTIONS
A.
Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections.
B.
Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories.
3.3
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust any damper linkages for proper damper operation.
END OF SECTION
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
23 3723 - 2
HVAC Roof Ventilators
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
SECTION 23 3813
COMMERCIAL-KITCHEN HOODS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Submittals:
1.
Product Data:
2.
Shop Drawings:
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Fabricate hoods according to NSF 2, "Food Equipment."
B.
Type 1 hoods shall be listed and labeled, according to UL 710, by a testing agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
C.
Standard hoods shall be designed, fabricated, and installed according to NFPA 96.
D.
Filters/baffles shall be tested according to UL 1046, "Grease Filters for Exhaust Ducts," by a Nationally
Recognized Testing Laboratory acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
E.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended
use.
2.2
TYPE I EXHAUST HOOD FABRICATION
A.
Provide all kitchen hoods from one of the following manufacturers:
1.
Halton Company
B.
Furnish and install complete kitchen exhaust canopy. The hood shall include ceiling mounted plenum(s)
extending 24” wide and entire length of the kitchen hood canopy. The canopy shall bear the
Underwriters Laboratories (U.L.) label, UL (or ETL) listed range hood with UL (or ETL) listed fire
dampers for each grease exhaust and be fabricated in compliance with NFPA-96 standards and shall
bear the National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) seal of approval.
C.
The installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and conform to NFPA96 guidelines and all applicable local codes.
D.
The size shall be as indicated on drawings and/or equipment schedule.
E.
The outer canopy shall be 18-gauge stainless steel, where exposed, type 304 with #4 finish. All exterior
joints shall be continuously welded liquid tight, ground smooth, and polished to a #4 finish. Tack welded
and cap seamed joints are not permitted.
F.
The canopy liner shall be 18 gauge stainless steel where exposed, type 304 with #4 finish. The canopy
shall have an integral exhaust duct collar. All seams of the inner liner shall have grease tight joints.
Each canopy shall have a filter housing of the same material as the canopy liner and shall be equipped
with a concealed drip tray the full length of the canopy and with a grease cup for easy removal and daily
cleaning.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
23 3813 - 1
Commercial-Kitchen Hoods
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
G.
Hood lights shall be UL listed 20-Watt LED type with aluminum heat sink for proper heat dispersion
suitable for commercial kitchen grease hood application. The LED light is to supply 50 footcandle (FC)
lighting intensity when installed on 36” centers in a kitchen hood hung at 84” AFF. LED light fixture must
comply with new U.S. Dept, of Health guidelines. Screw-in LED light will not be acceptable.
H.
The hood exhaust airflow will be based on the convective heat generated by the appliances underneath
each canopy. Hood submittal shall include convective heat calculations based on the input power of the
appliances served.
I.
The “capture Jet” air shall be introduced through a special discharge panel and shall not exceed 15% of
the calculated exhaust airflow. The Capture Jet air shall be pulled into a 1” sealed air plenum by the
Capture Jet fan and discharged through Capture Jet nozzles located along the bottom edge of the hood
with a minimum of 1500 FPM discharge velocity.
J.
The hood shall be equipped with multi-cyclone stainless steel grease extractors. Sound levels shall not
exceed an NC rating of 55.
K.
The air flows through the grease extractors, the capture jet chamber and the hood exhaust are to be
determined through the integral Testing and Balancing ports mounted in the hood. The airflows are to
be determined by the Static Pressure vs. Airflow curves supplied by the manufacturer.
L.
The hood shall be equipped with front ceiling mounted discharge make up air plenum, which shall be
made of the same material as the hood. The face shall be 10% free area perforated stainless steel
panel to deliver low velocity air to the space and to minimize room turbulence while refreshing the
occupied zone.
M.
The manufacturer’s representative shall prepare a confirming TAB report at start up of all systems. The
written start up and installation report shall be submitted by the manufacturer’s representative to the
TAB contractor for distribution to the Owner and Engineer as needed.
N.
Capacities and Characteristics:
1.
Refer to drawings
2.3
WET-CHEMICAL FIRE-SUPPRESSION SYSTEM
A.
Provide fire suppression system manufactured by Ansul Incorporated, a Tyco International Ltd.
Company.
B.
Description: Engineered distribution piping designed for automatic detection and release or manual
release of fire-suppression agent by hood operator. Fire-suppression system shall be listed and labeled
for complying with NFPA 17A, "Wet Chemical Extinguishing Systems," by a qualified testing agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
Steel pipe, NPS 2 and smaller: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type S, Grade A, Schedule 40, plain ends.
2.
Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Classes 150 and 300.
3.
Piping, fusible links and release mechanism, tank containing the suppression agent, and controls
shall be factory installed. Controls shall be in a stainless steel cabinet mounted on hood or wall.
Furnish manual pull station for wall mounting. Exposed piping shall be covered with chromeplated aluminum tubing or be stainless steel. Exposed fittings shall be chrome plated.
4.
Liquid Extinguishing Agent: noncorrosive, low-PH liquid.
5.
Furnish electric-operated gas shutoff valve; refer to section 23 1123 “Facility Natural Gas Piping”.
6.
Furnish electric-operated gas shutoff valve with clearly marked open and closed indicator for field
installation.
7.
Fire-suppression system controls shall be integrated with controls for fans, lights and fuel supply
and located in a single cabinet for each group of hoods immediately adjacent.
8.
Wiring shall have color-coded, numbered terminal blocks and grounding bar. Spare terminals for
fire alarm, optional wiring to start fan with fire alarm, red pilot light to indicate fan operation, and
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
23 3813 - 2
Commercial-Kitchen Hoods
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
control switches shall all be factory wired in control cabinet with relays or starters. Include spare
terminals for fire alarm, and wiring to start fan with fire alarm.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Complete field assembly of hoods where required.
1.
Make closed butt and contact joints that do not require filler.
2.
Grind field welds on stainless-steel equipment smooth, and polish to match adjacent finish.
B.
Install hoods and associated services with clearances and access for maintaining, cleaning, and
servicing hoods, filters/baffles, grease extractor, and fire-suppression systems according to
manufacturer's written instructions and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
C.
Review hood installation instructions and shop drawings for any conflicts with existing conditions and
coordinate any issues with hood manufacturer prior to work.
D.
Make cutouts in hoods where required to run service lines and to make final connections, and seal
openings according to UL 1978.
E.
Install trim strips and similar items requiring fasteners in a bed of sealant. Fasten with stainless steel
fasteners at 48” O.C. maximum.
F.
Install sealant in joints between equipment and abutting surfaces with continuous joint backing, unless
otherwise indicated. Provide airtight, watertight, vermin-proof, sanitary joints.
G.
Securely anchor and attach items and accessories to walls, floors, or bases with stainless-steel
fasteners, unless otherwise indicated.
H.
Install hoods to operate free from vibration.
I.
Install lamps, with maximum recommended wattage, in equipment with integral lighting.
J.
Set initial temperatures, and calibrate sensors.
K.
Set field-adjustable switches.
3.2
CONNECTIONS
A.
Install piping with clearance to allow service and maintenance.
B.
Connect ducts according to requirements in Section 23 3100 "HVAC Ducts and Casings Accessories."
Install flexible connectors on makeup air-supply duct. Weld exhaust-duct connections with continuous
liquid tight joint.
C.
Install fire-suppression piping for remote-mounted suppression systems according to NFPA 17A, “Wet
Chemical Extinguishing Systems”.
D.
University’s Controls Contractor (ABS, Inc.) to provide tie-in of hood relays & detectors to BAS under
separate contract, and Alarm Contractor (Simplex) to tie in to alarm system as required.
END OF SECTION
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
23 3813 - 3
Commercial-Kitchen Hoods
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY FOR PRINTING
SECTION 23 7300
BELT DRIVE BLOWER COIL UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A.
1.2
Submittals:
AIR HANDLING UNIT SUBMITTAL DATA
A.
The information for each item listed below must be furnished as part of the shop drawing submittals.
Additional data may be submitted on separate sheets. Provide data for the air-handling units noted on
the Drawings.
B.
General Data:
1.
Air Handling Unit Manufacturer
2.
Maximum Exterior Dimensions (Assembled)
a.
Length (feet), Width (feet) , Height (feet)
b.
Attach general arrangement drawing.
3.
Operating weight (pounds)
C.
Filters:
1.
Manufacturer
2.
Type
3.
Efficiency (percent)
4.
Quantity
5.
Clean and Dirty Pressure Drop
6.
(Attach manufacturer's literature.)
D.
Fan:
1.
Fan Sound Power at AHU (at design CFM)
Inlet (dB)
Outlet (dB)
1st Octave
2nd Octave
3rd Octave
4th Octave
5th Octave
6th Octave
7th Octave
8th Octave
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Fan BHP (at design CFM)
a.
(with clean filters)
Fan BHP (at design CFM)
a.
(with fully loaded filters)
Motor Horsepower
Motor Efficiency (at design CFM)
Motor Efficiency (at 50 percent of design)
Motor Manufacturer and Model Number
Bearing Manufacturer and Model Number
Attach Manufacturer's Literature on:
a.
Fan
b.
Fan Curve at full RPM (design CFM)
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
23 7300 - 1
Belt Drive Blower Coil Units
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
c.
d.
e.
f.
Fan Curve at minimum recommended RPM
Vibration Isolation
CFM vs. Total Unit kW Curve with Clean Filters for Fan
CFM vs. Total Unit kW Curve with Fully Loaded Filters for Fan
E.
Cooling Coil:
1.
Manufacturer
2.
Air Flow (CFM)
3.
Face Velocity
4.
Air Entering Temperature (degrees F)
a.
Dry Bulb, Wet Bulb
5.
Air Leaving Temperature (degrees F)
a.
Dry Bulb, Wet Bulb
6.
Fins per Inch
7.
Rows
8.
Minimum Coil Capacity Sensible/Total (Btuh)
9.
Rated Coil Capacity (Btuh)
10.
Entering Water (gpm)
11.
Entering Water Temperature (degrees F)
12.
Leaving Water Temperature (degrees F)
13.
Water Side Pressure Drop (Feet w.g.)
14.
Air Side Pressure Drop (wet) (Inches w.g.)
15.
Water Velocity (ft/min)
16.
Number of Sections
17.
Tube Diameter (Inches)
18.
Tube Material
19.
Fin Height
20.
Fin Material
21.
Tube Wall Thickness
22.
Coil Section Dimensions (Inches)
23.
Coil Weight
24.
Frame Material
25.
Finish
F.
Heating Coil:
1.
Manufacturer
2.
Heating Capacity
3.
# Stages
4.
Voltage
5.
Options
G.
Units shall fit into the space available with adequate clearances meeting manufacturer’s requirements
for service and as determined by the Engineer. Submitted units, which do not meet these criteria, shall
be rejected. The Contractor shall not assume that all of the manufacturers listed as acceptable
manufacturers will provide a unit that will fit in the space allocated for the unit(s).
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
A.
The contractor and the manufacturer shall be responsible for ensuring that the unit will not exceed the
allocated space shown on the drawings, including required clearances for service and future overhaul or
removal of unit components. All structural, piping, wiring, and ductwork alterations of units, which are
dimensionally different than those specified, shall be the responsibility of the contractor at no additional
cost.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
23 7300 - 2
Belt Drive Blower Coil Units
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
B.
All units shall be capable of meeting or exceeding the scheduled capacities for cooling, heating and air
delivery. All units shall be of ‘draw thru’ design, with coil, fan, motor/drive and drain pan completely
contained within the unit cabinet, except that electric heat is to be in the ‘blow thru’ configuration. All unit
coils shall meet or exceed the scheduled cooling and heating capacity, selected and rated in
accordance with ARI 410.
C.
Units shall be fully assembled by the manufacturer in the factory in accordance with the arrangement
shown on the drawings.
D.
Provide all necessary and required tags and decals to aid in the service or indicate caution areas.
2.2
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
ARI Compliance: ARI 260 - Sound Rating of Ducted Air Moving and Conditioning Equipment, ARI 430 Standard for Central-Station Air Handling Units, and ARI 435 Application for Central-Station Air
Handling Units.
B.
Comply with ASHRAE 15.
1.
Comply with applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment" and
Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."
C.
ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 Compliance:
1.
Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and AirConditioning."
D.
ASHRAE 90.1-2010 economiser requirement is excepted per 90.1 section 6.1.1.3.5.b.NFPA
Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B.
E.
Comply with NFPA 70, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended location and application.
F.
SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible.
G.
Warranties: Provide standard manufacturer's written warranty, without monetary limitation, signed by
manufacturer agreeing to promptly repair or replace products that fail in materials or workmanship for
the period of five years.
2.3
PACKAGED, CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
2.4
JCI ENVIRO-TEC
IEC
Trane.
Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01.
CASING
A.
Casing: Formed and reinforced single-wall insulated panels of 18 ga. Min. galv steel, fabricated to for
access to internal parts and components.
1.
Exterior Casing: Galvanized steel with factory-painted finish.
B.
Insulation:
1.
Provide factory insulated casing with 1” thick, 1.5# density skrim reinforced foil faced insulation
with a maximum thermal conductivity of 0.24.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
23 7300 - 3
Belt Drive Blower Coil Units
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
2.
Insulation and adhesive shall meet requirements of NFPA 90A. Insulation shall meet the erosion
requirements of UL181.
C.
Access/Inspection Doors:
1.
All access panels shall be fully insulated and attached with standard fasteners on at least two
opposite sides. No coil or drain or electrical connections shall pass through any access panel.
D.
Condensate Drain Pans:
1.
Provide drain pans constructed of Type 304 stainless steel with welded corners.
2.
Any condensation from the drain pan or drain connection shall be corrected by unit manufacturer
to the satisfaction of the Owner, and at no expense to the Owner.
3.
Drain pan shall have welded corners, and stainless steel threaded pipe drain connection to match
the drain pan and prevent dielectric corrosion.
E.
Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in
ASHRAE 62.1.
2.5
FAN SECTION
A.
Fans:
1.
Provide fan sections with Forward-curved centrifugal blower.
2.
Fan and unit performance shall be rated and certified in accordance with ARI 430, AMCA300 and
ARI 260 as specified elsewhere herein.
3.
Fan wheels shall be constructed aluminum or steel, keyed to the fan shaft, and shall be statically
and dynamically balanced at the factory as a complete fan assembly regardless of duty. Dynamic
fan balancing shall be conducted from 16Hz to 105Hz to identify and eliminate critical speeds to
ensure stable operation through the entire operating range of the fan and drive assembly.
4.
Forward factory balancing test report upon request of Engineer.
B.
Fan shaft shall rotate in permanently lubricated ball bearings with a minimum design lfe (L50) of
100,000 hours.Motors and Drives:
1.
Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated by authorities having jurisdiction.
Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C and at altitude of 3300 feet above sea level.
2.
Fan motor shall be premium efficiency and compatible for inverter duty.
3.
Fan motors shall have permanently sealed non-greasable bearings.
4.
All fan drive assemblies shall include an adjustable pitch motor pulley, a fixed pitch blower pulley
and a standard cross section “v-belt”. All fan drives shall be selected at a minimum service factor
of 1.2.
5.
All motor wiring is to be terminated in a junction box, external to the unit casing.
2.6
COIL SECTION
A.
Coil Casing: Construct coil section so coils can be removed without affecting structural integrity of
casing. Completely enclose connections, coil headers, and return bends.
B.
Chilled Water Coils:
1.
Provide chilled water coils as scheduled on the Drawings. Provide right or left hand horizontal coil
connections entry as scheduled or shown on the Drawings.
2.
Coils are to be rated in accordance with ARI certified data to meet or exceed the required
capacities in accordance with listed parameters, water flow, temperatures and airflow rates as
scheduled on the Drawings.
3.
Maximum coil water and air pressure losses are as scheduled on the drawings. and a maximum
velocity in tubes of 6 feet per second. The coil finned area shall be properly sized based on the
maximum allowable coil face velocity shown on the Drawings.
4.
Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins.
5.
Provide either a 1/2-inch or 5/8-inch outside diameter copper tube coils based on tube water
velocity being not less than 4 and no greater than 6 feet per second.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
23 7300 - 4
Belt Drive Blower Coil Units
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
6.
7.
C.
2.7
Coil shall be rated for a maximum factory test pressure of 300 psig and a maximum working
pressure of 200 psig.
Include manual air vent.
Electric-Resistance Heating Coil: Factory installed and wired open-resistance-wire supported and
insulated by ceramic bushings in galvanized casing with overtemperature and overcurrent protection,
listed for zero clearance meeting all N.E.C. requirements and having a non-adjustable airflow switch.
FILTER SECTIONS
A.
General:
1.
Minimum arrestance according to ASHRAE 52.1 and a minimum efficiency reporting value
(MERV) according to ASHRAE 52.2.
2.
Air shall not be allowed to bypass around filters. Provision shall be made to positively lock filters
in place to prevent shifting.
3.
The unit manufacturer shall provide one (2) sets of scheduled filters for each unit as shown on
the Drawings.
4.
.
2.8
MIXING BOXES AND DAMPERS
1.
Mixing box shall consist of casing and outdoor air and return air dampers in opposed blade
arrangement per drawings.
2.9
ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS
A.
2.10
Wiring and equipment specifications shall conform to Division 26, Electrical.
CONTROLS
A.
DDC Controls to be provided by ABS, the Owner’s outside controls contractor, under separate contract.
B.
ABS is responsible for supplying the sensors, actuators, etc. as well as any controls wiring and
programming.
C.
The Mechanical Contractor is responsible for installing all sensors, actuators, etc. The Electrical
Contractor shall provide line-voltage power as required for controls equipment.
1.
Smoke Detectors: Stop fan and send alarm to BAS if smoke is detected...
2.11
Condensate overflow detector: Stop fan & send alarm to BAS if high condensate level is detected.
2.11
CAPACITIES AND CHARACTERISTICS
A.
Refer to equipment schedules located on the construction drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Installation shall meet or exceed all applicable federal, state and local requirements, referenced
standards and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Assemble unit components following manufacturer's instructions for handling, testing and operation.
C.
Connect to supply and return hydronic piping with shutoff valve and union or flange at each connection,
as detailed in drawings.
D.
Attach air ducts to termination in unit casing.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
23 7300 - 5
Belt Drive Blower Coil Units
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
E.
Connect units to electrical power and control wiring systems and to ground.
F.
Maintain all manufacturer’s and code required clearances.
G.
Condensate drain piping shall be pitched at ¼ inch per foot from the air handling unit.
H.
Install units on equipment supports as specified in Specification Section 230548, Vibration Isolation.
I.
Repair damaged galvanized areas with paint. Repair painted units by touch up of all scratches with
finish paint material. Vacuum the interior of units clean prior to operation.
J.
Contractor shall furnish and maintain and replace clean filters in each unit as listed in the equipment
schedule on the Drawings during start-up and construction. The Contractor shall install a set of new filter
products provided by the air handling unit manufacturer for each unit after it has been tested,
commissioned and receives final acceptance by the Owner.
3.2
STARTUP SERVICES
A.
Do not operate units for any purpose, temporary or permanent, until ductwork is clean, filters are in
place, bearings have been lubricated, and fan has been test run under Owner representatives’
observation.
B.
The Mechanical Contractor should start up, and the TAB Contractor test and certify the final installation
Items to be verified include fan performance, noise and vibration testing, overall inspection of the
installation, airflow and temperatures, etc.
END OF SECTION
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
23 7300 - 6
Belt Drive Blower Coil Units
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
SECTION 26 0010
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
The Division 1 General Conditions applying to the General Contractor also apply to this Subcontractor
as modified by Division 26 requirements.
ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS
A.
The Electrical Contractor shall be a company or firm engaged in the business of electrical contracting on
a full-time basis and has had a minimum of five (5) years experience in the business of electrical
contracting. The firm shall have completed a minimum of three (3) projects similar in size and scope to
this project.
B.
The Electrical Contracting firm shall be capable of providing a performance bond equal to the amount of
100% of the electrical contract sum.
C.
The Electrical Contractor shall have a current Oklahoma State License.
D.
Proof of the Contractor qualifications shall be submitted to the Owner upon request.
1.3
ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITY
A.
1.4
The Electrical Contractor shall be the entity responsible for the proper execution of this project in
accordance with the drawings and following specifications. If a materials supplier and/or manufacturer's
representative assists in preparation of bids and/or submittals for the project, it is the Electrical
Contractor's responsibility to determine that the materials being submitted meet the quality and
performance criteria of the materials specified in these specifications.
DESCRIPTION OF THE WORK
A.
The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, appliances, equipment, tools, transportation,
superintendence and service required to construct and install complete and operative in accordance
with the true intent of the drawings and specifications, the electrical system as specified herein and as
shown on the drawings.
B.
The Contractor shall bid all labor and materials to make equipment that is specified and/or shown
complete and functioning, whether all details are specifically mentioned or not. In the case of conflicts,
these Specifications shall have precedence over the plans.
1.5
DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A.
General:
1.
The Division 26 specifications and “E-sheet” drawings have been made to form the basis for the
installation of the electrical work. The drawings and specifications shall be considered as
mutually explanatory, and any work required by one, but not by the other, will be performed as
though required by both.
2.
The work shall be accomplished as called for in the specifications and as shown on the drawings.
B.
Basic documents describing the electrical work:
1.
Drawings: Refer to the ("E") series drawings for the graphic representations, schedules and
notations showing electrical work.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20140325 - 0
26 0010 - 1
Basic Electrical Requirements
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
2.
3.
4.
Specifications: Refer to Division 26 for the primary technical specifications of electrical work.
Base Bid Proposal: For the complete description refer to Division 1 and to the Bid Form.
Alternate Bid Proposals: Refer to Division 1 and to the Bid Form for the complete description.
C.
Other documents affecting the electrical work:
1.
The Architectural, Structural, Mechanical, Plumbing, Fire Sprinkler System, Civil, and other
special system drawings and specifications for this project may also contain important information
that must be taken into consideration while preparing bids for and installing the electrical work. It
is the responsibility of this Contractor to examine all available drawings and to determine their
effect on the electrical work.
2.
Do not scale the electrical drawings for locations of equipment and devices. Refer to the
Architectural, Structural, and shop drawings for actual dimensions.
D.
Accuracy of drawings and specifications:
1.
These drawings and specifications are presumed to be accurate, but extreme accuracy is not
guaranteed. Any errors or ambiguities in the drawings and/or specifications that are discovered
by the Contractor during the bidding phase shall be reported to the Architect/Engineer. The
Architect/Engineer will review and issue an addendum.
2.
Any errors or ambiguities in the drawings and specifications that are discovered by the Contractor
after the bidding phase shall be reported to the Architect/Engineer before the work is started.
Omission of particular reference to any item necessary for complete installation and proper
operation thereof shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility of furnishing the same at no
extra cost.
1.6
INTERPRETATION OF DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A.
If the Contractor has any questions concerning the true intent and/or meaning of these drawings and
specifications, he shall request a clarification in writing from the Architect/Engineer before submitting his
bid (See Division 1).
B.
In case of a dispute concerning the true intent and/or meaning of these drawings and specifications, the
Architect/Engineer shall interpret the same, and his interpretation shall be accepted by the Contractor
as final.
1.7
EXAMINATION OF THE SITE AND EXISTING FACILITIES
A.
All Contractors submitting proposals for this work shall, before submittal of proposals, examine the site
and thoroughly familiarize themselves with the existing conditions. All bid proposals shall take into
consideration all such conditions that may affect the work under this contract and the bidders shall
satisfy themselves as to the existing building conditions, the actual configurations, existing equipment,
etc. No information given on the drawings or in the specifications shall relieve the Contractor of this
responsibility.
B.
Failure of the Contractor to examine the site and/or existing facilities will not be cause for extras by
reason of unforeseen conditions.
1.8
PERMITS, FEES, LICENSES, AND TAXES
A.
1.9
All necessary licenses or permits for the carrying out of this work shall be secured and paid for by this
Contractor. The Contractor shall be responsible for any damages sustained due to his failure to secure
such licenses or permits. This Contractor shall pay all taxes applicable to his work.
COOPERATION
A.
This Contractor shall employ a full time experienced and competent electrical superintendent to
supervise the installation of the electrical system, represent him on the project and to coordinate the
electrical work with the other trades.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20140325 - 0
26 0010 - 2
Basic Electrical Requirements
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
B.
This Contractor shall cooperate fully with all other Contractors on this project. If any part of this
Contractor's work depends for proper execution or results upon the work of any other Contractor, this
Contractor shall inspect and promptly report to the Architect/Engineer any defects in such work that
render it unsuitable for such execution and results. His failure to so inspect and report shall constitute
an acceptance of the other Contractor's work as fit and proper for the reception of this work.
C.
This Contractor shall coordinate work with all other Contractors or Subcontractors whose work will be in
contact with the work under this heading, so that proper cooperation between the different trades shall
result there from.
D.
To insure against delaying any other Contractor, this Contractor shall install immediately any of his work
necessary at the time for continuous construction operations, and shall be held responsible for any
delays caused due to his negligence. This Contractor shall at all times keep in close contact with the
project, so that all work will proceed without delay.
1.10
A.
1.11
A.
1.12
A.
ELECTRICAL DEFINITIONS
The following definitions supplement definitions of the Contract, General Conditions, Supplementary
Conditions and other General Contract Documents, and apply generally to the work.
1.
General Requirements: Provisions of Division 1 sections of these specifications.
2.
Indicated: Shown on drawings by notes, graphics or schedules, or written into other portions of
contract documents. Terms such as "shown", "noted", "scheduled" and "specified" have same
meaning as "indicated", and are used to assist the reader in locating particular information.
3.
Directed, Requested, Approved, Accepted, etc.: These terms imply "by the Architect/Engineer",
unless otherwise indicated.
4.
Approved by Architect/Engineer: In no case releases Contractor from responsibility to fulfill
requirements of contract documents.
5.
Project Site: Space available to Contractor at location of project, either exclusively or to be
shared with separate Contractors, for performance of the work.
6.
Furnish: Supply and deliver to project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation,
and similar subsequent requirements.
7.
Install: Operations at project site, including unloading, unpacking, assembly, erection, placing,
anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar
requirements.
8.
Provide: Furnish and install, complete and ready for intended use.
9.
Installer: Entity (firm or person) engaged to install work, by Contractor, Subcontractor or Sub
subcontractor. Installers are required to be skilled experts in work they are engaged to install.
GUARANTEE
The Contractor shall guarantee the apparatus as installed by him to develop the performance as
specified, and shall guarantee to keep the entire system as installed by him or his Subcontractors in
repair and perfect working order for one (1) year after day of acceptance of same, and shall furnish free
of cost to the Owner all material, labor and other expenses necessary to comply with the above
guarantee, said guarantee being based upon defective material, workmanship, and equipment
performance.
DAMAGE
Damage to the Owner's property or other Contractor's work caused by this Contractor, or damage due
to failure of his equipment or materials, shall be repaired or replaced at this Contractor's expense.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20140325 - 0
26 0010 - 3
Basic Electrical Requirements
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
1.13
SUBSTITUTIONS OF SPECIFIED MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A.
Where an item of equipment is specified on the plans or in the specifications with no specific
manufacturer named, it shall be assumed that products of any manufacturer meeting the requirements
of the specification will be acceptable.
B.
Where one or more manufacturers are listed for a particular equipment item, the Contractor shall furnish
the equipment as manufactured by one of the manufacturers listed. If the Contractor desires to
substitute a manufacturer not listed, he must submit his request to the Architect/Engineer in
writing at least ten (10) days before bids on the project are received. If the proposed substitute
equipment is determined to be acceptable, the Architect/Engineer will list the approved substitute
equipment in an addendum to the project plans/specifications and the Contractor shall base his bid on
the equipment items listed. Only lighting fixtures are exempted from this requirement (1.13 B).
C.
The Architect/Engineer WILL NOT give verbal approval of any substitute materials or consider
requests for substitute materials if received less than ten (10) days before bids are received.
D.
If required by the Architect/Engineer, the Contractor shall provide complete samples of substitute
equipment to be delivered to the Architect/Engineer for examination. Handling, storage, shipping and
delivery to and from the Architect/Engineer of any sample required shall be at the cost of the Contractor.
E.
After the submittals are approved, the Architect/Engineer will consider substitute equipment only if
unusual circumstances warrant further consideration. Requests for consideration of substitutes shall be
made in writing and state all applicable reasons and/or circumstances. The Contractor's presence will
be required in any meetings or discussions regarding the submittals.
1.14
ELECTRICAL SUBMITTALS
A.
General:
1.
Submittals shall be in accordance with Division 1 requirements except as modified herein. Refer
to Section 01 3000 for additional information regarding submittals.
2.
Each item of electrical equipment shall be submitted for approval.
3.
The Electrical Contractor is responsible for the content, preparation and timely delivery of the
electrical submittal. If a second party prepares the submittal for the Contractor, it is the Electrical
Contractor's responsibility to assure that the submittal is complete and in the proper format and
content as set forth in this specification.
4.
Contractor shall submit dimensioned shop drawings where required. Shop drawings shall show
relationship of electrical equipment with the building structure and equipment of other trades.
a.
Shop drawings will be submitted for any items or equipment which is fabricated specifically
for this project. All such shop drawings shall be included with the submittal data.
Fabrication or shipment of such equipment shall not be started until all shop drawings have
been approved and released by the Owner’s representative.
b.
Shop drawings shall be provided for modifications to the fire alarm system.
B.
Certification Letter:
1.
The electrical submittal shall be accompanied by a letter of certification signed by the Electrical
Contractor or his authorized representative stating that:
a.
He has thoroughly reviewed the project drawings and specifications and has made himself
aware of all of the requirements contained therein.
b.
He has thoroughly reviewed the electrical submittal, certifies that it is complete, that he is
familiar with the equipment being submitted, and certifies that all substituted products are
equal in every way to those specified.
c.
He is submitting to the Architect/Engineer a list of any deviations in quality or performance
of materials being submitted from the quality or performance of materials specified on
drawings or in the specifications.
2.
Any submittal without this letter is considered to be incomplete and will not be reviewed until the
letter is received.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20140325 - 0
26 0010 - 4
Basic Electrical Requirements
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
C.
Submittal Schedule:
1.
Refer to Section 01 3000 for information on submittal schedule.
D.
Submittal Format:
1.
The Contractor shall provide the submittal in electronic/PDF format to the Owner’s representative
for approval.
2.
Submittal shall be provided with an index and divided by specification section. Materials, devices,
and equipment shall be submitted under their associated specification section. Submittal data
shall be arranged in the same order as the specifications.
3.
Provide a separate sheet similar to the index, recording deviations from Contract Document
requirements, including minor variations and limitations. Highlight these deviations so it is
apparent to the reviewer. Refer to Paragraph 1.15.B
4.
Include Contractor’s certification that information and equipment complies with Contract
Document requirements.
5.
Submittal shall be provided with section divider sheets corresponding to the indexed items.
6.
Partial submittals will not be accepted.
7.
The submittal shall consist of a list of the materials, devices, and equipment to be furnished
together with descriptive literature, equipment name, capacities, manufacturer’s model and size,
performance data as the conditions specify, approximate delivery date, and any other pertinent
facts concerning the various items. The submittal shall consist of all the items in the
specifications, and shall include the following for each item or group of similar items:
a.
Item name and designation number shown on plans; manufacturer’s name, model and size
number; capacity and performance data corresponding to that set forth in the specifications
and shown in the schedule on the plans.
b.
Printed descriptive literature and cuts showing general arrangement and design of the
equipment submitted. Complete catalogs are neither desired nor acceptable as submittals.
Include only portions of catalogs that pertain to the equipment submitted with specific
items/models to be provided for the project clearly indicated.
NOTE: PARTIAL OR INCOMPLETE SUBMITTALS AND SUBMITTALS NOT CONFORMING TO THE
REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SPECIFICATION WILL NOT BE ACCEPTED, AND WILL BE RETURNED
TO THE CONTRACTOR FOR COMPLETION AND/OR CORRECTION.
E.
1.15
Submittal Review:
1.
The Architect/Engineer will review the submittal for conformance with the requirements of the
specification and issue a report thereon. Items rejected, incomplete, or request for additional
information will be contained in the report and may require resubmittal.
2.
The Architect/Engineer will review and prepare a report with recommendations on the submittal
and one (1) resubmittal. If the resubmittal is incomplete or in any other way unsatisfactory or
unacceptable, the review of any further required resubmittals will be at the Contractors expense,
otherwise the material must be furnished as specified.
APPROVAL OF MATERIALS
A.
The Architect/Engineer will not, under any circumstances, give verbal approval for any item. The
Contractor must obtain the Architect/Engineer's written approval of each item submitted.
B.
The Architect/Engineer will not be required to prove that an item proposed for substitution is or is not of
equal quality to the specified item. It is mandatory that the Contractor submit to the Architect/Engineer,
in writing, all evidence required to support his contention that the item proposed for substitution is equal
to the item indicated by the plans and/or specifications. Any deviations from the specified products shall
be called to the attention of the Architect/Engineer. Refer to Paragraph 1.14 D.1.c.
C.
The Architect/Engineer's approval of such submittals shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility
for proper performance of all equipment.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20140325 - 0
26 0010 - 5
Basic Electrical Requirements
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
D.
The Architect/Engineer's approval of submitted equipment shall not relieve the Contractor of the
responsibility for providing materials and equipment that have the features, function, and performance of
the specified items, unless he has in writing, directed the attention of the Architect/Engineer to such
deviations at the time the materials are submitted for approval.
E.
The Architect/Engineer's decision on the approval or rejection of any item shall be accepted by the
Contractor as final.
F.
Approved submittals and shop drawings will become a part of the construction documents for this
project.
1.16
A.
1.17
A.
1.18
A.
1.19
MATERIALS INSTALLED ON PROJECT
The Contractor shall verify that materials installed on the project have been approved by the
Architect/Engineer.
AS CONSTRUCTED DRAWINGS AND OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE (O&M) MANUAL
At the completion of the project, and before final payment is made, this Contractor shall submit the
following to the Architect/Engineer for transmittal to the Owner:
1.
As-Constructed Drawings: The Contractor shall maintain a set of electrical drawings during
construction on which any and all changes made in the installation of the electric system are
recorded. These recorded changes shall include any changes in routing of conduits, relocated
electrical equipment, etc. and any other changes made during the progress of the work. Locate all
underground conduits with dimensions. Show the actual panel board circuit numbers and load
description of each circuit. At the completion of the project, neatly transfer all of the changes in
colored pencil or pen, in the same nomenclature as the original drawings, to one (1) clean,
complete set of electrical working drawings.
2.
Operating and Maintenance Manual (O & M Manual): One (1) loose-leaf 3 ring binder with tabs or
in electronic pdf form, containing a compilation of catalog data of each manufactured item of
equipment used in the electrical work. This catalog may be similar to the electrical submittal, but
shall include all descriptive data and printed installation, operating, instructions, guarantees,
warranties, maintenance agreements, maintenance proposals and maintenance instructions for
each item of equipment. A complete type written index shall be provided listing each product
alphabetically by name together with the manufacturer, catalog number, and name, address, and
telephone number of the area sales representative.
SPARE MATERIALS AND KEYS
At the completion of the project, and before final payment is made, this Contractor shall submit the
following to the Architect/Engineer for transmittal to the Owner:
1.
Keys: Two keys of each type of key on the job.
2.
Spare Materials: Deliver spare fuses, lamps, and other spare equipment specified in various
sections of this specification and store as directed.
PROJECT CLOSEOUT OR SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION SITE VISIT
A.
The Architect/Engineer will conduct a review of the electrical installation when the Contractor gives
notification that all the materials have been furnished and all work has been performed, and all the
construction provided for by the contract has been completed in accordance with the contract terms.
B.
In order to expedite the review of the electrical system installation, the Contractor shall have the
following available at the job site on the agreed upon day(s) and time of the Architect/Engineer site visit.
1.
The Electrical Superintendent to represent the Contractor and to be available to answer any
questions that may arise regarding the installation of the electrical system.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20140325 - 0
26 0010 - 6
Basic Electrical Requirements
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C.
Six (6) copies of a list of any items that are not complete with supporting documentation for the
reasons the items are incomplete.
As constructed drawings per Section 26 0010, 1.21.
Equipment catalog with operation and maintenance manuals, per Section 26 0010, 1.21.
Spare parts and equipment, per 26 0010, 1.22.
Warranties, guarantees, and certification letters.
Electrical system performance test reports and certifications.
If it is necessary for the Architect/Engineer to make a return trip to the jobsite for another review due to
the Contractor's failure to adequately complete his portion of the work, the cost of the
Architect/Engineer's time and expenses of the return to the jobsite for the review will be at the
Contractor's expense and will be withheld from the Contractor's final payment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not applicable)
END OF SECTION
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20140325 - 0
26 0010 - 7
Basic Electrical Requirements
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY FOR PRINTING
SECTION 26 0040
ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
The Division 1 General Conditions applying to the General Contractor also apply to this Subcontractor
as modified by Division 26 requirements.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
The extent of demolition work is indicated on the drawings and by the requirements of this section. A
visit to the site will be required to properly bid the demolition work.
B.
Provide all demolition work required for the removal and/or relocation of electrical equipment and
associated conductors, conduit, boxes, etc. to provide a complete and operable system upon
completion of the project.
C.
Work shall at all times be in compliance with local and national safety codes. Great care shall be taken
to avoid leaving hazardous conditions unattended.
D.
Schedule any required power outages in writing a minimum of 10 days in advance with the Owner.
E.
Division 26 work includes removal or relocation of electrical devices which may include panels,
transformers, lighting, fire alarm devices, exit signs, conduit, wiring, etc., in the areas to be remodeled
as required and as indicated on the drawings. Demolition plans were prepared from as-built drawings
and site surveys. Field modifications and/or additions have been made since the preparation of the asbuilt drawings, and all demolition items may not be shown or exist as exactly indicated, and absolute
accuracy cannot be guaranteed. Contractor shall field verify actual conditions for himself during bidding
and shall anticipate and include in his bid contingencies for any necessary work that may appear after
demolition work has begun.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (not used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
DEMOLITION
A.
Where devices or equipment are indicated or required to be removed, the associated boxes, conduit,
and conductors shall be removed back to their source.
B.
Where devices or equipment are indicated or required to be relocated, the associated boxes, conduit,
and conductors shall be removed back to a junction box and new products shall be used to extend the
service to the new location.
C.
Where devices or equipment are served from under a concrete floor, the conduit shall be cut off below
finish floor level, capped and grouted flush with finished floor.
D.
Where underfloor duct openings are deactivated the pedestal and associated fittings shall be removed
and returned to the owner. Install a mud cap in the underfloor duct insert and grout flush with finished
floor.
E.
Where conduits are run above inaccessible ceilings or in walls which are to remain undisturbed,
conductors shall be removed and the conduits capped and abandoned in place.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
26 0040 - 1
Electrical Demolition
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
F.
Where the demolition work renders equipment downstream inoperable, service shall be extended to the
downstream devices or equipment so that they are left in operating condition.
G.
Where devices or equipment are served with conduits penetrating a basement wall, the conduits shall
be cut off outside the basement wall and capped. The basement wall penetration shall be sealed and
made watertight.
END OF SECTION
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
26 0040 - 2
Electrical Demolition
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
SECTION 26 0040
ELECTRICAL TEMPORARY FACILITIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
The Division 1 General Conditions applying to the General Contractor also apply to this Subcontractor
as modified by Division 26 requirements.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
The types of temporary facilities and uses requiring electrical work may include (but are not necessarily
limited to) the following:
1.
Temporary power service/source.
2.
Temporary power distribution.
3.
Temporary lighting.
4.
Temporary use of permanent electrical facilities.
B.
Refer to Division 1 for basic requirements and administrative requirements relating to electrical work of
temporary facilities.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Governing Regulations, Permits: Comply with governing regulations for the electrical work of temporary
facilities; including but not necessarily limited to code compliance's, permits, inspections, and health and
safety compliance's.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Provide either new or used materials and equipment for electrical temporary facilities which are suitable
for intended uses and will ensure safe, adequate performance of the facilities in accordance with
governing regulations and codes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION AND OPERATION
A.
General: Connect and terminate electrical temporary facilities at locations as determined by the
General Contractor to fulfill project requirements. Unless specifically indicated in Division 1, the General
Contractor will pay for electric utility usage during the period of construction. Install meters as required
for the proper allocation of charges for temporary power use.
B.
Electrical Work:
1.
Temporary power service to the project construction area, including stand-alone power
generating units where and when the connected power service from an existing utility source is
not feasible.
2.
Temporary power distribution (temporary wiring) for the purpose of supplying convenience
outlets, heating, temporary lighting, and similar facilities for construction, general services,
security and protection. Work includes outlets with ground fault circuit interrupter protection and
similar devices and facilities, but does not include extension cords and actual temporary
mechanical equipment connections.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
26 0049 - 1
Electrical Temporary Facilities
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
3.
4.
3.2
Temporary lighting for construction areas; for temporary offices, shops, storage sheds and similar
temporary space enclosures; for exterior construction areas, parking roadways and walkways;
and for special lighting for security, protection and project identification; but excluding plug-in type
task lighting (defined as "tools"), needed to supplement general temporary lighting for specific
construction activities.
A ground fault protective system per the N.E.C. shall be installed and maintained and shall be
subject to the approval of the authority having jurisdiction.
REMOVAL AND RESTORATION
A.
When no longer needed for construction work, remove electrical temporary facilities. Repair and restore
or replace work damaged by installation and operation of electrical temporary facilities. Electrical
equipment and devices installed as temporary facilities shall, upon removal, remain the property of the
Installer. All debris and unused materials shall be removed from the site at the Contractors expense.
B.
Restore any permanent equipment used for temporary facilities to original condition including lamps that
have been in operation for one half or more of their rated life. All equipment shall be cleaned and
touched up with manufacturer's matching paint. Light fixtures shall be carefully cleaned so as to not
scratch or dull specular surfaces.
END OF SECTION
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
26 0049 - 2
Electrical Temporary Facilities
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
SECTION 26 0050
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
The Division 1 General Conditions applying to the General Contractor also apply to this Subcontractor
as modified by Division 26 requirements.
ELECTRICAL STANDARDS, REGULATIONS, AND CODES
A.
All ordinances, laws, and codes of the City, County, State, and National governments, and the local
utility company standards shall be observed, and no work shall be acceptable that does not comply.
The Contractor shall be held responsible and shall make any of the work installed by him conform to
these regulations and codes with no additional expense to the Owner.
B.
Applicable provisions of the following statutes, laws, codes, and standards are hereby imposed on a
general basis for the electrical work in addition to specific application specified by individual work
sections of these specifications:
1.
National Electrical Code (NFPA 70)
2.
Life Safety Code (NFPA 101)
3.
National Electrical Safety Code, (ANSI C2.)
4.
National Building Code
5.
Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities (CABO/ANSI A117.1)
6.
Statutes and regulations of the State of Oklahoma
7.
University of Oklahoma standards
1.3
WORKMANSHIP
A.
The work to be performed as a part of this contract shall be performed by experienced craftsmen in a
neat, careful, and workman-like manner, and in full compliance with all requirements of the latest
revision of the National Electrical Code (NEC) and The National Electrical Installation Standards (NEIS),
latest issue. The entire installation shall conform to the best standard practices of the electrical industry.
B.
Any work found to be defective, not approved in writing, or in any way contrary to the provisions of this
specification, no matter in what state of completion, may be rejected by the Architect/Engineer and must
be brought into compliance immediately upon notification.
1.4
COORDINATION OF ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
A.
Sequence, coordinate and integrate the various elements of electrical work so that the electrical system
will perform as indicated and be in harmony with the other work of the building. The Architect/Engineer
will not supervise the coordination, which is the exclusive responsibility of the Contractor.
B.
Raceways and cables shall not be installed closer than 6 inches from flues and steam or hot water lines.
Give the right-of-way in confined-service spaces to piping which must slope for drainage and to larger
HVAC ductwork and similar services which are less conformable than electrical services. The various
phases of work shall have precedence over each other in the following sequence:
1.
Soil and Waste Piping
2.
Primary Electrical Conduit
3.
Domestic Water Piping
4.
Duct Work
5.
Refrigerant Piping
6.
Gas Piping
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
26 0050 - 1
Basic Materials and Methods
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
7.
8.
C.
1.5
Fire Sprinkler Piping
Electrical Conduit and Wireways
Locations, horsepower, and electrical ratings of motors and other electrical equipment indicated on the
drawings are for guidance only and do not limit the equipment sizes or exact locations. When
electrically operated equipment furnished under other divisions of these specifications materially differs
from the design shown, this Contractor shall make the necessary adjustments to the wiring, disconnect
devices, control devices, and branch circuit protection to accommodate the equipment actually installed.
Coordinate exact locations of connections, sizes, etc. with the contractor providing the equipment.
ELECTRICAL WORK INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS
A.
The branch circuit wiring is indicated on the drawings, and is intended to be generally installed as
shown. Any changes in the circuiting or conduit routing shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer for
approval before any deviations are made.
B.
Any changes to the work under this contract from that shown on the drawings to make the work conform
to the structure, to fit the work of other trades, or alternate methods of installation preferred by the
Contractor shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer for his approval before any deviations are made.
1.6
ELECTRICAL MATERIALS
A.
This Contractor shall protect and be responsible for any damage to his work or material, from the date of
the agreement until the final acceptance is made, and shall make good without cost to the Owner any
damage or loss that may occur during this period.
B.
Contractor shall handle all material as directed, so that they may be inspected by the Architect/Engineer
upon request.
C.
This Contractor shall be responsible for the proper care of all his materials, equipment, etc., delivered at
the site.
D.
Building materials, Contractor's equipment, etc., may be stored on the premises, but the placing of
same shall be subject to the approval of the Project Manager.
E.
When any room in the building is used as a shop, storeroom, etc., the one making use of such room will
be held responsible for any repairs, patching or cleaning arising from such use.
F.
Should any material be found defective, not approved in writing, or in any way contrary to the contract,
this material, no matter in what state of completion may be rejected by the Architect/Engineer and must
be removed from the premises at once.
G.
No waste material or rubbish resulting from this work shall be allowed to accumulate on or about the
premises, but shall be promptly removed at the Contractor's expense.
1.7
PENETRATIONS OF FIRE WALLS AND SMOKE PARTITIONS
A.
1.8
All openings for electrical raceways, sleeves, devices, etc. which penetrate fire walls and/or smoke
partitions shall be sealed with an approved sealing material, which will maintain the fire and/or smoke
rating of the separation.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
A.
This Contractor shall provide the necessary personnel and equipment to demonstrate that the electrical
systems, equipment, and/or other system components are functioning to the performance as specified.
The necessary personnel shall include electricians, technicians, engineers, or vendors’ representatives
as necessary for the system involved. The equipment shall include electrical metering and test
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
26 0050 - 2
Basic Materials and Methods
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
equipment as necessary to demonstrate performance for the particular system or equipment in
question.
B.
All electrical systems and installations shall be tested to show that the equipment is installed and
operates as planned and specified.
C.
Take load readings at all panelboards and change branch circuits as required if unbalance of the load
exists. The ampere readings should not differ more than 20% on ungrounded conductors. Submit load
readings to the Architect/Engineer.
D.
At the completion of the project, and before final payment is made, this Contractor shall submit to the
Architect/Engineer for transmittal to the Owner, two (2) copies of a written record of performance tests
on the electrical systems. Such tests shall show compliance with governing codes. These test reports
shall be signed and certified by this Contractor.
E.
This Contractor shall take all actions necessary to eliminate the source of any objectionable noise or
vibration. Such changes shall be made without cost or inconvenience to the Owner. All air devices,
transformers, relays, starters, lighting units, and other equipment shall not exceed the noise criterion
curve of 35 db SPL when measured on the flat response C scale in any occupied spaces.
1.9
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS TO EQUIPMENT
A.
Mechanical equipment supplied under Divisions 11, 22, 23, Owner furnished equipment, and other
equipment supplied under other Divisions of this specification will require electrical feeders, control
wiring, and connections as indicated on the drawings. Sizes of the feeders and circuit protective
devices have been indicated. Exact locations, details and sizes of connections shall be coordinated
with the supplier of the equipment item and connected as directed by the equipment manufacturer's
instructions or Owner's Representative.
B.
Outlets for electric water coolers (drinking fountains) shall be coordinated with the contractor
responsible for furnishing and installing the coolers. Install the receptacles in accordance with the water
cooler manufacturer recommended locations.
C.
If disconnect switches for equipment are indicated to be mounted directly on the equipment, bring the
conduits and wiring to and mount switch at the location as directed by the equipment manufacturer.
D.
Maintain required working space per NEC 110.26.
1.10
CONTROL WIRING, DEVICES AND CONNECTIONS
A.
Wiring required for control of mechanical equipment has been indicated in schematic diagrams on the E
series drawings. The Contractor shall coordinate the installation and connection of the wiring with the
Contractor providing the controls.
B.
Line voltage control wiring shall be per Sections 26 0519, installed in conduits per Section 26 0533 of
this specification. Low voltage thermostat wire shall be provided by the supplier of the equipment,
installed and connected by this Contractor.
C.
Control Relays where required: Coil voltage, number of poles and ratings shall be as indicated
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Square D, Class 8501 installed
in NEMA-1 enclosures or approved equivalent from one of the following manufacturers:
a.
Allen Bradley
b.
Siemens
c.
GE
d.
Square D
2.
Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
26 0050 - 3
Basic Materials and Methods
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
1.11
A.
1.12
A.
1.13
A.
1.14
A.
1.15
CLEANING AND TOUCH-UP
Prior to final inspection the Contractor shall clean the construction dust from all lighting fixtures and
lamps, clean any paint or other foreign material from all panelboards and devices, and touch-up paint on
all electrical equipment.
ELECTRICAL SERVICE
Refer to Electrical drawings for secondary electrical service to the building.
TEMPORARY ELECTRIC SERVICE
This Contractor shall furnish and install a temporary electrical lighting and power system in the building
for use during construction. The existing electrical power system may be utilized, if allowed by
Division1, and as necessary for this system.
SERVICE INTERRUPTIONS
Any revisions to the electrical system which require interruption to the electrical services in use in the
existing building(s) shall be of the shortest duration as practical. Times of interruption shall be
coordinated with the Owner's Representative and accomplished after hours, on weekends, and/or at
times as directed.
REMODEL WORK
A.
Certain areas of the existing building(s) may be required to be remodeled as shown on the drawings. In
these areas electrical equipment and devices may be required to be disconnected and/or relocated from
their points of service or function. Where these conditions are encountered, this Contractor shall
remove and/or relocate the devices as shown or required and reconnect the devices to their original
source as required.
B.
Work in the remodeled areas shall be phased the same as the general contractor's work.
C.
New devices and circuits are indicated to be connected to existing panelboards. Spare breakers may
be used where available. If spare breakers are not available, install new circuit breakers in existing
spaces.
1.16
A.
1.17
SALVAGE MATERIALS
Electrical materials which are removed from the existing building(s) (lighting fixtures, transformers,
generators, etc.) shall be offered to the Owner. If the Owner does not want the materials, they shall
become the property of the Contractor and removed from the job site. Owner retained materials shall
be transported to and stored at the locations as directed by the Owner.
TELEPHONE AND DATA SERVICES
A.
Telephone and data cables will be furnished and installed by The University of Oklahoma.
B.
Furnish and install raceways for the telephone and data cables per Section 26 0533 and as indicated on
the drawings.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
26 0050 - 4
Basic Materials and Methods
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
Refer to specific sections of Division 26 for products required for described work.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not applicable)
END OF SECTION
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
26 0050 - 5
Basic Materials and Methods
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY FOR PRINTING
SECTION 26 0519
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A.
1.2
The Division 1 General Conditions applying to the General Contractor also apply to this Subcontractor
as modified by Division 26 requirements.
GENERAL CONDITIONS
A.
Provide wires, cables, and connector products which are UL-listed and labeled for the temperature,
conditions, and location where installed.
B.
All wiring shall be installed in raceways per Section 26 0533 unless specifically noted or specified
otherwise.
C.
Type MC cable is not approved for use on this project, without preapproval from Architect/Engineer.
1.3
CODES AND STANDARDS
A.
NEC Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NEC (current edition) for construction and
installation of wires/cables and connectors.
B.
UL Compliance: Comply with UL Stds 83 and 486A.
C.
NEMA/ICEA Compliance: Comply with NEMA/ICEA Std Pub/no. WC-5.
D.
ASTM Compliance: Comply with ASTM B1, 2, 3, and 8.
1.4
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
The requirements of this section apply to cable, wire and conductor splices for work indicated in
drawings, schedules and elsewhere in these specifications.
B.
Copper conductors for systems less than 50V including remote control, signaling, and communications
circuits.
C.
The types of connectors suitable for copper conductors, as applicable, required for the project include
the following:
1.
Solderless pressure type
2.
Compression type
3.
Split-bolt type
1.5
CONTROL WIRING
A.
1.6
Control wiring shall be in accordance with this section, No. 16AWG minimum size or as recommended
by manufacturer of systems equipment (motor control, alarm systems, communications, etc.)
SPECIAL SYSTEM WIRE AND CABLE
A.
Clock system wire:
1.
This project does not require clock system wiring.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
26 0519 - 1
Low-Voltage Electrical
Power Conductors and Cables
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
B.
Refer to the following sections for wiring for other special systems:
1.
Section 283111 or Section 283112 for fire alarm system wire.
2.
Section 275123 for intercommunications system wire.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A.
Manufacturers
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
American Insulated Wire Corp.
b.
Brintec Corp.
c.
Carol Cable Co. Inc.
d.
Senator Wire and Cable Co.
e.
Southwire Company
2.
Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01.
B.
Copper conductors shall be furnished for all wires and cables. No aluminum or copper clad aluminum
conductors will be allowed.
C.
For voltages greater than 50V, provide wire and cable listed for 600V.
D.
Conductor Color Coding: Provide color coding for secondary service, feeder, and branch circuit
conductors throughout the project secondary electrical system as follows:
208 or 240/120 Volts
Conductor
480/277 Volts
Black
A Phase
Orange
Red
B Phase
Brown
Blue
C Phase
Yellow
White
Neutral
Gray
Green
Equipment Ground
Green
Green/yellow stripe
Isolated Ground
Green/yellow stripe
1.
Conductors No. 10 and smaller shall have color factory-applied the entire length of the
conductors. Conductors No. 8 and larger may instead have colors applied according to Section
26 0533.
2.
Control and Special Systems: In accordance with IPCEA or equipment manufacturer's
recommendations.
E.
Provide THHN/THWN insulation for all conductors size 500MCM and larger. For all other sizes provide
THW, THHN/THWN or XHHW insulation as appropriate for the locations where installed. Provide types
THW, THHW, THWN installation for conductors installed underground, under floor, or in wet locations.
F.
Conductors and Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 for Type THW,
Type THHN/THWN, Type THWN-2, or Type XHHW.
G.
Multi-conductor Cable: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 for Type AC, Type MC, Type MI,
Type NM, Type SO, and Type USE with ground wire.
2.2
CONNECTORS AND SPLICES
A.
Manufacturers
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
AMP
b.
3M Company
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
26 0519 - 2
Low-Voltage Electrical
Power Conductors and Cables
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
2.
c.
O-Z/Gedney Co.
d.
Square D Company
Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01.
B.
For voltages greater than 50V, provide connectors listed for 600V.
C.
Description: Factory-fabricated, solderless, metal connectors and splices of sizes, amp ratings,
materials, types, and classes for applications and services indicated. Use connectors with temperature
ratings equal to or greater than those of the wires upon which used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
WIRING METHODS
A.
Wire sizes shall be as noted on the drawings. Wire shall be a minimum of No. 12 AWG unless noted
otherwise.
B.
No more than three circuits shall be allowed in a raceway. Where more than three (3) current carrying
conductors are installed in a raceway, comply with NEC adjustment factors for reduced ampacity and for
higher ambient temperatures.
C.
Each circuit shall have a green grounding conductor installed with the phase and neutral conductors.
The grounding conductor shall be sized as indicated and/or per the NEC. Refer to Section 26 0526.
D.
Neutrals shall not be combined on branch circuits. A separate neutral shall be installed for each circuit.
Multiconductor circuits are not allowed, except within UL listed equipment.
E.
Feeders and Branch Circuits: Copper; solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and
larger.
F.
Service Entrance: Type THHN/THWN single conductors in raceway, or Type XHHW single conductors
in raceway.
G.
Exposed Feeders, Branch Circuits, and Class 1 Control Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces:
Type THHN/THWN single conductors in raceway.
H.
Feeders and Branch Circuits Concealed in
Type THHN/THWN single conductors in raceway.
I.
Feeders and Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground:
Type THHN/THWN single conductors in raceway.
J.
Cord Drops and Portable Appliance Connections: Type SO, hard service cord with stainless-steel, wiremesh, and strain-relief device at terminations to suit application.
K.
Class 2 Control Circuits: Type THHN/THWN single conductors in raceway.
3.2
Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces:
INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A.
The wiring layout indicated on the drawings is intended to be diagrammatic and minor variances to
accommodate the building structure are acceptable. If the Contractor desires to make major
modifications to the general layout, (ie. install conduits overhead where indicated to be underfloor, etc.),
he shall obtain the approval of the Architect/Engineer before beginning the changes.
B.
Complete raceway installation between conductor and cable termination points according to Section 26
0533 prior to pulling conductors and cables.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
26 0519 - 3
Low-Voltage Electrical
Power Conductors and Cables
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
C.
Complete cable tray installation as applicable according to Section 26 0536 prior to pulling cables.
D.
Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with
requirements in Section 26 0544.
E.
Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fireresistance rating of assembly.
F.
Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. Install exposed cables
parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours
where possible.
G.
Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not
damage cables or raceway. Do not use rope hitches for pulling attachment to wire or cable.
H.
Pull conductors simultaneously where more than one is being installed in same raceway.
manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant, where necessary.
I.
Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening
values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A-486B.
J.
Make splices, terminations, and taps that are compatible with conductor material. Install conductor at
each outlet, with at least 6 inches of slack.
K.
Splices: No splices or joints will be permitted in feeders or branches except at outlets or accessible
junction boxes. Secure joints in branch circuit wiring mechanically and electrically with solderless
connectors as listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., pressure cable type, 600 volt rating,
compression type. Install approved insulated connectors integral or separate cover to provide insulating
value equal to that of the conductors being joined
L.
Identify conductors and cables according to Section 26 0533.
3.3
Use
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
When the wiring has been pulled in and before tying into circuit breakers, motors, etc., test each
conductor to ground and between conductors on each conduit run with a 600V DC "megger”.
1.
Insulation should show a resistance reading of 150 megohms or higher. Any conductor in a
conduit that doesn’t, or shows a significantly lower resistance than the other conductors in the
same conduit must be thoroughly checked and replaced
B.
Prior to energizing, test wires and cables for electrical continuity.
C.
Subsequent to wire and cable hook-ups, energize circuits and demonstrate functioning in accordance
with requirements. Where necessary, correct malfunctioning units, and then retest to demonstrate
compliance.
END OF SECTION
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
26 0519 - 4
Low-Voltage Electrical
Power Conductors and Cables
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
SECTION 26 0526
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
The Division 1 General Conditions applying to the General Contractor also apply to this Subcontractor
as modified by Division 26 requirements.
SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Wire, connectors, rods, bars, accessories and devices required for a complete and proper building
ground system shall be submitted for approval.
B.
REFER TO SECTIONS 01 3000 AND 26 0010 FOR SUBMITTAL FORM AND REQUIREMENTS.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B.
Comply with UL 467 and NFPA 70 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.
2.2
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a.
Anixter Bros. Inc.
b.
Cam-Lok, Inc.
c.
Engineered Products Co.
d.
Erico Products, Inc.
e.
GB Electrical, Inc.
f.
Ideal Industries, Inc.
g.
Kearney-National.
h.
McGill Mfg.
i.
O-Z/Gedney Co.
j.
Raco, Inc.
k.
Thomas & Betts Corp.
l.
Utilco Co.
B.
Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01.
2.3
GROUNDING MATERIALS
A.
Conductors: Solid for No. 8 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 6 AWG and larger unless otherwise
indicated.
1.
Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by
applicable code or authorities having jurisdiction.
2.
Bare, Solid-Copper Conductors: Comply with ASTM B 3.
3.
Bare, Stranded-Copper Conductors: Comply with ASTM B 8.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
26 0526 - 1
Grounding and Bonding
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
B.
Grounding and Bonding Products: Types as indicated. Where types, sizes, ratings, and quantities
indicated differ from NFPA 70 requirements, the more stringent requirements and the greater size,
rating, and quantity indications govern.
C.
Connector Products: Listed and labeled as grounding connectors for the materials with which used.
D.
Pressure Connectors: High conductivity plated units.
E.
Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, heavy-duty units listed for the
application.
F.
Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials
being joined and installation conditions.
G.
Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel, sectional type, 3/4 inch by 10 feet.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Route grounding and bonding conductors using the shortest and straightest paths possible without
obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage,
except as indicated.
B.
Underground Grounding Conductors: Bare copper conductor, No. 3/0 AWG minimum, unless indicated
otherwise on electrical plans.
C.
Main Distribution System as applicable to project: Bare copper conductor, No. 3/0 AWG minimum, from
points indicated on electrical plans to main switchboard equipment ground bus and neutral bus in
electrical room, unless indicated otherwise on electrical plans.
D.
Bonding Jumpers: Provide bare copper or green insulated bonding jumpers sized in accordance with
overcurrent protective devices. Attach to grounding bushings on conduit, and lugs on boxes and other
enclosures.
E.
Power and Lighting Grounding: Provide bare copper or green insulated bonding jumpers sized in
accordance with overcurrent protective devices.
F.
Connect all equipment ground conductors to the ground bus and neutral conductors to the neutral bus
at the point of origination for each circuit. All grounding paths shall be continuous back to the service
entrance equipment.
G.
Pipe and Equipment Grounding: Conductor Terminations: Bolted.
H.
Underground Connections: Welded.
I.
Connections to Structural Steel: Bolted.
J.
Install ground rods driven into ground until tops are 2 inches below final grade or 4 inches above
finished floor slab unless otherwise indicated.
K.
Protect ground rods passing through concrete floor with a double wrapping of pressure-sensitive
insulating tape.
L.
Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating if any.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
26 0526 - 2
Grounding and Bonding
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
M.
Install bonding straps and jumpers in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance, except
where routed through short lengths of conduit.
N.
Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts.
O.
Bond to equipment mounted on vibration isolation hangers and supports so vibration is not transmitted
to rigidly mounted equipment.
P.
Grounding and Bonding for Piping, as applicable:
1.
Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from
building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to
building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes using a bolted clamp
connector or by bolting a lug-type connector to a pipe flange, using one of the lug bolts of the
flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor on street
side of fitting. Bond metal grounding-conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end.
2.
Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters.
Connect to pipe with a bolted connector.
3.
Bond each above ground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment shutoff valve.
Q.
Connections: Make connections in such a manner as to minimize possibility of galvanic action or
electrolysis. Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals
in direct contact will be galvanically compatible.
1.
Use electroplated or hot-tin coated materials to assure high conductivity.
2.
Make connections with clean bare metal at points of contact.
3.
Coat and seal connections involving dissimilar metals with inert material such as red lead paint to
prevent penetration of moisture to contact surfaces.
R.
Tighten grounding and bonding connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance
with manufacturer's published torque tightening values for connectors and bolts. Where manufacturer's
torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connections to comply with tightening torque values
specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
S.
Compression Type Connections: Use hydraulic compression tools to provide the correct circumferential
pressure for compression connectors. Use tools and dies recommended by the manufacturer of the
connectors. Provide embossing die code or other standard method to make a visible indication that a
connector has been adequately compressed on the conductor.
T.
Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance level is
specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, and at ground test wells.
1.
Measure ground resistance not less than two full days after last trace of precipitation and without
soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical
treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance.
2.
Perform tests by fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81.
3.
Report measured ground resistances that exceed 10 ohms.
4.
Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify
Architect/Engineer promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.
3.2
COMMUNICATION GROUNDING
A.
I.T. Rooms
1.
I.T. rooms shall be provided with a ground bar as indicated on the drawings for grounding
communication equipment.
B.
Signal and Communications: For telephone, alarms, and communication systems, provide a No. 4
AWG minimum green insulated copper conductor in raceway from the grounding electrode system to
each terminal cabinet or central equipment location, unless indicated otherwise on electrical plans.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
26 0526 - 3
Grounding and Bonding
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
END OF SECTION
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
26 0526 - 4
Grounding and Bonding
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
SECTION 26 0529
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
The Division 1 General Conditions applying to the General Contractor also apply to this Subcontractor
as modified by Division 26 requirements.
SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Steel slotted support systems shall be submitted for approval.
B.
REFER TO SECTIONS 01 3000 AND 26 0010 FOR SUBMITTAL FORM AND REQUIREMENTS:
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
2.2
Comply with NFPA 70.
SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS
A.
Steel Slotted Support Systems: U-Channel, 16-gauge steel channels with 9/16” diameter holes a
minimum of 8” on center in top surface, “Unistrut” or approved equal. Provide fittings and accessories
that mate and match U-channel and are of the same manufacture. Comply with MFMA-4, factoryfabricated components for field assembly.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
Unistrut
b.
Thomas and Betts
c.
Gregory Industries, Inc.
d.
Flex-Strut
2.
Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01
B.
Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101.
C.
Conduit, Cable, and Box Support Devices: Steel and malleable-iron hangers, clamps, and associated
fittings. Shall be “Caddy” or approved equivalent.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
Caddy.
b.
Cooper B-Line.
c.
Steel City.
2.
Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01
D.
Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components:
1.
Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded heat-treated steel stud, for use in hardened portland
cement concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for
supported loads and building materials where used.
2.
Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge type, zinc-coated steel, for use in hardened
portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported
loads and building materials where used.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
26 0529 - 1
Hangers and Supports
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS Type 18;
complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.
Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attached
structural element.
Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325.
Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.
Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with NFPA 70, NECA 1, and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this
Article.
B.
Separate dissimilar metals and metal products from contact with wood or cementitious materials by
painting each metal surface in area of contact with a bituminous coating or by other permanent
separation.
C.
Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT and RMC may be
supported by existing openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70.
D.
Parallel Runs of Horizontal Raceways: Install on trapeze-type supports fabricated with approved Uchannel.
E.
Support individual horizontal raceways by separate pipe hangers. Spring steel fasteners may be used
in lieu of hangers only for 1-1/2-inch and smaller raceways serving lighting and receptacle branch
circuits above suspended ceilings only.
For hanger rods with spring steel fasteners, use
1/4-inch-diameter or larger threaded steel. Use spring steel fasteners that are specifically designed for
supporting single conduits or tubing.
F.
Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be
adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design
load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb at each
support.
G.
Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten
electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless
otherwise indicated by code:
1.
To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts.
2.
To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts.
3.
To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor
fasteners on solid masonry units.
4.
To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners.
5.
To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with MSS SP-69 or Springtension clamps.
6.
To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws.
7.
Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount on slotted-channel
racks attached to substrate.
H.
Support exposed and concealed raceway within 1 foot of an unsupported box and access fittings. In
horizontal runs, support at the box and access fittings may be omitted where box or access fittings are
independently supported and raceway terminals are not made with chase nipples or threadless box
connectors.
I.
In vertical runs, arrange support so the load produced by the weight of the raceway and the enclosed
conductors is carried entirely by the conduit supports with no weight load on raceway terminals.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
26 0529 - 2
Hangers and Supports
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
J.
Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars.
K.
Conduit, Cable, and Boxes shall be mounted to the structural members with approved mounting clips.
L.
Vertical Conductor Supports: Install simultaneously with installation of conductors
M.
Boxes mounted in metal stud walls:
1.
All single gang boxes shall be mounted with approved mounting clips.
2.
All multiple gang boxes shall be mounted with Caddy #TSGB or equal box supports.
3.
Conduits shall be secured to studs with approved clips.
N.
Support outlet boxes above suspended ceilings from the structure above. Provide outlets occurring at
locations other that at the main ceiling channels with auxiliary metal cross members of adequate
strength and stiffness. Conduits above suspended ceilings and flexible metallic raceway runs from
junction boxes above removable suspended ceilings shall be adequately fastened to ceiling supporting
members by means of clamps, spring clips, or other positive devices.
O.
Device Box Supports: All device boxes mounted in metal stud walls shall be mounted with approved
mounting clips and conduits secured with approved clips. 4" square and multi-gang boxes shall have
far-side box supports.
P.
Miscellaneous Supports: Support miscellaneous electrical components as required to produce the same
structural safety factors as specified for raceway supports. Install metal channel racks for mounting
cabinets, panelboards, disconnects, control enclosures, pull boxes, junction boxes, transformers, and
other devices.
Q.
Fastening: Unless otherwise indicated, fasten electrical items and their supporting hardware securely to
the building structure, including but not limited to conduits, raceways, cables, cable trays, busways,
cabinets, panelboards, transformers, boxes, disconnect switches, and control components in
accordance with the following:
1.
Fasten by means of wood screws or screw-type nails on wood, toggle bolts on hollow masonry
units, concrete inserts or expansion bolts on concrete or solid masonry, and machine screws,
welded threaded studs, or spring-tension clamps on steel. Threaded studs driven by a powder
charge and provided with lock washers and nuts may be used instead of expansion bolts and
machine or wood screws. Do not weld conduit, pipe straps, or items other than threaded studs to
steel structures. In partitions of light steel construction, use sheet metal screws.
2.
Holes cut to depth of more than 1-1/2 inches in reinforced concrete beams or to depth of more than
3/4 inch in concrete shall not cut the main reinforcing bars. Fill holes that are not used.
3.
Ensure that the load applied to any fastener does not exceed 25 percent of the proof test load. Use
vibration-resistant and shock-resistant fasteners for attachments to concrete slabs.
R.
Do not use wooden plugs inserted in masonry or concrete as a base to secure conduit supports.
Provide toggle bolts for use with hollow concrete masonry units (CMU), and wedge anchors in concrete
or brick. Hangers and devices for mounting of electrical equipment and devices shall be galvanized or
otherwise protected from rusting by an approved method
3.2
CONCRETE BASES
A.
Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated in drawings, where applicable, but not less than 4
inches larger in both directions than supported unit, so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters
from edge of the base. If area beneath pad is not undisturbed earth: compact it, add a minimum of 6”
sand, and provide piers and footings. Any piers shall be 6” in diameter, 30” in length, and contain 4
pieces of reinforcing steel tied to the main pad reinforcement, at a minimum. Any trench under pad
must be 100% sand backfill. Contact OU Facilities Management to inspect any ditching and conduit
prior to backfilling, and to inspect forms prior to pouring concrete.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
26 0529 - 3
Hangers and Supports
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
B.
Anchor equipment to concrete base.
1.
Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings,
templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
2.
Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.
3.
Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.
END OF SECTION
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
26 0529 - 4
Hangers and Supports
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
SECTION 26 0533
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A.
The Division 1 General Conditions applying to the General Contractor also apply to this Subcontractor
as modified by Division 26 requirements.
B.
Submittals:
1. Product Data and Shop Drawings for custom enclosures and cabinets.
2. Manufacturer’s data on raceways, boxes, and fittings.
3. REFER TO SECTIONS 01 3000 AND 26 0533 FOR SUBMITTAL FORM AND REQUIREMENTS.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
A.
2.2
Products shall be new and undamaged. Raceways shall be a standard cataloged product of the
manufacturer. Minimum conduit size shall be ¾”.
GENERAL COMPLIANCE
A.
NEC Compliance: Comply with National Electrical Code (NFPA 70) as applicable to construction and
installation of raceways, boxes, and fittings.
B.
Listing and Labeling: raceways, boxes, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by
a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
C.
NEMA Compliance: Comply with National Electrical Manufacturers Association standards as applicable
to nonmetallic fittings for underground installation.
D.
NECA Standard: Comply with applicable portions of the National Electrical Contractors Association's
"Standard of Installation”.
2.3
CONDUITS, TUBING, FITTINGS, AND WIREWAY MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, conduits, tubing, fittings, and wireways shall
be manufactured by firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of conduits, tubing, fittings, and
wireways of the types and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar
service for not less than 10 years. Provide products produced by one of the following (for each type of
conduit/tubing/fitting listed below):
1. Conduit Bodies:
a.
Appleton Electric Co.
b.
Crouse-Hinds Co.
c.
Killark Electric Mfg. Co.
d.
Pyle-National Co.
2. Bushings, Knockout Closures, and Locknuts:
a.
Allen-Stevens Conduit Fittings Corp.
b.
Allied Metal Stamping, Inc.
c.
Appleton Electric Co.
d.
Carr Co.
e.
Raco, Inc.
f.
Steel City
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
26 0533 - 1
Raceways and Boxes
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
g.
h.
2.4
Midland-Ross Corp.
Thomas and Betts Co., Inc.
METAL CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS
A.
Conduit Bodies: Provide galvanized cast metal conduit bodies (condulets), of the type, shape and size,
to suit each respective location and installation, constructed with threaded conduit hubs, removable
cover with gasket, and corrosion resistant screws.
B.
Conduit fittings shall conform to UL 467 and UL 514 as applicable for rigid metal conduit, flexible metal
conduit, EMT, and MI cable. Fittings for each type of conduits shall be of the same material as the
conduit and when installed underground or in wet locations, they shall provide a watertight joint.
C.
Bushings, Knockout Closures and Locknuts: Provide corrosion resistant punched steel box knockout
closures, conduit locknuts and malleable iron conduit bushings of the type and size to suit each
respective use and installation.
D.
Galvanized Rigid Conduit (GRC)
1. Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6.
2. Rigid galvanized steel conduit shall be hot-dip galvanized steel with threads hot-dip galvanized
after cutting.
3. Provide threaded GRC fittings.
E.
Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT)
1. Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797.
2. Electrical metallic tubing shall be hot galvanized steel tubing with an additional outside and inside
urethane or similar coating for further rust protection.
3. Provide steel compression fittings. Cast fittings, setscrew fittings, and indent fittings will not be
accepted.
F.
Flexible Metal Conduit (FMC)
1. Comply with UL 1.
2. Flexible metal conduit shall be zinc-coated steel.
G.
Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit (LFMC)
1. Comply with UL 360.
2. Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit shall be comprised of single strip, continuous, flexible,
interlocked, double wrapped steel, galvanized inside and outside; forming smooth internal wiring
channel; liquid tight jacket of flexible polyvinyl chloride (PVC). Provide separate green insulated
equipment grounding conductor.
3. Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit shall be produced in accordance with U.L. Standard #360.
4. Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit shall be heavy wall. “Reduced wall” liquid-tight flexible steel
conduits will not be accepted.
H.
PVC Externally-Coated Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit and Fittings
1. The galvanized conduit, prior to plastic coating, shall be new, unused material and conform to
specifications given above for galvanized rigid conduit.
2. The exterior galvanized surfaces shall be coated with primer before PVC coating to insure a bond
between the zinc substrate and the PVC coating.
3. Nominal thickness of the exterior coating shall be 40 mils
4. A PVC sleeve extending one pipe diameter or two inches, whichever is less, shall be formed at
every female conduit opening on fittings except unions. The inside diameter of the sleeve shall be
the same as the outside diameter of the conduit to be used.
5. The PVC coating on the exterior of conduit couplings shall have a series of longitudinal ribs 40 mils
thick to protect the coating from tool damage during installation.
6. A urethane coating shall be uniformly and consistently applied to the interior of all conduit and
fittings. This internal coating shall be a nominal two mil thickness. Conduit having areas with thin
or no coating will not be accepted.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
26 0533 - 2
Raceways and Boxes
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
7. All male and female threads on conduit, elbows and nipples shall be protected by application of a
urethane coating.
8. Conduit bodies shall be supplied with stainless steel cover screws. Screw heads shall be
encapsulated with plastic to assure corrosion protection.
I.
2.5
Raceway Fittings: Specifically designed for raceway type used in Project.
NONMETALLIC CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS
A.
Electrical Nonmetallic Tubing: Comply with NEMA TC 13 and UL 1653.
B.
Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit (RNC)
1. Comply with NEMA TC 2 and UL 651 unless otherwise indicated.
2. Provide nonmetallic conduit and fittings of the type, grade, size and weight (wall thickness)
indicated for each service. Where type and grade are not indicated, provide proper selection as
determined by the Installer to fulfill the wiring requirements (Schedule 40 minimum, unless noted
otherwise). Type selected shall comply with the National Electrical Code and all applicable
standards.
C.
Raceway Fittings: Specifically designed for raceway type used in Project.
2.6
METAL WIREWAYS
A.
2.7
Description: Rigid steel sheets formed into rectangular or square shapes and totally enclosed. It shall
comply with UL 870 and NEMA 250, Type 1 unless otherwise indicated, and be sized as indicated on
drawings or according to NFPA 70.
1. Fittings: Specifically designed for raceway type used in Project.
2. Covers: Hinged-cover type unless otherwise indicated.
3. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.
SURFACE RACEWAY SYSTEMS
A.
Manufacturers
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, surface raceway systems shall be
manufactured by firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of surface raceway systems of the
types and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for
not less than 5 years. Provide Legrand “Wiremold” system or approved equivalent system
produced by one of the following:
a.
Legrand
b.
Hoffman
c.
Hellermann Tyton
d.
National Electric Products Co.
2. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01.
B.
Surface raceways shall be metal, paintable, and sized in accordance with the wiring installed. Furnish
raceway system complete with all necessary accessories, hardware, and fittings for a complete system
as recommended by the manufacturer.
2.8
CONDUIT AND TUBING ACCESSORIES
A.
Provide conduit and tubing accessories including straps, hangers, supports and expansion joints,
bonding jumpers and conduit seals for hazardous areas as required and as recommended by the
conduit and tubing manufacturer.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
26 0533 - 3
Raceways and Boxes
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
2.9
BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets shall be
manufactured by firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of boxes, enclosures, and cabinets of the
types and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not
less than 10 years. Provide products produced by one of the following (for each type of box listed
below):
1. Interior Outlet Boxes:
a.
Appleton Electric Co.
b.
Arrow Conduit and Fittings Corp.
c.
National Electric Products Co.
d.
Steel City
e.
Midland-Ross Corp.
f.
Raco
2. Weatherproof Outlet Boxes
a.
Appleton Electric Co.
b.
Crouse-Hinds Co.
c.
Harvey Hubbell, Inc.
d.
Pyle-National Co.
3. Junction and Pull Boxes:
a.
Arrow-Hart, Inc.
b.
General Eelctric Co.
c.
Keystone Columbia, Inc.
d.
Square “D” Co.
B.
Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A.
C.
Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy, Type FD, with gasketed
cover.
D.
Boxes shall be provided in wiring or raceway systems wherever required for pulling of wires, making
connections, and mounting devices or fixtures. Construction and design of boxes to be the best
adapted for the location, fixture and/or device. Boxes shall be of the cast metal hub type when located
in normally wet locations, when surface mounted on outside of exterior surfaces, in hazardous areas,
and when installed exposed up to seven (7) feet above interior floors and walkways. Boxes in other
locations shall be sheet steel.
E.
Interior Boxes:
1. Concealed Work: Provide galvanized steel interior outlet wiring boxes of the type, shape and size,
including depth of box, to suit each respective location and installation; constructed with stamped
knockouts in back and sides, and with threaded holes with screws for securing box covers or wiring
devices.
2. Exposed Work: Provide die-cast alloy outlet wiring boxes of the type, shape and size, including
depth of box, to suit each respective location and installation; constructed with integral conduit hubs
and tapped holes for securing box covers or wiring devices.
3. Accessories: Provide outlet box accessories as required for each installation, including mounting
brackets, wallboard hangers, extension rings, fixture studs, cable clamps and metal straps for
supporting outlet boxes, compatible with outlet boxes being used and meeting requirements of
individual wiring situations. Choice of accessories is Installer's option.
F.
Boxes for use with raceway systems shall not be less than 1-1/2 inches deep except where shallower
boxes required by structural conditions indicated on the drawings or in other sections of these
specifications are approved. Boxes for other than lighting fixture outlets shall be not less than 4 inches
square except that 4 by 2-inch boxes may be used where only one raceway enters the outlet. Boxes
less than 4 inches square for mounting lighting fixtures may be installed as required by fixture
configuration, as approved.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
26 0533 - 4
Raceways and Boxes
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
G.
Pull boxes shall be constructed of code gage galvanized sheet steel except where cast metal boxes are
required in location specified herein.
H.
Covers shall be provided on outlet boxes, pull boxes and junction boxes if no device or fixture is
attached. Covers shall be blank, suitable for painting and exactly fit the box.
I.
Clock outlet, for use in other than a wired clock system, shall consist of an outlet box, a plaster cover
where required, and a single receptacle with clock-outlet plate. The receptacle shall be recessed
sufficiently within the box to allow the complete insertion of a standard cap, flush with the plate. A
suitable clip or support for hanging the clock shall be secured to the top of the plate.
J.
Weatherproof Outlet Boxes: Provide corrosion-resistant cast metal weatherproof outlet wiring boxes, of
the type, shape and size, including depth of box, with threaded conduit ends, cast metal face plate with
spring-hinged waterproof cap suitably configured for each application, including face plate gasket and
corrosion proof fasteners.
K.
Junction and Pull Boxes: Provide galvanized sheet steel junction and pull boxes, with screw-on covers;
of the type, shape and size, to suit each respective location and installation; with welded seams and
equipped with steel nuts, bolts, screws and washers.
L.
Floor Boxes: All floor boxes shall be provided with all necessary faceplates, covers, dividers and other
hardware necessary for a complete and functional installation. Communications wiring and receptacles
are to be provided by others.
1. Manufacturers:
a.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Hubbell “System One
Round Non-Metallic Floor Box” or approved equivalent from:
1)
Hubbell
2)
Raco
3)
Steel City
b.
Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01.
2. Boxes in existing on-grade concrete floors: Provide required dividers to separate compartments for
communications and power. Electrical contractor shall sawcut existing slab where necessary to
install conduits and floorbox. After installation, electrical contractor shall patch and repair existing
slab. Coordinate installation with structural/architectural contractor, in some areas existing floor
may be removed by others.
a.
Power and Data Floorbox: Provide 4x4 sub-plate with four openings for voice/data jacks
and four NEMA 5-20 receptacles.
b.
Power, Data, and Audio/Visual Floorbox: Provide Hubbell S1SP3IM “INFINeSTATION”
sub-plate or approved equivalent as allowed above, with one NEMA 5-20 receptacle and
space for communications and A/V jacks.
3. Boxes in all floors not on grade:
a.
Duplex Floor Outlet: Provide Hubbell “System One” Dual-Channel Floor Fitting Fire Rated
Poke Through, or approved equivalent as allowed above. Provide Hubbell “Style Line”
sub-plate or approved equivalent as allowed above, with two compatible NEMA 5-20
duplex receptacles.
b.
Power and Data Floorbox: Provide Hubbell “System One” One-Piece 4x4 Fire Rated
Poke-Through box, or approved equivalent as allowed above, with four openings for
voice/data jacks and four NEMA 5-20 receptacles.
c.
Power, Data and Audio/Visual Floorbox: Provide Hubbell “System One” Dual-Channel
Floor Fitting Poke Through, or approved equivalent as allowed above. Provide Hubbell
S1SP3IM “INFINeSTATION” sub-plate or approved equivalent as allowed above, with one
5-20 receptacle and space for communications and A/V jacks.
d.
Furniture Feed Floorbox: Provide Hubbell “System One” 4x4 Floor Fitting Fire Rated
Poke-Through with one ¾” conduit for power and two ¾” conduits for communications, or
approved equivalent as allowed above. Provide sub-plate to allow connection to modular
furniture. Conductors or modular furniture will be provided by others, and terminated in
floor box by electrical contractor.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
26 0533 - 5
Raceways and Boxes
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
3.2
Provide color-coded thread protectors on the exposed threads of threaded rigid metal conduit. Handle
conduit and tubing carefully to prevent end-damage and to avoid scoring the finish. Store conduit and
tubing inside and protect from weather. When necessary to store outdoors, elevate well above grade
and enclose with durable, waterproof wrapping.
INSTALLATION
A.
General Installation
1. Install raceways, boxes, and fittings as indicated, in compliance with NEC requirements, in
accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions, and with recognized industry practices to
ensure that the boxes and fittings service the intended purposes.
2. Provide knockout closures to cap unused knockout holes where blanks have been removed.
Locate boxes and conduit bodies so as to ensure accessibility of electrical wiring. Avoid using
round boxes where conduit must enter box through side of box, which would result in a difficult and
insecure connection with a locknut or bushing on the rounded surface. Secure boxes rigidly to the
substrate upon which they are being mounted, or solidly embed boxes in concrete or masonry.
3. Furnish and install outlet boxes for the various special systems such as intercommunication,
burglar alarm, television, fire alarm, etc., as well as special outlets to accommodate devices, of
such size, type, material and configuration as required to suit the equipment provided, type of
occupancy, and space available. In the event the approved equipment for these special systems
requires boxes, the contractor shall furnish and install the boxes, conduit and all required fittings at
no increase in the contract amount.
4. Install outlet boxes for switches and receptacles in finished walls, except for special applications as
specified herein or indicated of one piece standard gang type, a minimum of 4" x 1 1/2" deep for
one device and 6 7/8" x 4" x 1 1/2" deep for two devices, with plaster covers and rectangular
openings of proper size and shape. Install other special boxes as shown on drawings or details as
necessary to meet structural requirements.
5. Install outlet boxes at mounting heights indicated on the drawings. Install those not definitely
located or where the heights interfere with mechanical, architectural, or structural elements as
directed by the Architect. Outlet mounting heights are construed to mean the distance from
centerline of cover plate to finished floor unless otherwise noted. Generally, receptacle heights
shall be 18" and wall switches shall be mounted 48" high above the finished floor to the center of
the device. These heights may be adjusted with permission, if necessary to more nearly fit
architectural features and shall comply with the ADA. Other heights shall be as noted or as
necessary to meet equipment or safety requirements.
6. In no instance will boxes be allowed to be installed back-to-back in rooms with tenants such as,
nursing homes, dormitories, hospital rooms, etc., or in rooms which need to sound isolated such as
conference rooms, exam rooms, classrooms, etc.
7. "Outdoor Raceways Applications" and "Indoor Raceways Applications" paragraphs below provide
examples of application requirements for various types of raceways. Coordinate with Drawings.
Unless noted otherwise, provide conduit systems as described below for the conditions given.
a.
Outdoor Raceways Applications:
1)
Exposed or Concealed: GRC
2)
Underground or in concrete: RNC
3)
Connection to Vibrating Equipment (dry-type transformers, motors, recessed
luminaires, etc.): LFMC (12” minimum and 72” maximum)
4)
Corrosive environments – PVC coated GRC
5)
Boxes and Enclosures: Metallic, NEMA 250, Type 3R or Type 4
b.
Indoor Raceways Applications:
1)
Exposed or Concealed: EMT; for 3” and larger use GRC
2)
Underground or in concrete: RNC
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
26 0533 - 6
Raceways and Boxes
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
3)
Connection to Vibrating Equipment (dry-type transformers, motors, recessed
luminaires, etc.): FMC; in wet or damp locations use LFMC (12” minimum and 72”
maximum)
4)
Damp or Wet Locations: GRC
5)
Corrosive environments – PVC coated GRC
6)
Boxes and Enclosures: Metallic, NEMA 250, Type 1, unless otherwise indicated.
8. Install conduit and tubing products as indicated, in accordance with the manufacturer's written
instructions, the applicable requirements of NEC, the National Electrical Contractors Association's
"Standard of Installation", and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that
products serve the intended function.
9. All conduits installed below grade, under-floor, or in damp areas shall have connections coated with
an approved sealant and tightened securely to make each joint waterproof.
10. Conduits shall be of sizes required to accommodate the number and size of conductors required in
accordance with the tables given in the latest edition of the National Electrical Code. Where space
will not permit the installation of one conduit of sufficient size to contain the conductors of a circuit
required, two conduits shall be provided, each conduit shall contain duplicate phase, neutral and
grounding conductors. The number and size of conduits indicated on the drawings are a minimum
for the various systems required. If larger conduits or greater numbers are required, they shall be
provided as necessary to accommodate the wiring as recommended by the manufacturer supplying
the particular equipment. Where more than three (3) current carrying conductors are installed in a
raceway, comply with NEC adjustment factors for reduced ampacity and for higher ambient
temperatures.
11. Conduit and electrical metallic tubing shall be cut square, reamed smooth and drawn up tight.
12. Maintain electrical continuity throughout metallic raceway systems. Install removable cover pull
boxes on long runs. Allow for natural drain of condensate. Install conduit bushings at all boxes,
cabinets, etc. and at the termination ends of conduit stub-outs.
13. Do not use wooden plugs inserted in masonry or concrete as a base to secure conduit supports.
Provide toggle bolts for use with hollow concrete masonry units (CMU), and wedge anchors in
concrete or brick. Hangers and devices for mounting of electrical equipment and devices shall be
galvanized or otherwise protected from rusting by an approved method.
14. Where wiring is required to be installed on the surface of walls in finished spaces, it shall be installed
in surface raceway systems. Installation of surface raceways shall be in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions. In unfinished spaces such as mechanical rooms, surface mount conduit
shall be acceptable.
15. Complete each electrical raceway system before installing cables or wire.
16. All raceway systems shall be equipped with a separate, green insulated equipment grounding
conductor installed with the circuit conductors. In no case shall the grounding properties of the
raceway itself be relied upon as the sole grounding means.
17. Wire pulling lubricants, when utilized, shall be in accordance with the requirements of Underwriters
Laboratories, Inc., applicable to the specific conductor or cable insulation and raceway material.
18. Install nylon pull rope having 600 LB tensile strength in all empty conduits. Leave 12" of tail at each
end.
B.
Conduit through or in concrete:
1. Conduit shall be installed under concrete, unless specifically noted or detailed otherwise.
2. Install raceways embedded in concrete in middle third of concrete thickness where practical, and
leave at least 1-inch thick concrete cover. Conduits shall not be larger in outside diameter than 1/3
the thickness of the concrete in which they are embedded.
3. Secure raceways to reinforcing rods to prevent sagging or shifting during concrete placement.
4. Space raceways laterally a minimum of three diameters to prevent voids in concrete.
5. Install conduit larger than 1-inch trade size, parallel to, or at right angles to main reinforcement.
Where conduit is at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support.
6. RNC or PVC Externally-Coated conduit shall not be installed above grade indoors except as
specifically noted or detailed.
7. Transition from nonmetallic tubing or RNC to PVC Externally-Coated Rigid Galvanized Steel
sweeps and risers before rising from concrete outdoors, and to GRC before rising from concrete
indoors. In no case shall PVC conduit be stubbed up from concrete, unless specifically noted or
detailed.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
26 0533 - 7
Raceways and Boxes
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
8. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings. Install
expansion fittings on runs over 150 feet long. Expansion fittings shall be telescopic and waterproof
and permit a movement up to 4 inches. Fittings shall be equipped with approved bonding jumpers
around or through each fitting.
C.
Routing:
1. Install raceways and cables concealed within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless in
mechanical rooms or otherwise indicated.
2. Route concealed conduits in as direct a line with as long bends as possible. Exposed conduits
shall be routed parallel to or at right angles to the lines of the building. Boxes, plates, and etc. shall
be accurately set plumb and level. Where conduits are routed exposed, right angle bends shall be
made with standard conduit ells or field bends to not less than the same radius. All bends shall be
free from dents or flattening. Not more than the equivalent of four quarter bends shall be used in
any run between terminals at cabinets, outlets, junction boxes or pull boxes.
3. Route horizontal runs of concealed conduit close to ceiling beams, passing across and above
water, steam, or other piping, etc., where possible.
4. Install raceways and cables at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hotwater pipes.
5. Except as otherwise indicated, arrange electrical services and overhead equipment with a minimum
of 7'-0" headroom in storage spaces, and 8'-6" headroom in other spaces. Arrange work to facilitate
maintenance and repair or replacement of equipment. Locate services requiring maintenance on
wiring devices and similar units in front of services requiring less maintenance.
6. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with luminaries, with
ceiling finish, suspension, ductwork, air diffusers and other work, so that required performances of
each will be achieved.
7. Do not install conduits through beams without special permission of the Architect unless specifically
detailed or noted in drawings or specifications.
8. Flush mounted panelboards shall have three (3) ¾ inch empty conduits extended from the
panelboard into accessible ceiling space, terminating in a 6" x 6" x 4" pull box with screw cover for
future use. Install other future conduits as noted or required for future systems as directed by
Architect/Engineer.
D.
Terminations:
1. Terminate all rigid steel conduits with double lock nuts and bushings or hubs. For grounding
purposes, secure EMT terminations at outlet boxes, junction boxes, panelboard cabinets, etc., with
steel interlocking compression connectors. Set screws or indentations will not be accepted as a
method of attachment of fittings to conduit or electrical metallic tubing.
2. Equip rigid steel conduit with insulated end bushings. Provide electrical metallic tubing 3/4" and
larger with insulated connectors or end bushings. Bushings shall be of the type to prevent abrasion
of wires without impairing the continuity of the conduit system grounding. The insulating insert
material shall be thermoplastic molded and locked into the steel casing forming the body of the
connector or bushing.
3. Provide the ends of each conduit or tubing in outlet boxes, pull boxes, and cabinets with blank
discs ("pennies") inserted in bushings or other approved bushing closures to prevent the entrance
of foreign material during the construction period. Conduits left empty for future wiring shall also be
so equipped.
E.
Special raceway systems:
1. Install conduits for thermostats, control, interlock wiring, and as otherwise required to effect proper
operation of all systems specified in this and other sections of the specifications. Also provide
empty conduits for future systems as required in the specifications and as noted or shown on the
drawings.
2. Communication raceways:
a.
Minimum size of telephone and data conduits shall be 1-1/4”.
b.
Provide telephone conduit system suitable for installation of fiber optic cable having a
minimum bend radius of 8".
All sweeps, pull boxes, and junction boxes shall
accommodate this minimum radius. No conduit bodies shall be installed in the telephone
raceway system, unless specifically indicated on the drawings.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
26 0533 - 8
Raceways and Boxes
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
c.
3.3
Install a pull rope with 12" of tail in all empty communication raceways.
SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS
A.
3.4
Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with
requirements in Section 26 0544.
FIRESTOPPING
A.
Install fire-stopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies.
END OF SECTION
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
26 0533 - 9
Raceways and Boxes
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY FOR PRINTING
SECTION 26 0553
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
The Division 1 General Conditions applying to the General Contractor also apply to this Subcontractor
as modified by Division 26 requirements.
SECTION REQUIRMENTS
A.
Identification materials and accessories shall be submitted for approval.
B.
REFER TO SECTIONS 01 3000 AND 26 0010 FOR SUBMITTAL FORM AND REQUIREMENTS.
1.3
CODES AND STANDARDS
A.
Comply with NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code."
B.
Comply with ANSI Standard A13.1, "Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems," with regard to
type and size of lettering for raceway and cable labels.
1.4
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
The extent of the electrical systems and equipment requiring identification is shown on the drawings and
the extent of identification required is specified herein and in individual sections of work requiring
identification.
B.
The types of electrical identification specified in this section include the following:
1.
Cable/conductor identification
2.
Conduit identification
3.
Danger signs
4.
Equipment/system identification signs
5.
Receptacles and switch circuit identification
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION MATERIAL
A.
General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard products of the categories
and types required for each application.
B.
Baked Enamel Danger Signs: Provide manufacturer's standard Danger Signs of baked enamel finish
on 20 gauge steel of standard red, black and white graphics with recognized standard wording where
applicable. Signs shall be 14" x 10" in size except where physically too large to apply, in which case 10"
x 7" signs shall be used.
C.
Engraved Plastic Laminate Signs: Provide engraving stock melamine plastic laminate, complying with
FS-L-P-387 for all electrical equipment provided, installed or connected by the Contractor. Signs shall
be black with white core, and shall be of suitable size to for the equipment to which they are attached.
1.
Thickness: 1/16" for units up to 20 square inches or 8" length 1/8" for larger units.
2.
Size: Unless noted otherwise, provide single line of text, 3/8" high lettering on 1" high sign (2"
high where 2 lines are required).
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
26 0553 - 1
Electrical Identification
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
3.
Fasteners: Self-tapping stainless steel screws, except where screws cannot or should not
penetrate the substrate use contact type permanent adhesive.
D.
Fasteners for Plastic Laminated and Metal Signs: Epoxy adhesive or self tapping stainless steel screws
or number 10/32 stainless steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers
E.
Adhesive backed vinyl markers: Provide self-stick markers of standard color and wording for voltage
and system identification of equipment, raceways and enclosures (Emergency, Lighting, Power, Light,
Power DC, Air Conditioning, Communications, Control, Fire, etc)
1.
Label Size as follows:
a.
Raceways 1 Inch and Smaller: 1 1/8 inches high by 4 inches long.
b.
Raceways larger than 1 Inch: 1 1/8 inches high by 8 inches long.
F.
Colored Adhesive Marking Tape for Raceways, Wires, and Cables: Self-adhesive vinyl tape not less
than 3 mils thick by 1 inch to 2 inches in width.
G.
Pretensioned Flexible Wraparound Colored Plastic Sleeves for Raceway and Cable Identification:
Flexible acrylic bands sized to suit the raceway diameter and arranged to stay in place by pre tensioned
gripping action when coiled around the raceway or cable.
H.
Wire/Cable Designation Tape Markers: Vinyl or vinyl cloth, self adhesive, wraparound, cable/conductor
markers with pre-printed numbers and letter.
I.
Aluminum, Wraparound, Cable Marker Bands: Bands cut from 0.014 inch thick, aluminum sheet, fitted
with slots or ears for securing permanently around wire or cable jacket or around groups of conductors.
Provide for legend application with stamped letters or numbers.
J.
Underground Line Marking Tape: Permanent, bright colored, continuous printed, acid and alkaliresistant polyethylene film for direct burial service not less than 6 inches wide by 4 mils thick. Printed
legend indicative of general type of underground line below. Tape shall have a minimum strength of
1750 psi lengthwise and 1500 psi crosswise with an elongation factor of 350 percent.
K.
Underground Conduit (Plastic Marking Tape): The tape shall be acid and alkali-resistant polyethylene
film, 6 inches wide with minimum thickness of 0.004 inch. Tape shall have a minimum strength of 1750
psi lengthwise and 1500 psi crosswise with an elongation factor of 350 percent. Tape color shall be as
specified in Table 1 below, and shall bear a continuous printed inscription describing the specific utility.
Table 1 - Tape Color
Red
Yellow
Orange
Blue
Green
L.
2.2
Electric
Gas, Oil, Dangerous Materials
Telephone, Telegraph, Television, Police, and Fire Communication
Water System
Sewer Systems
Switch and Receptacle Covers: Provide and install circuit identification label with black letters on clear
adhesive tape. Size shall be 3/8" wide and a maximum of 1-3/4" long. Each label shall show
panelboard and circuit number, i.e., 1N2Y-12 with letter and numbers a minimum of 1/8" high. Brady
BMP21 electronic labeling system or approved equal. Provide labels for all receptacles and switches
including those not provided by division 26. Dymo type tape system is not acceptable.
CONDUIT AND JUNCTION BOX IDENTIFICATION
A.
Provide junction box and pullbox exterior labeling indicating all panels and circuit numbers, or signal
systems contained in the junction box. Label all junction boxes.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
26 0553 - 2
Electrical Identification
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
B.
Provide heat shrink conduit identification to indicate origination point of all conduits stubbing up from
underground into equipment. Also provide conduit identification at 20'-0" intervals along corridors, and
10'-0" intervals in electrical and mechanical rooms.
C.
Band exposed or accessible raceways of the following systems for identification: Bands shall be
pretensioned plastic sleeves, colored adhesive marking tape, or a combination of the two. Make each
color band 2 inches wide, completely encircling conduit, and place adjacent bands of two color markings
in contact, side by side. Install bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, and at
40 foot maximum intervals in straight runs. Apply the following colors:
1.
Fire Alarm System: Red
2.
Emergency Power: Orange
3.
Power, when in buildings with Emergency Power: Black
4.
Emergency Lighting: Green
5.
Lighting, when in buildings with Emergency Lighting: Yellow
6.
Controls: Brown
D.
Identify Junction, Pull, and Connection Boxes: Code required caution sign for boxes shall be pressure
sensitive, self-adhesive label indicating system voltage in black, pre-printed on orange background.
Install on outside of box cover. Also label box covers with identity of contained circuits. Use pressure
sensitive plastic labels at exposed locations and similar labels or plasticized card stock tags at
concealed boxes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
APPLICATION, INSTALLATION, AND GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Coordination: Install identification after completion of painting.
B.
Coordinate names, abbreviations, colors, and other designations used in electrical identification work
with corresponding designations specified or indicated. Install numbers, lettering, and colors as
approved in submittals and as required by code.
C.
Install identification devices in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and requirements of
NEC.
D.
Regulations: Comply with NEC Article 110, governing regulations, and the requests of governing
authorities for the identification of electrical work.
E.
Conductors #10 and smaller shall have color factory applied the entire length of the conductors
according to Section 26 0519. Conductors #8 and larger shall have colors applied as follows:
1.
The following field applied color coding methods may be used in lieu of factory coded wire (See
Section 26 0519 for color code) for sizes larger than No. 10 AWG:
a.
Apply colored, pressure sensitive plastic tape in half lapped turns for a distance of 6 inches
from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply the last two laps
of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Use 1 inch wide tape in colors as
specified. Do not obliterate cable identification markings by taping. Tape locations may be
adjusted slightly to prevent such obliteration.
b.
In lieu of pressure sensitive tape, colored cable ties may be used for color identification.
Apply three ties of specified color to each wire at each terminal or splice point starting 3
inches from the terminal and spaced 3 inches apart. Apply with a special tool or pliers,
tighten for snug fit, and cut off excess length.
F.
Tag or label conductors as follows:
1.
Future Connections: Conductors indicated to be for future connection or connection under
another contract with identification indicating source and circuit numbers.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
26 0553 - 3
Electrical Identification
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
2.
3.
Multiple Circuits: Where multiple branch circuits or control wiring or communications/signal
conductors are present in the same box or enclosure (except for three circuit, four wire home
runs), label each conductor or cable. Provide legend indicating source, voltage, circuit number,
and phase for branch circuit wiring. Phase and voltage of branch circuit wiring may be indicated
by means of coded color of conductor insulation. For control and communications/signal wiring,
use color coding or wire/cable marking tape at terminations and at intermediate locations where
conductors appear in wiring boxes, troughs, and control cabinets. Use consistent letter/number
conductor designations throughout on wire/cable marking tapes.
Match identification markings with designations used in panelboards shop drawings, Contract
Documents, and similar previously established identification schemes for the facility's electrical
installations.
G.
Apply warning, caution, and instruction signs and stencils as follows:
1.
Install warning, caution, or instruction signs where required by NEC, where indicated, or where
reasonably required to assure safe operation and maintenance of electrical systems and of the
items to which they connect. Install engraved plastic laminated instruction signs with approved
legend where instructions or explanations are needed for system or equipment operation. Install
butyrate signs with metal backing for outdoor items.
2.
Emergency Operating Signs: Install engraved laminate signs with white legend on red
background with minimum 3/8 inch high lettering for emergency instructions on power transfer,
load shedding, or other emergency operations.
H.
Install equipment/system circuit/device identification as follows:
1.
Apply equipment identification labels of engraved plastic laminate on each major unit of electrical
equipment in building, including central or master unit of each electrical system. This includes
communication/signal/alarm systems, unless unit is specified with its own self-explanatory
identification. Except as otherwise indicated, provide single line of text, with 1/2 inch high
lettering on 1 inch high label (2 inch high where two lines are required), white lettering in black
field. Text shall match terminology and numbering of the Contract Documents and shop
drawings. Apply labels for each unit of the following categories of electrical equipment.
a.
Panelboards, electrical cabinets, and enclosures
b.
Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items
c.
Electrical switchboards and switchgear
d.
Transformers
e.
Motor starters and motor controllers
f.
Pushbutton stations
g.
Clock/program master equipment
h.
Call system master station
i.
Fire alarm master station or control panel and major equipment
j.
Intrusion alarm control panel and major equipment
k.
Any device serving a remote load
I.
Apply circuit/control/item designation labels of engraved plastic laminate for disconnect switches,
breakers, pushbuttons, pilot lights, and similar items for power distribution and control components
above, except panelboards and alarm/signal components, where labeling is specified elsewhere. For
new panelboards or panelboards affected by this project, provide framed, typed circuit schedules with
explicit description and identification of items controlled by each individual breaker.
J.
Install labels at locations indicated and at locations for best convenience of viewing without interference
with operation and maintenance of equipment.
K.
Underground Conduit (Plastic Marking Tape): Warning tapes shall be installed directly above the
conduit, at a depth of 6 to 8 inches below finished grade unless otherwise indicated. Where multiple
lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope, do not exceed an overall width of 16 inches;
install a single line marker.
END OF SECTION
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
26 0553 - 4
Electrical Identification
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
SECTION 26 2416
PANELBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
The Division 1 General Conditions applying to the General Contractor also apply to this Subcontractor
as modified by Division 26 requirements.
SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Panelboards, circuit breakers, and accessories shall be submitted for approval.
B.
REFER TO SECTIONS 01 3000 AND 26 0010 FOR SUBMITTAL FORM AND REQUIREMENTS
C.
Submit series connected interrupting ratings for all panelboards and circuit breakers.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. Load Center type
construction is not acceptable.
B.
Comply with NEMA PB 1.
C.
Materials shall be new and a standard cataloged product of the manufacturer.
unproven designs will not be acceptable.
2.2
Experimental or
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS
A.
Enclosures: Flush or surface mounted cabinets as noted in panelboard schedule; NEMA 250, Type 1 in
dry indoor areas and Type 3R in wet or outdoor areas.
B.
Service Equipment Label, when required: Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) labeled for
use as service equipment for panelboards with one or more main service disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices.
C.
Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessary appurtenances
required for future installation of devices.
D.
Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit current
available at terminals. Provide with rating sufficient for design requirements.
2.3
DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS
A.
Panelboards, circuit breakers, and accessories:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
Siemens
b.
GE
c.
Square D
d.
Cutler Hammer
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
26 2416 - 1
Panelboards
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
2.
Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01.
B.
Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, power and feeder distribution type, 22 KA minimum interrupting capacity to
meet available fault currents. FCDP shall be rated 35 KAIC minimum.
C.
Dead-front construction with concealed trim clamps.
D.
Cabinets: Code gauge galvanized steel.
E.
Gray baked enamel code gauge steel fronts and doors with flush hinges.
F.
Metal flush catch and latches, shall not require key. Plastic cover catches are not acceptable.
G.
Circuit breaker numbers permanently engraved on panel interior.
acceptable.
H.
Metal frame with clear plastic cover for panel index card.
I.
Mains: Circuit breaker or Lugs only as noted in the panelboard schedule.
J.
Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Plug-in circuit breakers as noted in the panelboard schedule.
K.
Copper bus bars, including ground bars.
L.
Main terminals shall be listed and identified for 60/75C wire.
2.4
Stick-on tape numbers are not
DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES WITHIN PANELBOARDS
A.
Disconnects and over-current protective devices:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
Siemens
b.
GE
c.
Square D
d.
Cutler Hammer
2.
Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01.
B.
Molded-Case Circuit Breaker: Comply with UL 489, to meet available fault currents.
1.
Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads;
Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge (HID) lighting circuits.
2.
Molded case, thermal magnetic, with ON, OFF, and TRIPPED positions. Two and three pole
breakers shall be common trip. BREAKER HANDLE TIES FOR TRIP OPERATION ARE NOT
ACCEPTABLE.
3.
Breakers shall be rated at 22 KAIC (minimum). Those in FCDP shall be rated 35 KAIC minimum.
4.
Circuit breakers serving heating and air conditioning equipment shall be HACR rated breakers.
Breakers serving HID lighting loads shall be HID rated.
5.
Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupter Circuit Breakers: Single-pole and two-pole configurations with
Class A ground-fault protection (6-mA trip).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Receive, inspect, handle, store, and install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1.
Do not install damaged panelboards; remove from project site.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
26 2416 - 2
Panelboards
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
B.
Store panelboards in a clean dry space which prevents formation of condensate. Use storage space
with uniform temperature and adequate air circulation. Protect panelboards from dirt, fumes, water and
physical damage
C.
Install in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, the applicable requirements of NEC, and in
accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products serve the intended function.
D.
Mount top of trim 90 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated. If this places the center of
the operating handle of the top-most switch or circuit breaker (in highest position) higher than 6’7” then
lower mounting of panel to bring it to 6’7”.
E.
Panelboard boxes and trims shall be installed accurately and set plumb and level and in accordance
with the manufacturer mounting instructions.
F.
Arrange conductors into groups; bundle and wrap with wire ties.
G.
Filler plates shall be used for all unused spaces in panelboards.
H.
Connect branch and feeder circuits to panelboards in such a manner as to balance, as equally as
possible, the loads connected to each phase.
I.
At the completion of the work and when connected loads can be energized, check the load current in
each phase of each feeder and make adjustments as necessary to correct load unbalances.
J.
Create a typed directory to indicate installed circuit loads and incorporating Owner's final room
designations according to Section 26 0553.
END OF SECTION
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
26 2416 - 3
Panelboards
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY FOR PRINTING
SECTION 26 2726
WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
The Division 1 General Conditions applying to the General Contractor also apply to this Subcontractor
as modified by Division 26 requirements.
SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Wiring devices shall be submitted for approval.
B.
REFER TO SECTIONS 01 3000 AND 26 0010 FOR SUBMITTAL FORM AND REQUIREMENTS.
1.3
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
The extent of wiring device work is indicated by drawings and schedules, and by the requirements of
this section. Wiring devices are defined as single discrete units of electrical distribution systems which
are intended to carry but not utilize electric energy. The devices covered in this section may include, but
not necessarily be limited by the following:
1.
Receptacles
2.
Plugs
3.
Switches
4.
Occupancy Sensors
5.
Wall plates
6.
Connectors
7.
Multi-Outlet Receptacle Assemblies
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B.
Materials shall be new and a standard cataloged product of the manufacturer.
unproven designs will not be acceptable.
C.
Comply with NFPA 70.
D.
Comply with National Electrical Manufacturers Associations standards for wiring device products.
2.2
Experimental or
DEVICES
A.
Devices that are manufactured for use with modular plug-in connectors may be substituted under the
following conditions:
1.
Connectors shall comply with UL 2459 and shall be made with stranding building wire.
2.
Devices shall comply with the requirements in this Section.
B.
Duplex receptacles and lighting switches shall be of the same manufacturer.
C.
Device Color:
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 2040325 - 0
26 2726 - 1
Wiring Devices
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.3
Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: White unless otherwise indicated or
required by NFPA 70 or device listing.
Wiring Devices Connected to Emergency Power System: Red.
In dark-paneled walls, use brown devices.
Above kitchen counters, use white devices with type 302 stainless-steel wall plates
RECEPTACLES
A.
Convenience Receptacles: 125V, 20A, straight blade, NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R,
and UL 498.
1.
Provide wide body industrial specification grade, constructed with one piece grounding
backstrap/mounting yoke having integral ground contacts. Backstrap shall be equipped with a
green ground screw, and shall have not more than one rivet. Receptacles shall accept side or
back wiring.
2.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Hubbell #5362, Leviton #5362
or approved equivalent from one of the following manufacturers:
a.
Hubbell Wiring Device Div.
b.
Arrow-Hart, Inc.
c.
Pass and Seymour, Inc.
d.
General Electric
e.
Leviton
3.
Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01.
B.
Tamper-Resistant Convenience Receptacles, where required by NFPA 70, 125V, 20A, straight blade:
NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R, and UL 498. Labeled to comply with NFPA 70,
"Receptacles, Cord Connectors, and Attachment Plugs (Caps)" Article, "Tamper-Resistant Receptacles
for Dwelling Units" Section.
1.
Provide commercial specification grade, constructed with one piece grounding
backstrap/mounting yoke having integral ground contacts. Backstrap shall be equipped with a
green ground screw, and shall have not more than one rivet. Receptacles shall accept side or
back wiring.
2.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Hubbell #BR20TR or approved
equivalent from one of the following manufacturers:
a.
Hubbell Wiring Device Div.
b.
Arrow-Hart, Inc.
c.
Pass and Seymour, Inc.
d.
General Electric
e.
Leviton
3.
Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01
C.
Duplex Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupter (GFCI) Convenience Receptacles, 125V, 20A, straight blade,
non-feed-through type. NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, and UL 943, Class A, and include indicator
light that is lighted when device is tripped.
1.
Provide heavy duty, weather resistant, with integral personnel ground fault protection.
2.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Hubbell #GFR5362TR, or
approved equivalent from one of the following manufacturers:
a.
Hubbell Wiring Device Div.
b.
Arrow-Hart, Inc.
c.
Pass and Seymour, Inc.
d.
General Electric
e.
Leviton
3.
Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01.
D.
Blank Face Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupter (GFCI) Convenience Receptacles, for use only when
receptacle is not in a readily available area and GFCI style breaker is not used, 125V, 20A, feedthrough type. NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, and UL 943, Class A, and include indicator light that
is lighted when device is tripped.
1.
Provide heavy duty.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 2040325 - 0
26 2726 - 2
Wiring Devices
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
2.
E.
2.4
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Hubbell #GFBF20LA, or
approved equivalent from one of the following manufacturers:
a.
Hubbell Wiring Device Div.
b.
Arrow-Hart, Inc.
c.
Pass and Seymour, Inc.
d.
General Electric
e.
Leviton
Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01.Telephone and Audio/Visual Outlets will be provided by
others, and are not included in this contract. Contractor shall provide required boxes and raceways with
pull-strings only.
PLUGS
A.
2.5
Plugs, 125V, 20A, straight blade, 3 wire grounding, parallel blades with cord clamp: comply with
NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R, and UL 498. Match Nema configuration with cord
clamp.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Hubbell #14W33H, or
approved equivalent from one of the following manufacturers:
a.
Hubbell Wiring Device Div.
b.
Arrow-Hart, Inc.
c.
Pass and Seymour, Inc.
d.
Leviton
2.
Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01.
SWITCHES
A.
Toggle, 3-Way, and 4-Way Switches, 120/277V, 20A, comply with NEMA WD 1 and UL 20.
1.
Provide wide body industrial specification grade switch with mounting yoke insulated from
mechanism, and which shall accept side or back wiring.
2.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Hubbell #1221, #1223, #1224,
or approved equivalents from one of the following manufacturers:
a.
Hubbell Wiring Device Div.
b.
Arrow-Hart, Inc.
c.
Pass and Seymour, Inc.
d.
General Electric
e.
Leviton
3.
Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01.
B.
Lighted Toggle Switches, 120/277V, 20A, comply with NEMA WD 1 and UL 20. With neon-lighted
handle, illuminated when switch is "off".
1.
Provide wide body industrial specification grade switch with mounting yoke insulated from
mechanism, and which shall accept side or back wiring.
2.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Hubbell #1221PL, or approved
equivalents from one of the following manufacturers:
a.
Hubbell Wiring Device Div.
b.
Arrow-Hart, Inc.
c.
Pass and Seymour, Inc.
d.
General Electric
e.
Leviton
3.
Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01.
C.
Locking Switches, 120/277V, 20A, comply with NEMA WD 1 and UL 20. Single pole, with factorysupplied key in lieu of switch handle.
1.
Provide heavy duty industrial grade switch with mounting yoke insulated from mechanism, and
which shall accept side or back wiring.
2.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Hubbell #1221L, or approved
equivalents from one of the following manufacturers:
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 2040325 - 0
26 2726 - 3
Wiring Devices
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
3.
D.
2.6
a.
Hubbell Wiring Device Div.
b.
Arrow-Hart, Inc.
c.
Leviton
Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01.
Fluorescent Dimmer Switches, 120 or 277V, 600VA compatible with fluorescent dimmer ballast;
dimmer-ballast combination capable of consistent dimming with low end not greater than 20 percent of
full brightness; continuously adjustable slider with single-pole or three-way switching. Comply with
UL 1472.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Leviton #IPX06-10 for
120VAC, and #IPX06-70 for 277VAC, (used with Advance Mark 10 Dimming Ballasts), or
approved equivalents from one of the following manufacturers:
a.
Leviton
b.
Pass and Seymour, Inc.
c.
Lutron
d.
Lithonia
2.
Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01.
OCCUPANCY SENSORS
A.
2.7
Furnish and install occupancy sensors where indicated on the drawings and specified herein. Sensors
shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instruction. Sensors with manual-on operation
only are not acceptable. Set sensor functions per directions from the Owner Representative. Where
two or more sensors are shown connected by low voltage wiring, either sensor shall turn on all lights in
that area.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Hubbell #OMNIDTRP sensors
and #UVPP fixture mounted power packs, or approved equivalents from one of the following
manufacturers:
a.
Hubbell
b.
Wattstopper
c.
Sensorswitch
d.
Leviton
e.
Lithonia
2.
Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01.
WALL PLATES
A.
Manufacturers
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide wall plates from one of the
following manufacturers:
a.
Sierra
b.
Pass and Seymour, Inc.
c.
Hubbell
d.
GE
e.
Leviton
2.
Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01
B.
Wall Plates, Finished Areas: Type 302 stainless-steel with a nominal thickness of 0.032” and beveled
edges and satin finish.
C.
Wall Plates, Unfinished Areas: Type 302 stainless-steel with a nominal thickness of 0.032” and beveled
edges and satin finish.
D.
Wall Plates, Damp Locations: Type 302 stainless-steel with a nominal thickness of 0.032” and beveled
edges and satin finish.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 2040325 - 0
26 2726 - 4
Wiring Devices
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
2.8
PREFABRICATED, MULTIOUTLET RECEPTACLE ASSEMBLIES
A.
Components produced by a single manufacturer designed for use as a complete, matching assembly of
raceways and receptacles. Metal, with manufacturer's standard finish, raceway with No. 12 AWG wire.
One grounding type receptacle on 12 inch centers
B.
Manufacturers
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Legrand #2000, or approved
equivalents from one of the following manufacturers:
a.
Legrand
b.
Universal Electric Corporation
2.
Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSPECTION
A.
3.2
Installer must examine the areas and conditions under which wiring devices are to be installed and
notify the General Contractor which wiring devices are to be installed and notify the General Contractor
in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with
the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Architect.
INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with NFPA 70.
B.
Comply with NECA 1, including the mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise noted.
C.
Furnish and install devices in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations, and in accordance
with recognized industry practices to ensure that products serve the intended function.
D.
Delay installation of devices until wiring is completed. Install receptacles and switches only in electrical
boxes which are clean and free from excess building materials, debris, etc.
E.
Set occupancy switch functions per directions from the Owner Representative.
F.
When installing occupancy sensors, consideration shall be given to the location of the sensor and
occupant locations. Sensors shall not be located behind doors or furniture where the sensor’s ability to
sense traffic would be affected. Install unshared neutral conductors on line and load side of dimmers.
G.
Where a GFCI receptacle is indicated on the drawings, it is intended that a GFCI receptacle as specified
be installed at the location indicated. No feed-through wiring to adjacent receptacles indicated to be
GFCI will be acceptable, unless otherwise noted.
H.
Unless noted otherwise, wiring devices shall be mounted as follows:
1.
Wall mounted switches and dimmers: 48" above finished floor.
2.
Duplex receptacles: 18" above finished floor.
3.
Duplex receptacles noted "C" (countertop mounting) shall be mounted horizontally approximately
6" above countertops. Coordinate exact mounting height with millwork supplier for the type and
style back-splash being furnished.
4.
Receptacles for electric water coolers shall be installed in accordance with Section 26 0050.
I.
Mount devices flush, with long dimension vertical, unless otherwise directed. Install grounding terminal
on top with type 302 stainless-steel wall plates, and grounding terminal on bottom with plastic wall
plates. Group adjacent devices under single, multi-gang wall plates.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 2040325 - 0
26 2726 - 5
Wiring Devices
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
J.
NEMA configuration and capacity of three and four wire receptacles serving equipment supplied by
others shall be compatible with the plug on the equipment being supplied. Coordinate with the
equipment supplier.
K.
Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes when
standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening.
L.
If devices are installed prior to wall painting or finish, the Contractor shall carefully mask all devices to
prevent paint splatters on devices.
M.
Devices or plates with scratches or blemishes in finish shall be replaced as determined by the
Architect/Engineer.
N.
Prior to the project completion inspection, the Contractor shall:
1.
Clean the construction dust and other debris from all devices and plates.
2.
Clean all construction paint from devices and plates.
3.
Apply supply circuit labeling to the device cover plates according to Section 26 0553.
END OF SECTION
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 2040325 - 0
26 2726 - 6
Wiring Devices
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
SECTION 26 2816
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A.
The Division 1 General Conditions applying to the General Contractor also apply to this Subcontractor
as modified by Division 26 requirements.
B.
Enclosed switches and circuit breakers to be submitted for approval.
C.
REFER TO SECTIONS 01300 AND 260533 FOR SUBMITTAL FORM AND REQUIREMENTS.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMNTS
A.
2.2
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
SHUNT TRIP SWITCHES
A.
Comply with UL 50 and UL 98 (and ASME A17.1 if used as elevator shunt trip disconnect) with 200-kA
interrupting and short-circuit current rating when fitted with Class J fuses.
B.
Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of shunt trip switches of the size required,
whose products have been in satisfactory use in the same type service for not less than 10 years.
2.3
FUSIBLE AND NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES
A.
Fusible Switches, 600 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, Type HD, single throw that accommodate
specified fuses, and with lockable handle interlocked with cover in closed position.
B.
Nonfusible Switches, 600 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, Type HD, single throw with lockable
handle interlocked with cover in closed position.
C.
Switch Interior: Switch blades to be fully visible in the OFF position when the door is open. Dead-front
construction with permanently attached arc suppressors hinged or otherwise attached to permit easy
access to line-side lugs without removal of the arc suppressor. Lugs to be UL listed for copper and/or
aluminum cables and front removable. Current carrying parts to be plated by electrolytic processes.
Fuse holders to be of a type to reject all class H fuses.
D.
Switch Mechanism: Provide a quick-make and quick-break operating handle and mechanism as a
integral part of the box, not the cover. Provide a dual cover interlock to prevent unauthorized opening of
the switch door in the ON position or closing of the switch mechanism with the door open.
E.
Enclosures: furnish switches in NEMA 1 enclosures or as shown on the plans. Attach covers on NEMA
1 enclosures with suitable hinges. All enclosures installed where exposed to the weather shall be in
NEMA 3R (raintight) enclosures. Raintight covers shall be securable in the open position. Provide
NEMA 3R switches thru 200 amperes with closing caps, interchangeable hubs. Enclosures of code
gauge (UL 98) sheet steel (NEMA 1) or code gauge (UL 98) galvanized steel (NEMA 3R), treated with a
rust-inhibiting phosphate, finished in gray baked enamel.
F.
Ratings: Switches to be horsepower rated for 250 or 600 volts AC or DC as required.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
26 2816 - 1
Enclosed Switches and Circuit
Breakers
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
G.
Provide fuses located as indicated and in accordance with the following:
1.
Section 26 2813.
2.
Provide any other time delay fuses for safety switches, as recommended by the switch or
equipment manufacturer, and/or as shown, of class, type and rating needed to meet electrical
requirements.
H.
Manufacturers
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide from one of the following
manufacturers:
a.
General Electric
b.
Westinghouse
c.
Square D
d.
Siemens
e.
Cutler Hammer
2.
Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01.
2.4
MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A.
Description: Comply with UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting capacity to meet
available fault currents, (minimum 22KA interrupting capacity).
1.
Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame
sizes 250 A and larger.
2.
Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers: Field-replaceable rating plug, RMS sensing, with field-adjustable
instantaneous trip settings.
3.
Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller and let-through ratings less
than NEMA FU 1, RK-5.
4.
GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with 5-mA trip sensitivity.
5.
GFEP Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with 5-mA trip sensitivity.
B.
Features and Accessories:
1.
Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads;
Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge (HID) lighting circuits.
2.
Shunt Trip: Trip coil energized from separate circuit, with coil-clearing contact.
C.
Manufacturers
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide from the manufacturer of
panelboard or switchboard in which it will be installed as applicable, or one of the following
manufacturers:
a.
General Electric
b.
Westinghouse
c.
Square D
d.
Siemens
e.
Cutler Hammer
2.
Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01.
2.5
ENCLOSURES
A.
NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and UL 50, to comply with environmental conditions at installed
location.
1.
Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.
2.
Kitchen Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X, stainless steel.
3.
Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
26 2816 - 2
Enclosed Switches and Circuit
Breakers
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Provide a motor disconnect switch under this section of the specifications when required by NEC, even
when not indicated.
B.
Install individual wall-mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height unless otherwise
indicated.
C.
Install all switches to meet NEC clearance requirements for working space.
D.
Install electrical equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights that
reduce headroom are indicated.
E.
Install electrical equipment to provide for ease of disconnecting the equipment with minimum
interference to other installations.
F.
Install electrical equipment to allow right of way for piping and conduit installed at required slope.
G.
In locations where a VFD is provided by others, the VFD shall be installed by the electrical contractor
downstream from the equipment disconnect.
H.
Install electrical equipment to ensure that connecting raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and
busways are clear of obstructions and of the working and access space of other equipment.
I.
Install required supporting devices in cast-in-place concrete, masonry walls, and other structural
components as they are constructed.
J.
Install fuses in fusible devices, with a voltage rating not less than the circuit voltage. Provide one set of
spare fuses for each size and type fusible device installed, or as noted.
K.
Comply with NECA 1.
3.2
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform the following field tests and inspections, and prepare test reports:
1.
Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance
Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
END OF SECTION
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
26 2816 - 3
Enclosed Switches and Circuit
Breakers
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY FOR PRINTING
SECTION 26 5000
LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
The Division 1 General Conditions applying to the General Contractor also apply to this Subcontractor
as modified by Division 26 requirements.
SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Lighting fixtures, including lamps, shall be submitted for approval.
B.
REFER TO SECTIONS 01 3000 AND 26 0010 FOR SUBMITTAL FORM AND REQUIREMENTS.
C.
Lighting fixtures need not be submitted, and will not be reviewed BEFORE bid is awarded. Lighting
fixtures submittals will be reviewed after bid is awarded according to the requirements of 2.9.
D.
Each lighting fixture type shall be submitted for approval as follows:
1.
Submit copy of manufacturer's catalog sheet for each fixture. If substitute fixture is being submitted,
mark proposed fixture features specified clearly in colored marker. If more than one fixture is
indicted on the catalog page, clearly mark the fixture and features proposed to be provided. Clearly
note any deviation(s) from the specified fixture.
2.
Submit fluorescent fixture ballast manufacturer name, model number and clearly note any
deviations from the specified ballasts.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Fixtures, Emergency Lighting Units, Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and
labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
B.
Materials shall be new and a standard cataloged product of the manufacturer.
unproven designs will not be acceptable.
2.2
Experimental or
LIGHTING FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Lighting fixtures shall be furnished complete with plaster frames where required by room finish. Lay-in
type fixtures installed in grid ceilings shall be furnished with four (4) hold down clips. Lay-in type fixtures
indicated to be installed in gyp board ceilings shall be furnished with mounting kits.
B.
Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compatibility for recessed fixtures.
C.
Incandescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where luminaire efficacy rating (LER) is specified, test
according to NEMA LE 5A.
D.
Fluorescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5 and
NEMA LE 5A as applicable.
E.
High-Intensity Discharge (HID) Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according
to NEMA LE 5B.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
26 5000 - 1
Lighting
August 8, 2014
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
F.
Exterior Luminaires: Comply with UL 1598, and listed and labeled for installation in wet locations by a
Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
G.
Plastic Parts: High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV
radiation.
2.3
BALLASTS
A.
Ballasts for Linear Fluorescent Lamps:
1.
Advance Optanium High-Efficiency Programmed Start for standard ballasts, Advance Mark X for
dimming ballasts. Ballasts as manufactured by Advance. No substitutions are allowed.
2.
Electronic: Comply with ANSI C82.11; programmed-start type.
a.
Sound Rating: A, except B for T12/HO and T12/Slimline lamp ballasts.
b.
Ballast Factor (BF): 0.88 or higher.
c.
Power Factor: 0.98 or higher.
3.
Electromagnetic: Comply with ANSI C82.1; energy saving, high-power factor, Class P, and
having automatic-reset thermal protection.
4.
Low-Temperature Ballast Capability, when required: Rated by its manufacturer for reliable
starting and operation of indicated lamp(s) at temperatures zero deg F and higher.
5.
Dimmer Controlled: Electronic type.
a.
Dimming Range: 100 to 20 percent of rated lamp lumens.
b.
Ballast Input Watts: Can be reduced to 20 percent of normal.
c.
Compatibility: Certified by manufacturer for use with specific dimming control system and
lamp type indicated.
B.
Ballasts for Compact Fluorescent Lamps: Electronic programmed rapid-start type, complying with ANSI
C 82.11.
1.
Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit.
2.
Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement.
3.
Sound Rating: A.
4.
BF: 0.95 or higher unless otherwise indicated.
5.
Power Factor: 0.98 or higher.
C.
Internal-Type Emergency Fluorescent Power Unit: Self-contained, modular, battery-inverter unit, factory
mounted within lighting fixture body and compatible with ballast. Comply with UL 924.
1.
Emergency Connection: Operate one fluorescent lamp(s) continuously at an output of 1100
lumens. Connect unswitched circuit to battery-inverter unit and switched circuit to fixture ballast.
2.
Night-Light Connection: Operate one fluorescent lamp continuously.
3.
Test Push Button and Indicator Light: Visible and accessible without opening fixture or entering
ceiling space.
4.
Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type.
5.
Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state, constant-current type with sealed power transfer relay.
D.
Ballasts for Metal-Halide Lamps:
1.
Electromagnetic: Comply with ANSI C82.4 and UL 1029.
a.
Constant-wattage autotransformer or regulating high-power-factor type.
2.
Electronic:
a.
Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit.
b.
Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 15 percent.
c.
Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41, Category A or better.
E.
Ballasts for High-Pressure Sodium Lamps: Electromagnetic type, with solid-state igniter/starter.
Igniter/starter shall have an average life in pulsing mode of 10,000 hours at an igniter/starter-case
temperature of 90 deg C.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
26 5000 - 2
Lighting
August 8, 2014
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
2.4
EXIT SIGNS
A.
2.5
Internally Lighted Signs: Comply with UL 924.
1.
Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs, 70,000 hours minimum of rated lamp life.
2.
Sign colors and lettering size shall be as indicated on the Electrical drawings.
3.
Signs shall be furnished with directional arrows as indicated on the Electrical drawings
4.
Furnished with self contained emergency power battery pack with field replaceable NiCad battery
capable of operating the sign at full light output for 90 minutes, unless otherwise noted. Power
packs shall be factory mounted in the signs.
EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS
A.
2.6
Description: Self-contained units complying with UL 924.
1.
Battery: Sealed, field replaceable, maintenance-free, lead-acid type; capable of operating one
lamp at a minimum of 33% of full light output for 90 minutes.
2.
Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay.
3.
Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and
demonstrates unit operability.
4.
LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow
indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.
5.
Unless specifically noted to be an un-switched night light, emergency fixtures shall be connected
to normally be group switched with other lighting fixtures in the space installed.
LAMPS
A.
Shall be the types designed for the fixture and as recommended by the fixture manufacturer. Lamps
shall be sized in accordance with the fixture schedule and as follows unless otherwise noted.
B.
Provide lamps for all fixtures as scheduled. All lamps of each source type (i.e. metal halide, fluorescent,
compact fluorescent, etc.) shall be supplied by a single manufacturer.
C.
Nominal 48” lamps: T8 rapid-start lamps, rated 28 W maximum, 2800 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 75
(minimum), color temperature 3500 K, and average rated life 20,000 hours unless otherwise indicated.
Philips #F32T8/ADV835/EW/ALTO or approved equal.
D.
Nominal 24” lamps: T8 rapid-start lamps, rated 17 W maximum, 1300 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 75
(minimum), color temperature 3500 K, and average rated life of 20,000 hours unless otherwise
indicated.
E.
Compact Fluorescent Lamps: Four-pin, CRI 82 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K, average rated life
of 10,000 hours at three hours operation per start unless otherwise indicated. GE “Biax” or approved
equal.
1.
13 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 900 initial lumens (minimum).
2.
18 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 1200 initial lumens (minimum).
3.
26 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 1800 initial lumens (minimum).
4.
32 W: T4, triple tube, rated 2400 initial lumens (minimum).
5.
42 W: T4, triple tube, rated 3200 initial lumens (minimum).
6.
57 W: T4, triple tube, rated 4300 initial lumens (minimum).
7.
70 W: T4, triple tube, rated 5200 initial lumens (minimum).
F.
High-Pressure Sodium Lamps: ANSI C78.42, CRI 21 (minimum), color temperature 1900 K, and
average rated life of 24,000 hours, minimum.
G.
Metal-Halide Lamps: ANSI C78.43, with minimum CRI 65 and color temperature 3500 K.
H.
Pulse-Start, Metal-Halide Lamps: Minimum CRI 65 and color temperature 3500 K.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
26 5000 - 3
Lighting
August 8, 2014
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
I.
Ceramic, Pulse-Start, Metal-Halide Lamps: Minimum CRI 80 and color temperature 3500 K.
J.
Incandescent Lamps: Rated for 120V; when installed in fixtures controlled by “wall box” dimmers
provide “rough service” type lamps for minimizing lamp filament noise.
K.
Lamp Manufacturers:
1.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a.
Phillips Lighting
b.
General Electric
c.
Sylvania
d.
Osram
2.
Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01.
2.7
RETROFIT KITS FOR FLUORESCENT LIGHTING FIXTURES
A.
2.8
Comply with UL 1598 listing requirements.
1.
Reflector Kit: UL 1598, Type I. Suitable for two- to four-lamp, surface-mounted or recessed
lighting fixtures by improving reflectivity of fixture surfaces.
2.
Ballast and Lamp Change Kit: UL 1598, Type II. Suitable for changing existing ballast, lamps, and
sockets.
REQUIREMENTS FOR FLUORESCENT LIGHTING FIXTURES
A.
2.9
Fluorescent fixtures shall be in accordance with the fixture schedule and as follows:
1.
All fixture finishes shall be factory applied after the fixture is fabricated. No pre-painted fixture
bodies or parts are acceptable.
2.
Finished interior housing shall have a minimum reflectance of 90%.
3.
Fixtures shall be designed to operate continuously at 27 degrees C. ambient at 5% above nominal
voltage.
4.
Fixtures shall be tested by a recognized laboratory for conformance with the above requirements
and copies of certified test data shall be submitted for approval.
5.
Fixtures installed on this project shall be identical in every respect to the fixtures submitted and
approved.
6.
Where acrylic lenses are specified, lenses shall be pattern 12, virgin acrylic with a nominal
thickness of 0.125".
7.
Where parabolic louvers are specified, the minimum depth of the parabolic louver shall be 3 inches.
REQUIREMENTS FOR INDIVIDUAL LIGHTING FIXTURES
A.
Fixtures as indicated on Electrical drawings and in lighting schedules.
B.
Manufacturers:
1.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide lighting fixtures
indicated on Electrical drawings and in lighting schedules, or product comparable in all ways
(including color, style, finish, etc.) by a manufacturer who is regularly engaged in the manufacture
of lighting fixtures and whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less
than 5 years.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Coordinate ceiling-mounted luminaire with ceiling construction, mechanical work, and security and fireprevention features mounted in ceiling space and on ceiling.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
26 5000 - 4
Lighting
August 8, 2014
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
B.
Lighting fixtures shall be installed in accordance with NECA/IESNA 500, Recommended Practice for
Installing Indoor Commercial Lighting Systems (ANSI).
C.
Refer to Architectural Reflected Ceiling Plan(s) for exact locations of ceiling mounted lighting fixtures.
D.
Coordinate fixture locations with other ceiling mounted mechanical and electrical devices. If the fixture
cannot be installed where indicated due to any obstruction, the Contractor shall move the fixture up to
ten (10) feet in any direction directed prior to its installation without additional cost to the Owner.
E.
Lighting Fixtures: Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls. Install lamps in each fixture.
F.
Comply with NFPA 70 for minimum fixture supports. Provide special supports or mounting construction
where necessary to meet architectural requirements and per manufacturer's specifications and
recommendations.
G.
Provide independent wire supports from both ends of each lay-in fluorescent fixture directly to structure
in accordance with requirements for seismic zone 2.
H.
Suspended Lighting Fixture Support:
1.
Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches, brace to limit swinging.
2.
Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Fixtures: Suspend with twin-stem hangers.
3.
Continuous Rows: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod for suspension for
each unit length of fixture chassis, including one at each end.
I.
Where three and four lamp fluorescent fixtures are indicated to be switched by two (2) switches, they
shall be connected as follows:
1.
Three lamp fixtures shall be furnished with paired ballasts for switching the center lamp in each
fixture on one switch, the two outside lamps on the other switch.
2.
Four lamp fixtures shall have two 2 lamp ballasts for switching the inside lamps on one switch, the
outside lamps on the other switch.
J.
Recessed incandescent and compact fluorescent fixtures mounted in ceiling tiles shall be furnished with
metal bars to support the fixture from the ceiling suspension members.
K.
Outlet boxes for surface mounted fixtures shall have box supports attached to the ceiling supporting
members.
L.
Install fixtures with finishing frames firmly to the ceiling and furnish gaskets as necessary to prevent light
leaks.
M.
Exit signs shall be firmly mounted to the ceilings or walls as specified and as follows.
1.
For ceiling mounting in 2 x 4 lay-in ceilings, install a 2'x 4' x 1/2" plywood panel above the ceiling
tile. For 2 x 2 lay-in ceilings, install a 2'x 2' x 1/2" plywood panel. Secure the exit sign to the ceiling
with fasteners through the ceiling tile into the plywood panel above.
2.
For mounting in stud walls, install a metal member between studs to firmly support the sign.
3.
For ceiling mounting in gyp board ceilings, install a metal member supported with ceiling hanger
wire from the building structure.
N.
Install lay-in troffers with maximum of 6 ft. flexible conduit whips. Support whips above ceiling panels
with approved clips attached to ceiling support wires.
O.
In fire-rated ceilings, lighting fixture support wire shall be marked red.
P.
Air-Handling Fixtures: Install with dampers closed and ready for adjustment.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
26 5000 - 5
Lighting
August 8, 2014
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
Q.
Align luminaries, and clean inside and outside of fixtures, lenses, and diffusers prior to final acceptance.
Any scratches or blemishes in fixture painted finishes shall be touched up in matching paint. Scratches
in anodized or duranotic finishes shall be repaired or part shall be replaced as directed by the
Architect/Engineer. Any burned-out lamps and defective ballasts shall be replaced.
R.
When light fixtures are to be installed with the building insulation system placed directly on top of the
fixture, the fixture shall be protected in accordance with the Fire Resistance Directory.
END OF SECTION
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
26 5000 - 6
Lighting
August 8, 2014
OU Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
SECTION 28 3111
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
The Division 1 General Conditions applying to the General Contractor also apply to this Subcontractor
as modified by Division 28 requirements.
SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A.
The equipment and installation supervision furnished by the General Contractor under this specification,
is to be performed by a Simplex Grinnell authorized installer. This system work will be added to the
existing building’s Simplex brand Fire Alarm Network.
B.
Fire alarm system devices shall be submitted for approval.
C.
REFER TO SECTIONS 01 3000 AND 26 0010 FOR SUBMITTAL FORM AND REQUIREMENTS.
D.
Submittal additional documents: To facilitate review, include copies of annotated Contract Drawings, as
needed, to depict component locations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Comply with NFPA 72, NFPA 70, and local code requirements.
B.
UL listed and labeled for their intended purpose.
C.
This building has a Simplex brand fire alarm panel. Each and all items of the Fire Alarm System shall
be listed as a product of a SINGLE fire alarm system manufacturer (Simplex), under the appropriate
category by Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc. (UL), and shall bear the “U.L.” label. All control equipment
is to be listed under UL category UOJZ as a single control unit. Partial listing shall NOT be acceptable
D.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
E.
The entire installed system and all integrated system operations shall be within the guidelines of the IBC
International Building Code.
F.
All control equipment must have transient protection devices to comply with UL864 requirements.
G.
In addition to the UL-UOJZ requirement mentioned above, the system controls shall be UL listed for
Power Limited Applications per NEC 760. All circuits must be marked in accordance with NEC article
760-23.
H.
Each sensor base shall contain a LED that will flash each time it is scanned by the control panel (once
every 4 seconds). When the control panel determines that a sensor is in the alarm or a trouble
condition, the control panel shall command the LED on that sensor’s base to turn on steady indicating
the abnormal condition. Sensors which do not provide a visible indication of an abnormal condition at
the sensor location shall not be acceptable. Sensor bases, as shown on the plans, shall be provided
with a relay driver output that is to be controlled either automatically or manually from the control panel.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
28 3111 - 1
Digital, Addressable
Fire-Alarm System
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
Each sensor shall contain a magnetically actuated test switch to provide for easy alarm testing at the
sensor location.
I.
Each sensor shall be scanned by the control panel for its type identification to prevent inadvertent
substitution of another sensor type. The control panel shall operate with the installed device but shall
initiate a “Wrong Device” trouble condition until the proper type is installed or the programmed sensor
type is changed.
J.
The sensor’s electronics shall be immune from false alarms caused by EMI and RFI.
K.
All devices will be supervised for trouble conditions. The system control panel will be capable of
indicating the type of trouble condition (open, short, device missing/failed). Should a device fail, it will
not hinder the operation of other system devices. Should a problem occur on a particular wire run, it will
not affect other wire runs.
2.2
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
2.3
Noncoded, addressable system, with multiplexed signal transmission, dedicated to fire-alarm service
only.
FIRE-ALARM CONTROL UNIT
A.
Project calls for use or changes to existing control unit. See Electrical drawings for specifics on existing
control unit and changes to it.
B.
Alphanumeric Display and System Controls: Arranged for interface between human operator at firealarm control unit and addressable system components including annunciation and supervision.
Displays programming and control menu and alarm, supervisory, and component status messages.
Programming shall be updated for all system changes.
1.
The Control Panel’s display shall be backlit for enhanced readability. So as to conserve battery
standby power, it shall not be lit during an AC power failure unless an alarm condition occurs or
there should be keypad activity.
2.
The display shall support both upper and lower case letters. Lowercase letters shall be used for
softkey titles and prompting the user. Uppercase letters shall be used for System Status
Information. A cursor shall be visible when entering information.
C.
Equipment Enclosures
1.
Provided cabinet(s) will be of sufficient size to accommodate the equipment. The cabinet(s) shall
be equipped with locks and transparent door panel(s) providing freedom from tampering yet
allowing full view of the various lights and controls.
D.
Initiating Device, Notification Appliance, and Signaling Line Circuits: NFPA 72, Class B.
1.
Initiating Device Circuits: Style B.
2.
Notification Appliance Circuits: Style X.
3.
Signaling Line Circuits: Style 1.
4.
Install no more than 50 addressable devices on each signaling line circuit.
E.
Door Controls: Door hold-open devices that are controlled by smoke detectors at doors in smoke barrier
walls shall be connected to fire-alarm system.
F.
Transmission to Remote Alarm Receiving Station: Automatically transmit alarm, supervisory, and
trouble signals to a remote alarm station.
G.
Primary Power: 24-V dc obtained from 120-V ac service and a power-supply module. Initiating devices,
notification appliances, signaling lines, and trouble signals shall be powered by 24-V dc source.
1.
Alarm current draw of entire fire-alarm system shall not exceed 80 percent of the power-supply
module rating.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
28 3111 - 2
Digital, Addressable
Fire-Alarm System
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
H.
Secondary Power: 24-V dc supply system with batteries, automatic battery charger, and automatic
transfer switch.
1.
Batteries: Sealed lead calcium.
I.
Instructions: Computer printout or typewritten instruction card mounted behind a plastic or glass cover in
a stainless-steel or aluminum frame. Include interpretation and describe appropriate response for
displays and signals. Briefly describe the functional operation of the system under normal, alarm, and
trouble conditions.
2.4
MANUAL FIRE-ALARM BOXES
A.
Each and all items of the Fire Alarm System shall be listed as a product of a SINGLE fire alarm system
manufacturer. Manufacturer to match existing control unit manufacturer.
B.
General Requirements for Manual Fire-Alarm Boxes: Comply with UL 38.
1.
Single-action mechanism, breaking-glass or plastic-rod type. With integral addressable module
arranged to communicate manual-station status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control
unit.
2.
Double-action mechanism requiring two actions to initiate an alarm, breaking-glass or plastic-rod
type; with integral addressable module arranged to communicate manual-station status (normal,
alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.
2.5
SYSTEM SMOKE DETECTORS
A.
Each and all items of the Fire Alarm System shall be listed as a product of a SINGLE fire alarm system
manufacturer. Manufacturer to match existing control unit manufacturer.
B.
General Requirements for System Smoke Detectors: Comply with UL 268.
C.
Photoelectric Smoke Detectors: Detector address shall be accessible from fire-alarm control unit and
shall be able to identify the detector's location within the system and its sensitivity setting.
2.6
HEAT DETECTORS
A.
Each and all items of the Fire Alarm System shall be listed as a product of a SINGLE fire alarm system
manufacturer. Manufacturer to match existing control unit manufacturer.
B.
General Requirements for Heat Detectors: Comply with UL 521.
C.
Shall sense within a temperature range of 32degF to 158degF.
D.
Heat Detector, Combination Type: Actuated by either a fixed temperature or a rate of rise that exceeds
15 deg F per minute unless otherwise indicated.
2.7
NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES
A.
Each and all items of the Fire Alarm System shall be listed as a product of a SINGLE fire alarm system
manufacturer. Manufacturer to match existing control unit manufacturer.
B.
General Requirements for Notification Appliances: Connected to notification appliance signal circuits,
zoned as indicated, equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals for system
connections.
C.
Horns: Comply with UL 464. Horns shall produce a sound-pressure level of 90 dBA, measured 10 feet
from the horn, using the coded signal prescribed in UL 464 test protocol.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
28 3111 - 3
Digital, Addressable
Fire-Alarm System
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
D.
Speakers: Shall be tapped to provide adequate sound levels throughout the occupied space.
E.
Visible Notification Appliances: Xenon strobe lights comply with UL 1971, with clear or nominal white
polycarbonate lens mounted on an aluminum faceplate. White housing with the word "FIRE" engraved
in minimum 1-inch high red letters on the lens.
1.
Rated Light Output: 15/30/75/110 cd, selectable in the field. Provide a label inside the strobe
lens to indicate the listed candela rating of the specific appliance.
2.
Shall mount directly to standard single gang, double gang, or 4” square electrical boxes without
the use of special adapters or trim rings.
2.8
MAGNETIC DOOR HOLDERS
A.
Description: Equipped for wall or floor mounting, complete with matching doorplate.
B.
Material and Finish: Match door hardware.
C.
Shall have an approximate holding force of 35 lbs. The door portion shall have a stainless steel pivotal
mounted armature with shock absorbing nylon bearing. Unit shall be capable of being surface, flush,
semi-flush or floor mounted as required.
2.9
REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR
A.
2.10
A.
2.11
A.
Description: Shall provide an alphanumeric, 80 Character Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) that provides
clear language information as to the control unit point status (alarm, trouble, etc.), type of alarm (smoke
detector, pull station, etc.), number of alarms on the system, and a custom location label. The
annunciator(s) shall have a beige enamel finish. The annunciator shall communicate to the control panel
over one twisted, shielded pair of wire and operating power shall be 24VDC and be fused at the control
panel.
1.
Manual Control Switches shall be provided for the following functions:
a.
System Reset
b.
Alarm Silence
c.
Trouble Silence
d.
Manual Evacuation
ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE DEVICE
Description: Microelectronic monitor module, NRTL listed for use in providing a system address for
alarm-initiating devices for wired applications with normally open contacts.
DIGITAL ALARM COMMUNICATOR TRANSMITTER
Digital alarm communicator transmitter shall be acceptable to the remote central station and shall
comply with UL 632 and be listed and labeled by an NRTL.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with NFPA 72 for installation of fire-alarm equipment.
B.
Connecting to Existing Equipment: Verify that existing fire-alarm system is operational before making
changes or connections.
1.
Connect new equipment to existing control panel in existing part of the building.
2.
Connect new equipment to existing monitoring equipment at the supervising station.
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
28 3111 - 4
Digital, Addressable
Fire-Alarm System
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
3.
Expand, modify, and supplement existing monitoring equipment as necessary to extend existing
monitoring functions to the new points. New components shall be capable of merging with
existing configuration without degrading the performance of either system.
C.
All wiring shall be in red conduit. All junction boxes shall be sprayed red and labeled “Fire Alarm”.
Wiring color code shall be maintained throughout the installation.
D.
The contractor shall clean all dirt and debris from the inside and the outside of the fire alarm equipment
after completion of the installation.
E.
The manufacturer’s authorized representative shall provide on-site supervision of installation.
3.2
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Field tests shall be witnessed by Owner’s Representative and the Local Fire Marshal.
B.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
Visual Inspection: Conduct visual inspection prior to testing.
a.
Inspection shall be based on completed record Drawings and system documentation that is
required by NFPA 72 in its "Completion Documents, Preparation" Table in the
"Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of Fire Alarm Systems" Chapter.
b.
Comply with "Visual Inspection Frequencies" Table in the "Inspection" Section of the
"Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72; retain the
"Initial/Reacceptance" column and list only the installed components.
2.
System Testing: Comply with "Test Methods" Table in the "Testing" Section of the "Inspection,
Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72.
C.
Prepare test and inspection reports. Upon completion, the contractor shall so certify in writing to the
owner and general contractor.
D.
Maintenance Test and Inspection: Perform tests and inspections listed for weekly, monthly, quarterly,
and semiannual periods. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections.
E.
Annual Test and Inspection: One year after date of Substantial Completion, test fire-alarm system
complying with visual and testing inspection requirements in NFPA 72. Use forms developed for initial
tests and inspections.
3.3
WARRANTY
A.
The contractor shall warrant the installation and new devices of the fire alarm system to be free from
inherent mechanical and electrical defects for a period of one (1) year from the date of the completed
and certified test or from the date of first beneficial use.
END OF SECTION
The University of Oklahoma
August 8, 2014
OUFM 20131115 - 0
28 3111 - 5
Digital, Addressable
Fire-Alarm System
Chick-Fil-A Remodel
Project #56-14
RFP #R-15135-15
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY FOR PRINTING